Standardization of Building Codes, Standards and Specifications For Low-Cost (Affordable) Units-2021 - Compressed

_________________________________________________________________________________
Standardization of Building Codes, Standards

and Specifications for Low-Cost (Affordable)Units
Pakistan Engineering Council, Islamabad
First Edition - Copyright ® 2021
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page ii
PREFACE
Pakistan like most developing countries, is facing an acute shortage of housing. It is estimated that
the annual demand for housing units is approximately 700,000 a year, whereas, only about half of this
demand is met. On the whole, the housing deficit is estimated between 10 to 12 million units and is
growing every year. To address the situation, the Prime Minister of Pakistan envisioned and initiated
Naya Pakistan Housing Program (NPHP) “to deliver five million housing units with allied amenities
to all citizens, especially focusing on the financially underserved and middle-income communities,
as a measure of comprehensive socio-economic uplift”. The program would provide housing facility
to the homeless people by accelerating the economic activity and also provides job opportunities to a
large extent in the country. The Naya Pakistan Housing and Development Authority (NAPHDA) being
a corporation was established on 15th January 2020 through an Act of Parliament for the purpose of
planning, development, construction, and management of real estate development schemes and
projects including housing. The Authority being the developing arm of the government is pursuing
multiple objectives in the realm of housing and infrastructure development on both profit and non-
profit basis throughout the country.
NAPHDA is very much committed to ensure quality assurance in the housing sector development
projects especially the Low-Cost Housing Units. For the purpose, NAPHDA joined hands with
Pakistan Engineering Council (PEC) for the development of Standards Specifications for Low-Cost
(Affordable) Units. Accordingly, PEC notified a high profile “Working Group for Standardization
of Building Codes, Standards and Specifications for Low-Cost (Affordable) Units” on
14th December 2020 which comprised the following eminent experts:
1. Engr. Prof. Dr. Sarosh Hashmat Lodi Convener

Vice Chancellor, NED University of Engineering and Technology, Karachi.
2. Engr. Brig. Abid Saleem Member

Executive Director (Monitoring) NAPHDA, Islamabad.
3. Arc. Plnr. Kalim Siddiqui Member

Chairman, Pakistan Council of Architects and Town Planners, Lahore
4. Chair Prof. Engr. Dr. Shuaib H. Ahmad Member

Head CAHSBE, NED University of Engineering and Technology, Karachi
5. Engr. Prof. Dr. Muhammad Ali Memon Member

Associate Professor Prof. Deptt. of Electrical Engineering, NED, Karachi
6. Engr. Zaigham Mahmood Rizvi Member

Chairman, Naya Pakistan Housing Program
7. Mr. Fayyaz Ilyas Member

Chairman, Association of Builders and Developers of Pakistan (ABAD), Karachi
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page iii
8. Dr. Engr. Fawad Ahmed Najam
Assistant Prof. Department of Structural Engineering, NUST, Islamabad Member
9. Engr. Danish Bin Rauf Member

Chairman Southern Region, ABAD, Karachi
10. Arc. Hammad Husain Member

President League of Architects Pakistan, Islamabad
11. Arc. Azar Raza Khan Member

Principal Architect, Azar Raza Architects, Islamabad
12. Engr. Faiz Muhammad Bhutta Member

Sr. Energy Consultant and CEO Techfa Consulting, Lahore
13. Mr. Faiz ul Sibtain Secretary to Committee

Think Tank Department, Pakistan Engineering Council, Islamabad.
The Committee held various meetings and successfully developed “Standardization of Building
Codes, Standards and Specifications for Low-Cost (Affordable) Units”. The Committee
performed extraordinary hard work and completed this task within five months. The Convener highly
appreciated the contribution of expert members and significant work of the “Editorial Committee”.
This document is based on well-recognized standards and best practices developed by reputed national
and international code developing organizations.
The feedback/ comments sought from the Provincials Departments were deliberated and the relevant
inputs have been included in the document by the expert “Working Group”.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page iv
Preface ................................................................................................................................................. iii
SECTION 1 - GENERAL ITEMS........................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Definition .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Purpose ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Applicability ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Interpretation......................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 Licensed design professional ................................................................................................ 1
1.6 Authority Having Jurisdiction .............................................................................................. 1
1.7 The Engineer ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.8 Building Official ................................................................................................................... 2
1.9 Quality of Units (Houses or Homes) .................................................................................... 2
1.10 Materials ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.11 Approval of Materials, Products or Systems ........................................................................ 3
1.12 Construction Practice ............................................................................................................ 3
SECTION 2 - EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Scope..................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Clearing and Grubbing-Up ................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Excavation ............................................................................................................................ 4
SECTION 3 - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE .................................................................. 8
Scope..................................................................................................................................... 8
General.................................................................................................................................. 8
Related Specifications........................................................................................................... 8
Materials ............................................................................................................................. 11
Aggregates ...................................................................................................................... 11
Cement and Cementitious Materials ............................................................................... 13
Reinforcement ................................................................................................................. 15
Reinforcement Fixing ..................................................................................................... 16
Concrete .......................................................................................................................... 17
Tests for Concrete Quality .............................................................................................. 26
3.4.8.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 26
3.4.8.2 Samples ........................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.8.3 Adequacy of Mix ............................................................................................................ 27
Repair of Surface Defects ................................................................................................... 29
Concrete Construction Tolerance ....................................................................................... 30
Tolerance for Pre-cast Concrete: ........................................................................................ 32
Tolerance for Pavements .................................................................................................... 32
Plant and Equipment ........................................................................................................... 32
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page v
Acceptance of Structure ...................................................................................................... 35
Methods of Measurement of Concrete Works .................................................................... 37
SECTION 4 – MASONRY – PART 1 ............................................................................................... 41
4.1. Concrete Block Masonry..................................................................................................... 41
4.1.1 Scope................................................................................................................................... 41
4.1.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 41
4.1.3 Concrete, Masonry Units .................................................................................................... 41
4.1.4 Cement Mortar for Masonry ............................................................................................... 42
4.1.5 Masonry and Jointing .......................................................................................................... 42
4.1.6 Coordination ....................................................................................................................... 44
4.1.7 Protection and Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 44
4.1.8 Samples ............................................................................................................................... 44
4.1.9 Testing ................................................................................................................................ 44
4.1.10 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................. 44
SECTION 4 – MASONRY – PART II............................................................................................... 45
4.2. Brick Masonry .................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.1 Scope................................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.2. Codes and Standards ....................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3. Submittals ....................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.4 Tolerances ........................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.6. Delivery and Storage ....................................................................................................... 47
4.2.7 Mortar ............................................................................................................................. 47
4.2.8. Bricks .............................................................................................................................. 48
4.2.9. Scaffolding ...................................................................................................................... 49
4.2.10. Execution ........................................................................................................................ 49
4.2.11 Repairing Brickwork ....................................................................................................... 50
4.2.12. Horizontal Damp Proof Course ....................................................................................... 51
4.2.13. Vertical Damp Proof Course ........................................................................................... 51
4.2.14. Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................. 51
SECTION 5 - CARPENTRY AND JOINERY .................................................................................. 53
5.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 53
5.2 Submittals ........................................................................................................................... 53
5.3 Applicable Standards .......................................................................................................... 53
5.4 Tolerances ........................................................................................................................... 54
5.5 Delivery and Storage .......................................................................................................... 54
5.6 Products .............................................................................................................................. 54
5.6.1 Timber............................................................................................................................. 54
5.6.2 Hardware......................................................................................................................... 56
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page vi
5.6.3 Execution ........................................................................................................................ 58
5.6.4 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................. 59
SECTION 6 - TERRAZZO WORK ................................................................................................... 61
6.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 61
6.2 Applicable Standard............................................................................................................ 61
6.3 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 61
6.3.1 Cement. Sand, Aggregate and Water for Concrete ......................................................... 61
6.3.2 Marble Chips .................................................................................................................. 61
6.3.3 Dividing Strips ................................................................................................................ 61
6.3.4 Angle Clips ..................................................................................................................... 61
6.3.5 Bolts of precast toilet partitions ...................................................................................... 62
6.3.6 Terrazzo Tiles ................................................................................................................. 62
6.3.7 Cleaning Compound ....................................................................................................... 62
6.4 Samples ............................................................................................................................... 62
6.5 Execution ............................................................................................................................ 62
6.5.1 In Situ Terrazzo Flooring ................................................................................................ 62
6.5.2 Terrazzo Dado & Skirting............................................................................................... 63
6.5.3 Terrazzo on Stairs ........................................................................................................... 63
6.5.4 Terrazzo Finished Precast Partitions of Urinals.............................................................. 63
6.5.5 Terrazzo Tile Works ....................................................................................................... 64
6.6 Measurements and Payments .............................................................................................. 64
SECTION 7 - CERAMIC TILES ....................................................................................................... 66
7.1 General - Ceramic Tile Finishes .......................................................................................... 66
7.2 Coordination ....................................................................................................................... 66
7.3 Submittals ........................................................................................................................... 66
7.4 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................... 68
7.5 Mockups.............................................................................................................................. 69
7.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ......................................................................................... 69
7.7 Products .............................................................................................................................. 70
7.8 Execution ............................................................................................................................ 79
7.8.1 Examination ........................................................................................................................ 79
7.8.2 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 80
7.8.3 Installation, General ............................................................................................................ 80
7.8.4 Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule ............................................................................ 81
7.8.5 Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule ............................................................................. 82
7.8.6 Glass Mosaic Installation Schedule ..................................................................................... 83
7.8.7 Cleaning and Protecting ...................................................................................................... 83
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page vii
SECTION 8 - PLASTER AND POINTER ........................................................................................ 85
8.1. Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 85
8.2. Applicable Standards .......................................................................................................... 85
8.3. General ................................................................................................................................ 85
8.4. Materials ............................................................................................................................. 86
8.5. Proportioning and Mixing ................................................................................................... 87
8.6. Preparation of Surface to Be Plastered ................................................................................ 87
8.7. Application of Plaster .......................................................................................................... 87
8.8. Metal Lath over Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Joint ................................................... 88
8.9. Beads & Profiles ................................................................................................................. 88
8.10. Cleaning and Protection ...................................................................................................... 88
8.11. Tolerances ........................................................................................................................... 89
8.12. Pointing Work ..................................................................................................................... 89
8.13. Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................. 89
SECTION 9 - INTERIOR PAINTING ............................................................................................... 91
9.1 Part-I – General ................................................................................................................... 91
9.1.1 Scope............................................................................................................................... 91
9.1.2 Coordination: .................................................................................................................. 91
9.1.3 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Requirements: .................................................. 91
9.2 Submittals ........................................................................................................................... 91
9.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 91
9.2.2 Action Submittals ........................................................................................................... 91
9.2.3 Informational Submittals ................................................................................................ 92
9.3 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................... 93
9.3.1 Quality System................................................................................................................ 93
9.3.2 Applicator Qualifications ................................................................................................ 93
9.3.3 Source Limitations .......................................................................................................... 93
9.3.4 Proprietary Names .......................................................................................................... 93
9.3.5 Comparable Product Requests ........................................................................................ 93
9.3.6 Definitions and Abbreviations ........................................................................................ 93
9.4 Preconstruction Testing ....................................................................................................... 94
9.5 Mockups.............................................................................................................................. 94
9.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ......................................................................................... 95
9.7 Project Conditions ............................................................................................................... 95
9.8 Part -II - Products ................................................................................................................ 95
9.8.1 Manufacturers ..................................................................................................................... 95
9.8.2 Proposed Manufacturers...................................................................................................... 95
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page viii
9.8.3 Decorative Paints and Coatings........................................................................................... 95
9.8.4 Paint General ....................................................................................................................... 96
9.8.5 Material Compatibility ........................................................................................................ 96
9.8.6 Material Quality .................................................................................................................. 96
9.8.7 Colors, Textures, shades and Effects ................................................................................... 96
9.8.8 Health and Environmental Requirements ............................................................................ 96
9.9 Interior Primers ................................................................................................................... 97
9.10 Interior Fillers and Putties ................................................................................................... 98
9.11 Acrylic Emulsion for Cement Based Surfaces .................................................................... 98
9.12 Epoxy Paint for Cement Based Surfaces ........................................................................... 100
9.13 Polyurethane Paint for Cement Based Surfaces ................................................................ 101
9.14 Acrylic Emulsion Paint for Gypsum Boards and Cement Boards ..................................... 101
9.15 Opaque Finish of Wood Surfaces ...................................................................................... 101
9.16 Ferrous Surfaces Finish Paint System (Architectural Work Items) ................................... 101
9.17 Traffic-Related Paints ....................................................................................................... 102
9.18 Execution .......................................................................................................................... 102
9.18.1 Examination .................................................................................................................. 102
9.18.2 Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates .................................................................... 103
9.18.3 Suitability of Substrates ................................................................................................ 103
9.18.4 Coordination of Work ................................................................................................... 103
9.19 Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 103
9.19.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 103
9.19.2 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ 103
9.19.3 Surface Preparation ....................................................................................................... 104
9.19.4 Cement-Based Materials ............................................................................................... 104
9.19.5 Gypsum Boards............................................................................................................. 104
9.19.6 Ferrous Metals .............................................................................................................. 104
9.19.7 Structural Steel Substrates ............................................................................................ 105
9.19.8 Wood Substrates ........................................................................................................... 105
9.19.9 Material Preparation ..................................................................................................... 105
9.20 Application........................................................................................................................ 105
9.20.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 105
9.20.2 Scheduling Painting ...................................................................................................... 106
9.20.3 Application Procedures ................................................................................................. 106
9.20.4 Brushes ......................................................................................................................... 106
9.20.5 Rollers ........................................................................................................................... 106
9.20.6 Spray Equipment........................................................................................................... 106
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page ix
9.20.7 Minimum Coating Thickness........................................................................................ 106
9.20.8 Mechanical and Electrical Work................................................................................... 107
9.20.9 Prime Coats ................................................................................................................... 107
9.20.10 Completed Work ....................................................................................................... 107
9.20.11 Tint............................................................................................................................ 107
9.21 Field Quality Control ........................................................................................................ 107
9.22 Cleaning and Protection .................................................................................................... 107
9.23 Interior Painting Schedule ................................................................................................. 108
9.23.1 Special Paint System..................................................................................................... 108
9.23.2 Concrete and Concrete Masonry Surfaces .................................................................... 108
9.23.3 Concrete Masonry Shaft Walls ..................................................................................... 108
9.23.4 Gypsum Board and Cement-Based Board .................................................................... 109
9.23.5 Woodwork and Hardboard............................................................................................ 109
9.23.6 Ferrous Metal ................................................................................................................ 110
9.24 Exterior Painting ............................................................................................................... 110
9.24.1 Crete Sand Coating - (Free From Lead and Mercury) ................................................... 110
9.24.2 Surface Preparation ....................................................................................................... 110
9.24.3 Technical Data / Specification ...................................................................................... 111
SECTION-10 - GLAZING ............................................................................................................... 112
Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 112
Applicable Standards ........................................................................................................ 112
General.............................................................................................................................. 112
Delivery Storage and Handling......................................................................................... 112
Materials ........................................................................................................................... 113
Installation of Glazing ...................................................................................................... 114
Protection and Cleaning Of Glazing ................................................................................. 114
Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................... 114
SECTION 11 - ROOF WATER PROOFING SYSTEM .................................................................. 115
11.1 Scope of Works................................................................................................................. 115
11.2 Material (A) ...................................................................................................................... 115
11.3 For Normal To Moderate Rain Area (B) .......................................................................... 115
11.4 For Heavy Rain Area (C) .................................................................................................. 115
11.5 For Areas Where Greater Heat Insulation is required ...................................................... 116
11.6 Protection .......................................................................................................................... 116
11.7 Measurement..................................................................................................................... 116
11.8 Rate and Payment ............................................................................................................. 116
SECTION 12 - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS ..................................................................................... 117
12.1 Part 1 - General ................................................................................................................. 117
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page x
12.2 General Performance Requirements ................................................................................. 117
12.3 Submittals ......................................................................................................................... 118
12.4 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................. 119
12.5 Project Conditions ............................................................................................................ 119
12.6 Warranty ........................................................................................................................... 120
12.7 Part 2 - Products................................................................................................................ 120
12.7.1 Manufacturers ............................................................................................................... 120
12.7.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 120
12.7.3 Framing Systems........................................................................................................... 120
12.7.4 Glazing .......................................................................................................................... 122
12.7.5 Insect Screens ............................................................................................................... 122
12.7.6 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 123
12.7.7 Accessory Materials...................................................................................................... 124
12.7.8 Fabrication .................................................................................................................... 124
12.7.9 Aluminum Finish .......................................................................................................... 124
12.8 Part 3 - Execution ............................................................................................................. 125
12.8.1 Examination .................................................................................................................. 125
12.8.2 Installation .................................................................................................................... 125
12.8.3 Adjusting, Cleaning, and Protection ............................................................................. 125
SECTION 13 - TERMITE CONTROL ............................................................................................ 127
13.1 Part 1 - General ................................................................................................................. 127
13.1.1 Performance Requirements ........................................................................................... 127
13.1.2 Submittals ..................................................................................................................... 127
13.1.3 Project Conditions......................................................................................................... 128
13.1.4 Coordination ................................................................................................................. 128
13.1.5 Warranty ....................................................................................................................... 128
13.1.6 Maintenance Service ..................................................................................................... 128
13.2 Part 2 - Products................................................................................................................ 128
13.2.1 Manufacturers ............................................................................................................... 128
13.2.2 Soil Treatment............................................................................................................... 129
13.3 Part 3 - Execution ............................................................................................................. 129
13.3.1 Examination .................................................................................................................. 129
13.3.2 Preparation .................................................................................................................... 129
13.3.3 Applying Soil Treatment .............................................................................................. 129
SECTION 14 - CAR PARK CURBS AND WALKWAYS ............................................................. 131
14.1 Part 1 - General ................................................................................................................. 131
14.1.1 Submittals ..................................................................................................................... 131
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page xi
14.1.2 Quality Assurance ......................................................................................................... 131
14.2 Part 2 - Products................................................................................................................ 131
14.2.1 Formwork ..................................................................................................................... 131
14.2.2 Reinforcement ............................................................................................................... 132
14.2.3 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................................................. 132
14.2.4 Curing ........................................................................................................................... 132
14.2.5 Sealant Filled Joints ...................................................................................................... 132
14.2.6 Ancillary Materials ....................................................................................................... 132
14.2.7 Mix Designs .................................................................................................................. 132
14.3 Part 3 - Execution ............................................................................................................. 133
14.3.1 Execution, General........................................................................................................ 133
14.3.2 Curbs and Walkways .................................................................................................... 133
14.3.3 Finish ............................................................................................................................ 133
SECTION 15 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES....................................................... 134
15.1 Part 1 - General ................................................................................................................. 134
15.1.1 Performance Requirements and Selection Criteria ....................................................... 134
15.1.2 Submittals ..................................................................................................................... 135
15.1.3 Quality Assurance ......................................................................................................... 135
15.1.4 Coordination ................................................................................................................. 136
15.1.5 Warranty ....................................................................................................................... 136
15.2 Part 2 - Products................................................................................................................ 136
15.2.1 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 136
15.2.2 Architectural Joint Systems, General ............................................................................ 137
15.2.3 Joint Systems, General .................................................................................................. 137
15.3 Part 3 - Execution ............................................................................................................. 138
15.3.1 Examination .................................................................................................................. 138
15.3.2 Preparation .................................................................................................................... 138
15.3.3 Installation .................................................................................................................... 139
15.3.4 Protection ...................................................................................................................... 140
SECTION 16 - PLUMBING WORKS ............................................................................................. 141
16.1 Part 1 -Particular Specifications ....................................................................................... 141
16.2 Part 2 - Underground and Drainage System. .................................................................... 143
16.3 Part 3 - Internal Sanitary System ...................................................................................... 146
16.4 Part 4 - Installation of Sanitary Appliances ...................................................................... 147
16.5 Part 5 -Cold and Hot Water Supply .................................................................................. 149
16.6 Part 6 - Pipe Work and Fitting .......................................................................................... 152
16.7 Part 7 - Pipe Work and Fitting – Fire Fighting ................................................................. 157
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page xii
16.8 Part 8 – Plumbing Equipment- Equipment and Controls.................................................. 160
SECTION 17 - ELECTRICAL WORKS ......................................................................................... 163
17.1 Section 1 - Technical Provisions ...................................................................................... 163
17.2 Section 2 - PVC Conduits and Accessories ...................................................................... 168
17.3 Section -3 Wires, Cables and Cords ................................................................................. 171
17.4 Section -4 Wiring Accessories .......................................................................................... 172
17.5 Section -5 Point Wiring, Circuit Wiring and Socket Outlet Wiring ................................. 174
17.6 Section -6 Light Fixtures .................................................................................................. 175
17.7 Section -7 Power Cable..................................................................................................... 178
17.8 Section -8 Main L.T. Switch Board .................................................................................. 182
17.9 Section -9 Distribution Boards ......................................................................................... 187
17.10 Section -10 Earthing ..................................................................................................... 189
17.11 Section -11 Testing and Commissioning ...................................................................... 191
SECTION 18 - STEEL WORKS ...................................................................................................... 195
18.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 195
18.2 Submittals ......................................................................................................................... 195
18.3 Applicable Standards ........................................................................................................ 195
18.4 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................. 196
18.5 Materials ........................................................................................................................... 196
18.6 Execution .......................................................................................................................... 199
18.7 Delivery and Storage ........................................................................................................ 203
18.8 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................... 203
SECTION 19 - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT .................................................... 205
19.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 205
19.2 The EIA Process ............................................................................................................... 205
19.3 Conducting an EIA ........................................................................................................... 205
SECTION 20 - QUALITY ASSURANCE CRITERIA AND GUIDELINES FOR PREFABRICATED
UNITS .............................................................................................................................................. 211
20.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 211
20.2 Component and Structural-Level Tests for Prefabricated Units ....................................... 211
SECTION 21 - GUIDELINES FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM ............................................................ 214
21.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 214
21.2 Typical System Designs For Guidance Purposes – Not Mandatory ................................. 215
21.2.1 Solar PV System for Single Story House – Suitable for 05 Marla and 10 Marla Single
Phase Connected House ................................................................................................................ 216
21.2.2 5 KWP Rooftop Solar PV On-Grid without Battery with Net Metering for 10 Marla Single
or Double Story Three Phase Connection House ......................................................................... 217
21.2.3 Multiple Story Flats and Apartments ............................................................................ 219
21.2.4 Prepaid Metering for Houses and Flats of 3 Marla or Less .......................................... 219
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page xiii
APPENDIX-A .................................................................................................................................. 220
STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE........................................................................................ 220
A-1 General.............................................................................................................................. 220
A-2 Performance Requirements ............................................................................................... 223
A-3 Action Submittals ............................................................................................................. 225
A-4 Informational Submittals .................................................................................................. 226
A-5 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................. 226
A-6 Delivery, Storage, And Handling ..................................................................................... 227
A-7 Sequencing........................................................................................................................ 227
A-8 Products -Fabricators ........................................................................................................ 228
A-9 Form Materials.................................................................................................................. 228
A-10 Reinforcing Materials ................................................................................................... 228
A-11 Form Fabrication........................................................................................................... 232
A-12 Fabrication .................................................................................................................... 233
A-13 Insulated Panel Casting................................................................................................. 234
A-14 Fabrication Tolerances .................................................................................................. 234
A-15 Finishes ......................................................................................................................... 234
A-16 Source Quality Control ................................................................................................. 235
A-17 Site Preparation For Execution ..................................................................................... 236
A-18 Examination .................................................................................................................. 236
A-19 Erection ......................................................................................................................... 236
A-20 Field Quality Control .................................................................................................... 238
A-21 Repairs .......................................................................................................................... 238
A-22 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ 239
APPENDIX B ................................................................................................................................... 240
HOLLOW & LIGHT GAUGE STEEL SECTIONS ........................................................................ 240
B-1 General.............................................................................................................................. 240
B-2 Industry Codes And Standards ......................................................................................... 240
B-3 Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 243
B-4 Requirements .................................................................................................................... 244
B-5 Materials ........................................................................................................................... 245
B-6 Material Specifications ..................................................................................................... 249
B-7 Workmanship .................................................................................................................... 251
B-8 Available Soft Wares ........................................................................................................ 254
B-9 Available Manufacturers................................................................................................... 254
APPENDIX-C................................................................................................................................... 255
PAKISTAN STANDARDS AND QUALITY CONTROL AUTHORITY (PSQCA) STANDARDS
.......................................................................................................................................................... 255
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page xiv
APPENDIX-D .................................................................................................................................. 267
METRICATION CONVERSION GUIDE ....................................................................................... 267
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page xv
SECTION 1 – GENERAL TERMS
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 1 - GENERAL ITEMS

1.1 Definition
The State Bank of Pakistan in consultation with stakeholders defines the low-cost housing as
follows:
a. Covered area of the housing unit / apartment up to 850 square feet,

b. Maximum value of the housing unit/apartment up to PKR 3.5 million,
c. Loan size up to PKR 3.15 million.
1.2 Purpose
The purpose of this specification document is to provide for public health and safety by
establishing minimum requirements for strength, serviceability, durability and integrity of
affordable low cost units to be built in Pakistan.
1.3 Applicability
This specification document shall apply to affordable low cost units to be built in Pakistan
under the requirements of the Building Code of Pakistan or the code adopted Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ). If no general building code is adopted, this document shall apply for the
construction of the affordable housing units.
1.4 Interpretation
If conflicts occur between clauses of this document and those of standards and documents
referenced in the beginning of individual sections of this document shall govern.
1.5 Licensed design professional
All references in this Code to the licensed design professional (LDP) shall be understood to
mean the person who is licensed and responsible for, and in charge of, the
Architectural/Structural design or inspection. For Architectural and Town Planning work,
PCATP and for Engineering works PEC registered and licensed professional will be
considered respectively.
1.6 Authority Having Jurisdiction
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) means an organization, office, or individual responsible

for enforcing the requirements of a code or standard, or for approving equipment, materials,
an installation, or a procedure.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 1
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.7 The Engineer
The Engineer or Engineer of Record means a professional engineer who seals drawings,
reports, or documents for a project. The seal shall acknowledge that the professional engineer
prepared, coordinated, or had subordinates prepare under the direct supervision of the
professional engineer, drawings, reports, or documents for a project.
1.8 Building Official
The officer or other designated authority charged with the administration and enforcement of
this Specification.
1.9 Quality of Units (Houses or Homes)
a. The standard of construction shall be adequate for a minimum service life of twenty five
(25) to forty (40) years.
b. Where materials or methods are not clearly defined in the project documents, the engineer
shall assess contractor submittals for adequacy to required standards of construction
c. Written submittal shall be provided to the Licensed Design Professional or the Engineer
for all materials, products or systems for his approval. No material, product or system
shall be used until written approval is given by the Engineer.
1.10 Materials
a. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to all standard specifications, Codes of Practice,
Building Regulations or similar which are referred to in the Contract Documents. If no
standard is specified then the relevant IBC Standard will be deemed to apply, but the
Engineer may at his discretion accept materials in accordance with other standards
specifications if the quality is equivalent or superior to the Referenced Standards.
b. The Contractor shall fully demonstrate in detail supported by written documentation that
he has investigated all local manufactures of all products and materials listed in this
specifications.
c. Preference must be given to Pakistani produced materials and products. In the event that
the correct quality or cost margins are not met these shall be brought to attention of the
Employer prior to rejection. The Employer reserves the right to direct Contractors to
purchase locally produced materials rather than overseas materials where all other factors
are equal.
d. All overseas material manufactures shall comply with ISO 9000 requirements.
e. The abbreviations used in the document include:
 A.S.T.M - American Society for Testing and Materials.

 ACI – American Concrete Institute
 AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction
 AISI - American Iron And Steel Institute
 ASCE – American Society of Civil Engineers
 BS – British Standards
 BCP – Building Code of Pakistan
 I.S.O - International Standards Organization.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2
_________________________________________________________________________________
 IBC – International Building Code

 IRC – International Residential Code
 PSQCA - Pakistan Standards and Quality Control Authority
The applicable standard shall be the standard most recent date of publication. In addition
Referenced standards are also listed in the individual sections of this document.
1.11 Approval of Materials, Products or Systems
a. Approval of materials, products or systems in accordance with clause 1.1(c) shall not, in
any way, relieve the Contractor of full responsibility under the contract.
b. Approval of materials, products or systems not included in these specifications may be
submitted for approval to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for evaluation and
possible Approvals.
c. For the certain materials and components which are specified on the Drawings using
proprietary names, the Contractor may submit details of any alternative which meets the
said standard and quality to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for evaluation and
possible written approval.
1.12 Construction Practice
This document contains coverage for what is conventional and common in residential
construction practice. While the document aims to provide needed coverage for most
residential construction, it might not address construction practices and systems that are
atypical or rarely encountered in the industry.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3
SECTION 2 – EXCAVATION
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 2 - EXCAVATION
2.1 Scope
The work covered by this section of the specification consists in furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials, and in performing all operations in connection with
excavation, trenching and backfilling, in strict accordance with this section of specification
and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the CONTRACT.
2.2 Clearing and Grubbing-Up
The sites of all excavation shall be cleared of all shrubs, plants, bushes, large roots and other
surface materials. All such materials shall be removed and disposed of in a manner satisfactory
to the SITE ENGINEER. All trees and shrubbery that are designated by the SITE ENGINEER
to remain shall be adequately protected and preserved in an approved manner.
2.3 Excavation
2.3.1 All excavation, in any kind of soil encountered, shall be performed to the depths and widths
indicated or as otherwise specified. This would vary with local site conditions. During
excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a
sufficient distance from the banks of the excavation to avoid overloading and to prevent sides
from caving. Topsoil shall be stockpiled separately, for subsequent re-use as necessary. All
excavated material unsuitable or not required for backfilling shall be removed and collected
at a location approved by the SITE ENGINEER. Grading shall be done as may be necessary
to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water
accumulated therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods. Unless
otherwise indicated or approved by the SITE ENGINEER, excavation shall be open cut.
2.3.2 It is anticipated that all excavation work under this CONTRACT, will be earth excavation.
The term “earth” as used herein shall include all materials which do not in the opinion of the
SITE ENGINEER, require blasting, barring or wedging of material for removal from its
original bed.
2.3.3 The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate timbering or sheeting for excavation where
necessary, as part of the excavation work, to hold up the sides and ends of all excavations.
Should the sides and ends of any excavation give away, the CONTRACTOR shall, at no extra
cost to the EMPLOYER reinstate all disturbed ground. Any excavation carried beyond the
limits shown on the drawings and specified herein as the payment limits, shall be treated as
excess excavation and dealt with in the manner stated hereinafter.
2.3.4 When foundation level is reached, the SITE ENGINEER will inspect the exposed bottom and
give directions as to what further excavation, if any, he considers necessary. The excavation
shall be done in such a manner as to ensure that the work rests on a solid and perfectly clean
foundation. Where excavation is to be covered subsequently by permanent construction, the
CONTRACTOR shall, immediately after exposing the specified satisfactory foundation
proceed with the construction on that foundation. If the CONTRACTOR allows any portion
of such foundation to deteriorate due to exposure, he shall make good the foundations at no
extra cost to the EMPLOYER and to the satisfaction of the SITE ENGINEER.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.5 As part of the work, under the excavation items, the CONTRACTOR shall shore up all
buildings, walls poles and other structures, the stability of which is liable to be endangered by
the execution of the work and shall be fully responsible for all damages to life or property
resulting from any default of the CONTRACTOR.
2.3.6 If ordinary open-cut excavation is not possible or advisable, sheeting and bracing shall be
furnished and installed in excavations generally in accordance with the details shown on
drawings to provide safe working conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place all
sheeting walls, braces, timbers, and similar items, necessary for the safety of the work, the
general public and adjacent property. Sheeting and bracing shall be removed, as the work
progresses in such manner as to prevent damage to finished work and adjacent structures and
property. As soon as it is withdrawn, all voids left by the sheeting and bracing shall be
carefully filled with selected material and compacted. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully
responsible for the safety of work in progress, for the finished work, the workmen, the public
and adjacent property. All sheeting and bracing shall be at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, as
part of the work under the excavation items and at no extra cost to the EMPLOYER.
2.3.7 All excavation made hereunder shall be properly maintained while they are open and exposed.
Sufficient suitable barricades, warning lights, signs and similar items shall be provided by the
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any personnel injury or
property damage due to his negligence.
2.3.8 As part of the work under the excavation items, and at no extra cost to the EMPLOYER, the
CONTRACTOR shall build all drains and do ditching, pumping, well pointing, bailing and
other work necessary to keep the excavation clear of ground, sewage or storm water during
the progress of the work and until the finished work is safe from injury. The CONTRACTOR
shall provide all necessary pumping equipment for the dewatering works as well as operating
personnel, maintenance, power etc. all at no extra cost to the EMPLOYER. All water pumped
or drained from the work shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the SITE
ENGINEER. Necessary precautions against flooding shall be taken.
2.3.9 The SITE ENGINEER may order, in writing, any or all shoring, sheeting and piling to be left
in place for safety reasons, whether such sheeting was shown on drawings or not. If left in
place, such sheeting shall be cut of at the elevation approved by the SITE ENGINEER, and
shall be driven tight and shall be paid for at the tendered rates.
2.3.10 The CONTRACTOR shall take special precautionary and protective measures with existing
subsurface facilities likely to be encounter during the execution of works such as sewers, drain
pipes, water mains, conduits, electric cables, communication cables and the foundations of
adjacent structures. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damage to any such facility
and shall repair the same at his expense whether or not this facility has been shown on the
drawings.
2.3.11 All surplus material excavated by the CONTRACTOR shall be disposed of at locations
approved by the SITE ENGINEER. The method of disposal shall not interfere with other
works and shall not damage or spoil other material. When it is necessary to haul earth material
over streets or pavements, the CONTRACTOR shall prevent such material from falling on the
streets or pavements.
2.3.12 After the completion of water lines, sewer lines, drainage facilities, foundations, walls and
other structures below the elevation of the final grade, all voids shall be backfilled with
suitable materials, as specified below.
2.3.13 Backfilling operations for structure shall be performed as part of the CONTRACTOR’S work
under the payment items for earth excavation, and at no extra cost to the EMPLOYER.
Backfill material for foundations, walls and other structures shall consist of excavated soil
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5
_________________________________________________________________________________
which is free from stones and hard clods, larger than 3 inches in any dimension and also free
from trash, lumber and other debris. Backfill material shall have enough moisture for proper
compaction, and shall be compacted in an approved manner to 85 percent of maximum density
for cohesive soil and 90 percent of maximum density for cohesion less soil. Backfill shall not
be placed against foundation walls earlier than 4 days after the placing if concrete or brick
work. After compaction and satisfactory completion of backfilling the CONTRACTOR shall
carry out the finished grading of the site to such grades and elevations as may be shown on
the drawings or required for proper drainage of the site.
2.3.14 The trenches for sewers shall be backfilled to the specified level with selected excavated
material or other approved material that is suitable for proper compaction. Trenches
improperly backfilled shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then
refilled and compacted to the specified density.
2.3.15 Normal backfilling operations in trenches shall be performed as part of the CONTRACTOR’S
work under the payment items for earth excavation and at no extra cost to the EMPLOYER.
2.3.16 Special sand backfill is to be provided when specifically required by the drawings or when
ordered in writing by the SITE ENGINEER. This work shall consist of removal of the
excavated material to waste and provision in lieu of graded clean and fill, free of all foreign
matter, such that 100% passes a ¾” screen with not more than 5% passing a No.4 sieve. This
shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density.
2.3.17 The maximum density of soil shall be determined in accordance with American Society for
Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 698-58T “Moisture Density Relations of Soils, using
5.5 lbs. Rammer and 12 inch Drop”.
2.3.18 The SITE ENGINEER will take tests using the calibrated sand cone method to determine the
density of soil in place. If soil in place fails to meet the specified degree of compaction it shall
be removed, replaced with approved material and compacted to the specified density in the
manner directed by the SITE ENGINEER, in the areas represented by the failing tests at no
additional cost to the EMPLOYER.
2.3.19 Where satisfactory materials for backfill are not available in sufficient quantity from required
excavation, “Earth Borrow” shall be obtained from suitable sources at the CONTRACTOR’S
responsibility as a separate payment item. The necessary clearing and grubbing of borrow
areas, disposal and burning of debris there from the developing of sources including any
access roads for hauling and the necessary right-of-way, and the satisfactory drainage of the
borrow areas, shall be considered as incidental items to borrow excavation. “Earth Borrow”
under this separate payment item shall be furnished and placed by the CONTRACTOR only
where specifically called for by means of notes on the contract drawings or by written order
of the SITE ENGINEER.
2.3.20 This section of specification covers the following payment items:
a) Earth Excavation
b) Special Sand Backfill
c) Earth Borrow
d) Shoring and Sheeting Left in place
Measurement of Earth Excavation shall be carried out by computing the volume of earth
excavation which is authorized for payment, as per dimensions shown on the drawings.
Payments for Earth Excavation shall be made at the respective unit rates per cubic feet as
listed in the Bills of Quantities of this contract.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.21 This payment item shall be used in connection with backfill in trenches, floors and foot paths
etc. Measurement of special sand backfill shall be carried out by computing the volume of
special sand backfill authorized for payment.
2.3.22 Payment for Special Sand Backfill shall be made at the unit rate per cubic feet stated in the
applicable Bill of Quantities of this contract. The quantities indicated in the Bill of Quantities
are provisional.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7
SECTION 3 – PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 3 - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
Scope
The work covered by this section of Specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials, and in performing all operation in connection with the
supply and installation of plain and reinforced concrete work, complete in strict accordance
with this section of the Specifications and the applicable drawings, subject to the conditions
of the CONTRACT.
General
a. Full co-operation shall be given to other trades to install embedded items.

b. Suitable templates or instructions, or both will be provided for setting items not placed in
the forms. Embedded items and their locations shall have been inspected and mix for
concrete and test required for quality of other materials or for mechanical operations shall
have been completed and approved, before concrete is placed.
c. For special concrete finishes and for special methods of construction e.g. slip forms, form
work shop drawings shall be designed and prepared by the CONTRACTOR at his own
cost. Approval of shop drawings as well as that of actual samples of finished concrete
shall be obtained before WORK is commenced.
d. CONTRACTOR shall also prepare BAR BENDING SCHEDULE and get the same
approved by the Project Manager prior to the commencement of work.
e. Approximate equivalent conversion of F.P.S. and S.I. units are indicated in the text.
Project Managers’ decision on any specific conversion shall be final and binding on all
parties.
Related Specifications
Latest editions of the following ACI, ASTM, CRSI, NRMCA, BS Standard are relevant to
these Specifications and equivalent Pakistan Standards and Quality Control Authority
(PSQCA) standards are also applicable.
For specific situation, only if provisions in the relevant ACI, ASTM, CRSI, NRMCA and
PSQCA documents are not available, BS standard may be used. Use of other sources shall be
approved by The Engineer.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 117 – Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary
ACI 117M - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary (Metric)
ACI 237R - Self-Consolidating Concrete
ACI 301-16 – Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 301M-16 - Specifications for Structural Concrete (Metric)
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305.1 - Specifications for Hot Weather Concreting
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 8
_________________________________________________________________________________
ACI 306.1 - Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 350.1 - Specifications for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete
Containment Structures
ACI 350.1M - Specifications for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete
Containment Structures (Metric)
ACI 350.5 - Specifications for Environmental Concrete Structures
ACI 350.5M - Specifications for Environmental Concrete Structures (Metric)
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual
ASTM International (ASTM)

Ready-Mixed Concrete
C 138-71 T Tentative Method of Test, for Weight per Cubic Foot. Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
C 143-78 Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
C 150-72 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
C 171-69 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
C 172-71 Standard Method of Sampling fresh Concrete.
C 173-71 Standard Method of Test for Air Content of freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method.
C 208-72 Standard Specification for Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber)
Structural and Decorative.
C 260-77 Standard Specifications for Air Entraining Admixtures
C 309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for curing Concrete.
C 31/ C31M Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field
C 33-78 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C 39-72 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical concrete Specimens.'
C 42-77 Standard Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete.
C 494-71 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
C 94-78 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete.
C150/C150M Standard Specifications for Portland cement
C330/C330M - 17a Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete
C1602/C1602M – 18 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
C1602/C1602M Standard Specifications for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
C1603 - 16 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Solids in Water
C1610/C1610M Standard Test Method for Static Segregation of Self-
Consolidating Concrete Using Column Technique
C1611/C1611M Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-
Consolidating Concrete
C1621/C1621M Standard Test Method for Passing Ability of Self-
Consolidating Concrete by J-Ring
C1712 Standard Test Method for Rapid Assessment of Static Segregation
Resistance of Self-Consolidating Concrete Using Penetration Test
C172-C172M Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 9
_________________________________________________________________________________
C1798 / C1798M - 19 Standard Specification for Returned Fresh Concrete for Use in a New
Batch of Ready-Mixed Concrete
C231-72T Tentative Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method.
C618 Standard Specifications for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
C685 / C685M – 17 Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching
and Continuous Mixing
C920 Standard Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C94 / C94M – 20 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
C989/C989M Standard Specifications for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
D1751 Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
D5249 Standard Specifications for Backer Material for Use with Cold- and
Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and
Asphalt Joints
E 329-70 Recommended Practice for Inspection & Testing Agencies for
Concrete & Steel as Used in Construction.
E1745 Standard Specifications for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs

Admixtures
C1017 / C1017M - 13e1 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete
C1582 / C1582M - 11(2017)e1 Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-
Induced Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
C1622 / C1622M - 10(2016)e1 Standard Specification for Cold-Weather Admixture Systems
C260 / C260M - 10a(2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
C494 / C494M - 19 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
C869 / C869M - 11(2016) Standard Specification for Foaming Agents Used in Making
Preformed Foam for Cellular Concrete

Reinforcing Steel
ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specifications for and Plain Carbon- Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete

Sealants
ASTM C 1193 – 16 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
ASTM C 834 – 17 Specification for Latex Sealants
ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C 1311 Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 10
_________________________________________________________________________________
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

Manual of Standard Practice
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)

Quality Control Manual - Section 3, Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production
Facilities - Plant Certification Check List
Pakistan Standards and Quality Control Authority (PSQCA)

P.S. 232 1983 Ordinary Portland cement (4th Revision). 2008 (R) Specific composition
and manufacture, fineness, chemical composition, strength, consistence of
standard cement paste, setting, time, soundness, sampling and test method.
2015 (4th R)
P.S. 612 1989 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement Type A (1st Revision).
List of PSQCA Standards for Civil Construction are provided in Appendix C.
British Standards
B.S. 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete.
B.S. 3148 Tests for water for Making Concrete.
B.S. 4027 Sulfate-Resisting Portland Cement.
B.S. 4449 Hot Rolled Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete.
B.S. 4461 Cold Worked Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete.
B.S. 4466 Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Bars for the reinforcement of
Concrete.
B.S. 693 General Requirements for Oxyacetylene Welding of Mild Steel
B.S. 822-1201 Concrete aggregates from Natural Sources.
B.S.410 Test Sieves.
B.S.I 141 Cold. Worked Steel Bars for the reinforcement of Concrete. General
Requirements for the Metal - Arc Welding of Mild Steel.
R.S. 12-78 Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid Hardening (in lieu of C-150).
In addition, the latest editions of American Concrete Institute Standards, American Society
for Testing and Materials Standards, British Standards and Equivalent Pakistan Standards and
Quality Control Authority (PSQCA) may be specified by the Engineer or Project Manager.
Materials
Aggregates
a. The sources of supply of all fine and coarse aggregates (including light weight
aggregates) shall be subject to the approval of Project Manager and shall be obtained
from a single source.
b. All fine and coarse aggregates shall be clean and free from clay, loam, silt and other
deleterious matter. If required, Project Manager reserves the right to have them washed
by the CONTRACTOR at no additional expenses. Coarse and fine aggregates shall be
delivered and stored separately at SITE. Aggregates shall not be stored on muddy
ground or where they are likely to become dirty or contaminated.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 11
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. Fine aggregates shall be hard coarse sand, crushed stone or gravel screenings, and shall
conform to requirements of ASTM C33/C33M
d. The maximum permitted content of chlorides and sulphates are 0.03% by weight of
aggregate (as acid soluble Cl-) and 0.4% by weight of aggregate (as acid soluble SO3)
respectively.
e. The flakiness index shall not exceed 30%.
f. Coarse aggregates shall be gravel or broken stone or hard, durable material free from
laminated stone and conforming to ASTM C-33 graded as follows for use in mass
concrete such as in foundations:
SIZE TOTAL PASSING PERCENT BY WEIGHT
2" Sieve (50.00 mm) 100

1-1/2" Sieve (38.10 mm) 95 - 100
3/4" Sieve (19.00 mm) 35 - 70
3/8" Sieve (9.50 mm) 10 - 30
No. 4 Sieve (4.75 mm) 0-5
Coarse aggregates for all cast-in-place concrete other than mass concrete and thick fair faced
cast-in-place concrete shall be graded with the following limits:-

1" Sieve (25.00 mm) 100
3/4" Sieve (19.00 mm) 90 - 100
3/8" Sieve (9.50 mm) 20 - 55
No. 4 Sieve (4.75 mm) 0 - 10
Coarse aggregates for thin fair faced cast-in-place concrete shall be graded as follows:-

1/2" Sieve (12.50 mm) 100
3/8" Sieve (9.50 mm) 85 - 100
No. 4 Sieve (4.75 mm) 10 - 30
g. The nominal maximum size of aggregate for precast fair faced concrete shall be smallest
of the following:
i. One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms.

ii. One-third of the depth of slabs.
iii. Three-fourth of the minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between
bars and form.
iv. 1/2" (12.0 mm).
h. The nominal maximum size of the aggregate for normal weight precast concrete shall be
smallest of the following:-
i. One-fifth of narrowest dimension between forms.
ii. One-third of depth of slab.
iii. Three-fourth of clear distance between bars.
iv. 1 inch.
Note: The above suggestions for sieve analysis are subject to the sieve analysis of the approved
design mix which the contractor will produce at that time.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
i. The aggregates shall be stockpiled for a period before use so as to drain nearly to constant
moisture content (as long as SITE and other conditions permit, preferably for at least a
day). The grading of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be tested at least once for every
50 tons (or 750 cft) supplied to ensure that the grading is uniform and the same as that of
the samples used in the preliminary tests.
Cement and Cementitious Materials
a. The cement shall be fresh and of approved origin and of an approved brand manufacture.
All cement for work above ground slab level shall be 'Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)' or
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement and shall comply with the requirements of PS 232,
ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II. All cement for work below ground level or in
contact with soil shall be 'Sulphate Resistant Portland Cement' complying with ASTM-
C150-Type.
b. All cement shall be of a brand approved by the Engineer. In addition all cement used in
the works shall be low alkali cement containing less than 0.6% acid soluble alkali, when
tested in accordance with ASTM Standard.
c. Cement shall be delivered in manufacturer's sealed branded bags or barrels, each
consignment accompanied by the manufacturer's test certificates. Damaged bags or barrels
and any cement the Engineer considers unsatisfactory shall be rejected. Each bag shall be
used on the day of opening. Bags opened on the previous day shall be rejected. All rejected
cement including that which has become affected by damp conditions is to be removed
from site immediately. Cement bags shall have a coding system for identifying date of
manufacture.
d. Sulfate resisting Portland cement (SRPC) ASTM C150 Type V or PS 612 should be
used, where the risk of sulfate attack may be present.
e. Only one brand of cement shall be used.
f. All cement shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof building or silo. The building shall
be painted a light color. Bagged cement is to be stored off the ground and it shall be used
up in the order in which it is delivered to site.
g. Different grades of cements shall be stored in separate areas. Cement temperature shall
not exceed 50 deg C when used.
h. If cement has been held in store for 3 months or more it shall be tested to satisfy the
relevant ASTM standard. No cement shall be used after 6 months from its manufacturing
date.
i. Each consignment of cement delivered to the site must be accompanied by a certificate
showing the place and date of manufacture and the results of standard tests carried out on
the bulk supply from which the cement was obtained.
j. Notwithstanding the above requirements and tests, the Engineer may reject any cement
which in his opinion is unsatisfactory for any reason whatsoever.
k. Fly ash may be used in accordance with ACI 301 / ACI 301M and shall be in
accordance with ASTM C618, Class F unless otherwise specified in contract
documents. Class C fly ash may be used if Class F is not available.
l. Ground Granular Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) in accordance with ASTM
C9891C989M may be used if available.
m. Cementitious materials used for mass concrete applications shall be in accordance with
ACI 301/ACI 301M Section 8.2.1.1. For applications designated as environmental
engineering concrete structures in contract documents, cementitious materials used for
mass concrete applications shall also be in accordance with ACI 350.5/ACI 350.5M.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 13
_________________________________________________________________________________
n. Cement shall be used in sequence of receipt of shipment, unless or otherwise directed.

There shall be sufficient cement at SITE to ensure that each section of WORK is
completed without interruption. If the cement is supplied by THE EMPLOYER, the
CONTRACTOR shall inform Project Manager of his requirement much before its use
in construction.
o. Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containers shall not be used.
p. CONTRACTOR shall provide and erect, at his own cost, in a suitable place, dry, well
ventilated, and water proof shed of sufficient capacity to store the cement.
q. The cement shall be used as soon as possible after delivery, and cement which Project
Manager considers has become stale or unsuitable through absorption of moisture
from the atmosphere or otherwise shall be rejected and removed immediately from
the SITE at CONTRACTOR'S expense. Any cement in containers, damaged so as to
allow the contents to spill or access of the atmosphere to the cement prior to opening
at the time of concrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately from the
SITE at CONTRACTOR'S expense.
r. The mixing together of different types of cement shall not be permitted.
s. Any cement bag having lumps shall be considered as contaminated and not be allowed
to be used in any work.
t. Stacking of cement bags should not be of not more than 10 bags in height.
Ventilation, allowing free flow of air through the stacks especially at the bottom of
the stacks would be necessary.
Water
a. Water used for mixing water, ice, curing, or any other function relating to placement of
concrete shall be potable or meet the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M.
b. Water for use in the washing of aggregate, curing, and in the production of concrete and
mortar, shall be obtained from an approved source and shall be of such a quality as not to
affect (1) the setting time, strength and durability of the concrete or mortar (2) the
appearance of hardened concrete or mortar by discoloration of efflorescence and (3) the
reinforcement at any age of the concrete or mortar.
c. Water shall be clean, demineralized, blended or unblended, with a pH between 6.5 and
8.0 shall be tested. The following limits shall not be exceeded.
Total dissolved solids (TDS) not greater than 2000 ppm
Suspended solids (TSS) " " " 2000 ppm
Chloride as NaCl " " " 800 ppm
Chloride as Cl- " " " 500 ppm
Sulphates as SO3 " " " 1000 ppm
Alkali HC03/CO3 " " " 1000 ppm
d. Water shall be stored in approved, clean, covered containers painted white and are
protected from sun, wind and dust and from contamination from any other source.
Pipework for water shall, wherever possible, be protected from the sun and insulated.
Crushed ice may be used to bring the water temperature below 32° C but with the strict
supervision of the Engineer only.
Sea water shall not be used for any reinforced concrete works or where concrete is later
required to be plastered, painted or otherwise decorated.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 14
_________________________________________________________________________________
Admixtures
a. An admixture is a material other than water, aggregate and hydraulic cement that is used
as an ingredient of concrete or mortar and is added to the batch immediately before or
during its mixing.
b. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Engineer in
writing and shall comply with ASTM C494 and ASTM C260.
c. Only liquid admixtures will be permitted. They shall be chloride free and shall not contain
other substances which adversely affect the durability and performance of the concrete.
Admixtures that excessively retard or accelerate the setting time of concrete will not be
permitted.
d. The following information must be submitted to the Engineer for approval purposes:
i) The brand name, the manufacturer's name and address together with a copy of the
manufacturer's recommendations for the admixture.
ii) The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under dosage and over dosage.
iii) The chemical type(s) of the main active ingredients in the admixture.
iv) Whether or not the admixture leads to air entertainment when used at the
manufacturer's recommended dosage.
v) Confirmation that the admixture is chloride free.
vi) The length of time and conditions under which the admixtures should be stored.
vii) Special measuring devices or equipment whenever needed.
e. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture shall be verified by trial mixes and
compared with concrete of the same class but containing no admixture (control mix) to
determine the effects of the admixture especially regarding workability, strength, setting
time and density.
f. When more than one admixture is to be used simultaneously in the concrete, the
compatibility of the various admixtures shall have been ascertained by various standard
tests and certified by the manufacturers.
Reinforcement
a. Steel Reinforcing bars shall be deformed billet steel in accordance with ASTM
A6151A615M, Grade 60 (420) unless otherwise specified in contract documents.
b. Reinforcing bars shall be uncoated unless otherwise specified in contract documents.
c. Welded wire reinforcement shall be plain wire in accordance with ASTM
A1064/A1064M. Wire shall be of sufficient size to fabricate in sheets. Rolls of welded
wire reinforcement shall not be used.
i. Tie wire shall be black annealed wire, 16 gage (1.29 mm) minimum.
ii. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from materials that may cause corrosion of
the reinforcement or the disintegration of the concrete and from pitting, seams, loose
rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease and other material that may impair the bond between
the concrete and the reinforcement.
iii. Sheets of mesh fabric shall be flat unless specified as bent and any tendency to curve
or twist shall be corrected by the contractor before fixing. Mesh fabric shall not be
supplied in rolls.
d. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with manufacturer's certificates for the
reinforcing steel intended for use, including test results of the physical and chemical
properties as in the relevant standard, all prior to use in the works.
e. Reinforcement shall be stored on properly constructed racks at least 150 mm above ground
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 15
_________________________________________________________________________________
level. The storage, cutting and bending of steel reinforcement shall be carried out under
cover, on an approved free draining platform. The method of storing shall be such as to
prevent contamination or damage by weather or accident. All steel reinforcement shall
be protected from humidity and salt laden dews when stored.
f. If necessary, steel shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the standard/s to
which it has been manufactured.
g. Reinforcement shall be obtained only from the manufacturer approved by the Project
Manager. If and when required CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary facilities to
Project Manager for the selection of test pieces and shall cause these to be prepared and
submitted where directed for tests at CONTRACTOR'S cost.
h. If the reinforcement is to be supplied by the EMPLOYER, the CONTRACTOR shall
inform Project Manager of his requirements much before its use in construction.
i. CONTRACTOR shall report immediately on receipt of any consignment, having any
deviation in the standard weights of the reinforcing bars beyond those allowed in
respective standards mentioned herein before.
Reinforcement Fixing
a. All metal for reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil, grease,
or other harmful matter immediately before the concrete is placed.
b. Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown in the Drawings, and secured against
displacement by using 18-20 gauge black annealed wire ties or suitable slips at
intersections and supported from the formwork by using concrete, metal or plastic chairs
and spacers or hangers of an approved pattern. Where concrete blocks are used for
ensuring the cover they shall be made of mortar not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2 parts
of sand. Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the finished structure
the portions of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be galvanized or shall
be made of plastic.
c. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with the
dimensions shown in the Bending Schedule.
d. The cutting tolerance for all bars shall be +/-1" (+/- 25 mm).
e. Where an overall or an internal dimension of a bent bar is specified in the schedule, the
bending tolerance, unless otherwise stated, shall be as in Table 3-1.
TABLE 3-1 - BENDING TOLERANCES
DIMENSIONS OF BENT BARS TOLERANCE

Over Up to and Plus Minus
Including
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Inches (mm)
36 915 1/8 3 1/4 6.0
36 915 72 1830 1/4 6.3 1/2 12.5
72 1830 1/2 12.5 1 25.0
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 16
_________________________________________________________________________________
f. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:
i. Concrete cover to formed surface: +/- ¼” (6.0 mm)

ii. Minimum spacing between bars +/- ¼” (6.0 mm)
iii. Top bars in slabs and beams:
 Members 8” (200 mm) deep or less: +/- ¼” (6.0 mm)
 Members more than 8” (200 mm)
Till 24” (600 mm) deep: +/- ½” (12.0 mm)
 Members more than 24” (600 mm) deep: +/- 1” (25.0 mm)
iv. Crosswise of member: space evenly with 1” (25 m)
v. Lengthwise of members: +/- 2” (50.0 mm)
g. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference will other reinforcing steel,
conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to
exceed the above tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of
the Project Manager.
h. Vertical bars in column shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped splices. To
ensure proper placement, templates shall be furnished for all columns dowels.
i. Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, nor they be straightened after bending.
Unless permitted by the Project Manager, reinforcement shall not be bent after being
partially embedded in hardened concrete. Bars which depend for their strength on cold
working shall not be heated for any reason (except for welding) Reinforcement larger than
1-1/2" (38.0 mm) in dia, may lie bent by the use of heat (not exceeding 1550 F). Bars bent
shall not be cooled by quenching.
j. No splice of reinforcement shall be made except as shown on the working Drawings.
k. Welding shall be permitted for bars only under suitable conditions and with suitable
safeguards in accordance with B.S 693. 1856, or AWS D 12.1 provided the type of
reinforcement bars have the required welding properties. Tack welding may be used to fix
in position bars that cross each other, only with prior approval of the Project Manager.
l. Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is to be effectively
protected from corrosion. Protection is also to be provided to reinforcement partly built
into concrete exposed part to be built into later concrete.
m. No concreting is to be carried out until the reinforcement has been checked and approved
by the Engineer or Project Manager.
Concrete
3.4.7.1 General
a. Only ready-mixed concrete (RMC) shall be used for substructure and superstructure
elements and for other elements where the required quantity is more than 10 cubic yd.
b. The name and address of the supplier is to be submitted to the Engineer and acceptance
of the use of such supplier shall be obtained prior to placing the order. Notwithstanding
any such authorization by the Engineer the Contractor shall take full responsibility for
the ready- mixed concrete complying with the requirements of the Specification.
c. The concreting materials shall comply with the requirements of this Specification and
shall be tested in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. The cost of such testing
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 17
_________________________________________________________________________________
will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Test cylinders shall be taken on site by the
Contractor.
d. The Contractor is to ensure that a record is kept on the exact time when the concreting
materials are mixed.
e. Ready-mixed concrete shall be plant batched and mixed; truck mixed concrete will not
be accepted. The concrete shall be carried in purpose- made agitators, operating
continuously. The concrete shall be placed in its final position within 90 minutes of the
time when the cement first came into contact with water or wet aggregates.
f. Delivery notes shall record the following information:
(i) Cement content, type and grade of concrete.
(ii) Design slump
(iii) Temperature at mixing
(iv) Additives (if any).
(v) Mix code number
(vi) Time and date of mixing.
(vii) Time and date and of truck arrival.
(viii)Registration number of truck and name of depot.
(ix) Time when concrete placed in position.
g. The following additional information shall also be recorded by the Contractor who shall
submit to the Engineer a copy of the signed agreement, together with the mix designs,
specifications and all other documents relating to the supply of concrete.
i) Mix grades and position in the structure where the concrete is placed.
ii) Whether test cylinders were taken from this delivery.
iii) Actual slump and details of additives.
h. If the use of ready-mixed concrete has been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer a copy of the signed agreement, together with the mix
designs, specifications and all other documents relating to the supply of concrete.
i. Ready-mixed concrete shall comply in all respects with ASTM C94 / C94M - 20.
j. Admixtures used in ready-mixed concrete shall comply in all respects with C494 /
C494M - 19.
k. Where small amount of non-structural concrete not exceeding 10 cubic yd is required,
site mixing may be allowed subject to the approval of the Engineer.
l. For concrete cast on site, the proportions of ingredients of structure concrete shall be
decided by trial mixes / mix design for the concrete of required compressive strength and
shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles
of the forms and around reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation
allowed to employ on the WORK, but without permitting the materials to segregate or
excessive free water to collect on the surface. Specific approval of the Project Manager
is required to waive limitations on mixture proportions.
m. The proportions of ingredients shall be selected in accordance with Section 5.8.1.6 to
produce the proper placeability, durability, strength and other required properties.
3.4.7.2 Strength
a. The Specified compressive strength of the concrete cylinder, shall be minimum of 2500
psi at 28 days except where otherwise noted on Drawings. Strength requirements shall be
based on the sampling and testing methods of ASTM C 39-72. For seismic design, the
Specified compressive strength of the concrete cylinder, shall be minimum of 3000 psi at
28 days except where otherwise noted on Drawings.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 18
_________________________________________________________________________________
b. The class of concrete to be used shall be as called for on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer or specified in the special provisions. The following requirements shall
govern unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Class of Minimum Max. Size Min. 28 days Slump Slump Max.
Concrete Cement of Coarse cylinder Vibrated Vibrated Permissible
(lbs/cyd Aggregate compressive (in) Min (in) Max w/c Ratio
(in) strength (psi)
A1 500 0.8 3000 1.0 3.0 0.58
A2 600 1.0 3500 4.0 6.0 0.58
A3 675 1.5 4000 4.0 6.0 0.58
B 420 2.0 2500 1.0 3.0 0.65
C 460 1.5 3000 1.0 3.0 0.58
D1 750 1.0 5000 2.0 4.0 0.40
D2 850 1.0 6000 2.0 4.0 0.40
D3 925 1.0 7000 2.0 4.0 0.40
Y 675 0.5 3000 1.0 3.0 0.58
Lean 300 2.0 1500 -
Concrete
Class A1 concrete shall be used everywhere, for non-reinforced and reinforced concrete
structures, except as-noted below or directed by the Engineer. Concrete placed underwater
shall be Class A2 with a minimum cement content of three hundred fifty (350) kg per cubic
meter of concrete with a slump between ten (10) and fifteen (15) cm. Concrete placed for piles
shall be Class A3 with a minimum content of four hundred (400) kg per cubic meter.
Class B Concretes shall be used only where specified.

Class C concretes shall be used for cribbing, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer or
specified in the Special Provision or on the Drawing.
Class D1, D2 or D3, concrete shall be used for pre-stressed and post-tensioned elements, as
indicated on drawings.
Class Y concrete shall be used as a filler in steel grid bridge floors, in thin reinforced sections
or as otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
Lean concrete shall be used in thin layers underneath footings and when called for on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
3.4.7.3 Water Content of Concrete
Maximum permissible water-cement ratios for concrete in severe exposures to be as follows,

unless lower water-cement ratio is required to meet specified strength limits:
Type of Structure Water/Cement ratio
Thin sections & sections with less than 1 inch cover over steel.
Continuously wet or Frequently freezing and thawing 0.45. 0.402
Exposed to sea or sulfates
All other Structures 0.50, 0.452
NOTE:
1. Concrete should also be air-entrained.
2. If Sulphate Resistant (SR) Cement is used permissible water-cement ratio may be
increased by 0.05.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 19
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.4.7.4 Slump
Concrete of lower than usual slump may be used provided it is properly placed and
consolidated. The slump shall be determined by the “Test for Slump for Portland Cement
Concrete" (ASTM C-143).
3.4.7.5 Admixtures
a. If required or permitted, admixtures used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions except as otherwise specified herein.
b. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Engineer in
writing and shall comply with ASTM C494 and ASTM C260.
c. Chemical admixtures may be used as per the recommendation of the suppliers to achieve
the desired strength and workability.
d. Mineral admixtures such as Silica fume and Fly ash and Ground Granulated Blast furnace
Slag (GGBS) as partial replacement of cement may be used. These concrete mixes have
to be designed to achieve the desired strength at the target ages.
3.4.7.6 Methods of Obtaining Mix Design
a. For concrete of normal weight, mix proportions to provide the desired characteristics shall
be developed by using the methods/procedure covered by the latest edition of
Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete ACI
211.1.
b. Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies suitable for the WORK shall be made
based on ACI 211.1, using at least three different water-cement ratios which will produce
a range of strengths encompassing those required for the WORK. Trial mixes shall be
designed to produce the specified slump. The temperature of concrete used in trial batches
shall be reported.
c. For each water-cement ratio, compression test of cylinder shall be made, cured, and tested
in accordance with ASTM C - 39. From the results of these tests a curve shall be plotted
showing the relationship between the water-cement ratio and compressive strength. From
this curve, the water-cement ratio to be used in the concrete shall be selected to produce
the required/specified design strength. The cement content and mix proportions to be used
shall be such that this water-cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is the maximum
permitted. Control in the field shall be based upon maintenance of proper cement content
and slump.
3.4.7.7 Batching
a. All cement, including cement supplied in bulk, shall be batched by weight. A bag of
cement, unless marked otherwise, may be taken as 112 lbs (50 kg) or as directed by the
Project Manager.
b. Aggregate shall be batched by weight, duly allowance being made for water content.
Aggregate may be batched by volume only with the prior permission of Project Manager.
The apparatus for weight batching may be an integral part of the mixer or a separate unit
of a type approved by Project Manager. It shall be accurate within 2% and shall be checked
for accuracy at least once a week.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. Where the batching plant is of the type in which cement and aggregate are weighed in the
same compartment, the cement shall be introduced into the compartment between two
sizes of aggregate.
d. Where volumetric batching of aggregate is permitted, gauge boxes shall be provided for
measuring the coarse and-the fine aggregate. These shall be deep and narrow rather than
shallow and wide. Tests for the bulking of sand shall be made at intervals and the
necessary quantity of sand added.
e. Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of the
cement and aggregates. Water shall continue to flow for a period which may extend to the
end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixing time.
3.4.7.8 Mixing
a. The concrete shall be mixed in an approved batch mixer. It shall be fitted with the
manufacturer's plate stating the rated capacity and the recommended number of
revolutions per minute and shall be operated in accordance therewith. It shall he equipped
with a suitable charging mechanism and an accurate water measuring device.
b. Mixing shall continue for the period recommended by the mixer manufacturer or until
apparently the mix is uniform in color, whichever period is longer. If it is desired to use a
mixing period less than 1-1/2 minute. Project Manager Approval shall be obtained in
writing.
c. Controls shall be provided to ensure that the batch cannot be discharged until the required
mixing time has elapsed. At least three quarters of the required mixing time shall take
place after the last of the mixing water has been added.
d. The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with mixing
action. Mixing blades, shall be replaced when they have lost 10% of their original height.
e. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has set shall
not be re-tempered, but shall be discarded.
3.4.7.9 Transportation
a. The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by means which will prevent segregation or loss or addition to
ingredients. It shall be deposit as nearly as practicable in its final position so as to avoid
re-handling or flowing. All skips vehicles, or containers used for transporting the concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned.
b. During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers to minimize
the loss of water/heat.
3.4.7.10 Placing
a. Before placing of concrete, form works shall have been completed, water shall have
been removed, reinforcement shall have been secured in place, expansion joint material,
anchors, and other embedded items shall have been kept in position, and the entire
preparation shall have been approved.
b. No concrete is to be placed into the foundation trenches until the ground to receive the
same has been examined and approved by Project Manager for this purpose.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 21
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. The actual sequence of construction proposed by CONTRACTOR shall be subject to

Project Manager’s approval before construction starts on any part of the structure, and
this sequence shall not be varied without Project Manager’s prior approval.
c. The concrete shall be placed after it has been mixed as soon as practicable. Once the
concrete has left the mixer no more water shall be added, although the concrete may be
mixed or agitated to help maintain workability. The concrete shall not be used if,
through any cause, the workability of the mix at the time of placing is too low for it to
be compacted fully and to an acceptable finish by whatever means are available.
d. The time between mixing and placing should be reduced if the mix is richer or the initial
workability of the mix is lower than normal, if a rapid hardening cement or an
accelerator is used, or if the work is carried out at a high temperature or exposed to a
drying atmosphere. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the delay between mixing and
placing does not exceed 30 minutes under any circumstances. Any concrete which does
not satisfy this requirement shall not be used.
e. The concrete shall be deposit as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid re-
handling. In no circumstances may concrete be made to flow along the forms by the use
of vibrators, Concreting shall be carried out on as a continuous operation using methods
which shall prevent separation loss of ingredients.
f. The free fall of concrete shall not be allowed to exceed eight feet and where it is
necessary for the concrete to be lowered more than this amount, it is not to be dropped
into its final position, but it is to be placed through pipe, the lower end of which shall
be kept in, or close to the freshly deposit concrete. The dia of the pipe shall not be than
4 times the maximum size of aggregate.
g. For mass concrete, concrete shall be placed in layers approximately 18” (450 mm) thick.
Vibrator heads shall extend into the previously placed layer.
h. The workmen carrying concrete to the SITE, and all other workmen moving about
before the concrete is placed shall move only along runways or planks placed over the
forms.
i. Prior to the laying of concrete on load bearing masonry walls, bearing plates and at other
points, as may be directed by Project Manager, the surface will be brought to a true,
hard smooth, level using a cement sand mortar in the ratio of 1 volume of cement to 3
volumes of sand. Two layers of building paper weighing 1.3 oz/sq. ft (400 g/m) will
then be laid flat to separate the concrete from the surface on which it is to be laid.
3.4.7.11 Construction Joints
a. Concreting shall be carried out continuously upto construction Joints, the position and
arrangement of which shall be pre-determined with the approval of the Project
Manager.
b. Joints not shown on the Drawings shall be so made and located as to least impair the
strength of the structure and shall need prior approval of Project Manager. In general,
they shall be located near the middle of the spans of slabs and beams unless a
secondary beam intersects a main beam at this point, in which case the joint in the
main beam shall be offset to a distance equal to twice the width of the secondary
beam. Joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors slab or beams,
and at the top of footings. Beams, brackets, columns, capitals, haunches, and drop
panels shall be placed at the same time as slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the
main reinforcement.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 22
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. All reinforcing steel shall be continued across joints. Key and inclined dowels shall
be provided as directed by Project Manager. Longitudinal keys at least 1-1/2 (40 mm.)
deep shall be provided in all joints in walls and between walls and slab or footings.
d. When the work is to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall
be roughened in an approved manner which will expose the aggregate Uniformly and
will not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the
surface.
e. The hardened concrete of construction joints and of joints between footings and walls
or columns, between walls or columns and beams or floors they support, joints in un-
exposed walls and all others not mentioned below shall be dampened (but not
saturated) immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete.
f. The hardened concrete of joints in exposed work, joints in the middle of beams, and
slabs and joints in work designed to contain liquids shall be dampened (but not
saturated) and then thoroughly covered with a coat of cement grout of similar
proportions to the mortar in the concrete The grout shall be as thick as possible on
vertical surface and at least 1/2" (12.0 mm) thick on horizontal surface. The fresh
concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set.
g. Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing
the wet surface with wire or bristle brush. Care being taken to avoid dislodging of
particles of aggregate. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement grout. The
first layer of concrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 6" (150 mm) in
thickness, and shall be well rammed against old work, particular attention being paid
to corners and close spots.
h. Stop ends for movement joints or construction joints shall be made by splitting them,
along the lines of reinforcement or the concrete. Stop ends made of expanded metal
or similar material may only be left permanently in the concrete with prior written
approval of Project Manager. Where such stop ends are used, no metal may be left
permanently in the concrete closer to the surface of the concrete than the specified
cover to the reinforcement. Wood strips inserted for architectural treatment shall be
kerfed to permit swelling without pressure on the concrete.
3.4.7.12 Embedded Items
a. The material, design and location of water stops in joints shall be as indicated in the
Drawings. Each piece of pre-molded water stop shall be of maximum practicable
length in order that the number of end joints will be held to a minimum.
b. Joints at intersections and at end of pieces shall be made in the manner most
appropriates to the material being used. Joints shall develop effective water tightness
fully equal to that of the continuous water-stop material, and shall permanently
develop not less than 50% of the mechanical strength of the parent section, and shall
permanently retain their flexibility.
c. Electric conduits and other pipes which are planned to be embedded shall not, with
their fittings, displace more than four percent of the area of the cross section of a
column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection. Sleeves,
conduits, or other pipes passing through floors, walls, or beams shall be of such size
or in such location so as not to impair unduly the strength of the construction. Such
sleeves, conduits in compression in the displaced concrete, provided that they are not
exposed to rusting or other deterioration, are of un-coated or galvanized iron or steel
not thinner than standard steel pipe, having a nominal inside diameter not over 2" (50
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 23
_________________________________________________________________________________
mm) and are spaced at centers not less than thrice their diameter. Except when plans
of conduits and pipes are approved by Project Manager embedded pipes or conduits
other than those merely passing through, shall not be larger in outside diameter than
one-third or the thickness of the slab, walls, or beam in which they are embedded nor
shall be spaced closer than three diameters on center, nor so located as to impair
unduly the strength of the construction. Sleeve pipes, or conduits within the
limitations of this section may be embedded in concrete with the approval of Project
Manager, provided they are not considered to replace the displaced concrete.
d. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for
its support shall be placed prior to concreting.
e. All-Contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it shall
be given ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items
before the concrete is placed.
f. Expansion joint material, water stop and other embedded items shall be positioned
accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor
slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry
of concrete into the voids.
3.4.7.13 Consolidation
a. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, so that the concrete is thoroughly

worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into comers of form,
eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes
of weakness. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 800 vibrations per
minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively.
b. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at points approximately 18" apart (450
mm). At each insertions, the duration shall be sufficient to cause consolidation,
generally from 5 to 15 sec. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the SITE during all
concreting operations. Where the concrete is to have an as-cast finish, a full surface
of mortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process supplemented if
necessary by spading to work the coarse aggregate back from the formed surface.
c. If there is any tendency for the mix to segregate during consolidation, particularly if
this produces excessive laitance, the mix proportions shall be modified to affect an
improvement in the quality of the concrete to the satisfaction of Project Manager.
d. Vibrators shall not be allowed to contact the form work for exposed concrete surface.
e. Mechanical vibrators shall be of a type suited in the opinion of Project Manager to the
particular conditions.
f. Over-vibration or vibration of very wet mix is harmful and should be avoided.
3.4.7.14 Curing and Protection
a. Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature

drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be
maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relative constant temperature for the
period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. The
materials and methods of curing shall be subject to approval of Project Manager.
b. For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the following procedure shall
be applied immediately after completion and finishing:
 Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 24
_________________________________________________________________________________
 Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.

 Application of water proof sheet materials approved by Project Manager.
 Application of other moisture retaining covering as per approved.
c. Application of curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309. The compound shall
be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately
after any sheen which develops after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
materials to be bonded unless it is proved that the curing compound will not prevent
bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from area to
receive bonded applications.
d. Moisture loss from surface placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to
heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping forms wet until they can be safely
removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured.
e. Curing shall be continued for at least 14 days in the case of all concrete except
concrete with Rapid hardening Portland cement for which the period shall be at least
7 days.
f. Alternatively if tests are made of cylinders/cubes kept adjacent to the structure and
cured by the same methods, moisture retention measures unless stated otherwise on
drawings, may be terminated when the average compressive strength has reached 70
percent of the minimum specified Works strength.
g. When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 41 deg. F (5C) then temperature
of the concrete shall be maintained between 50-68 deg. F (10C-20C) for the required
curing period. When necessary arrangements for heating, covering, insulation or
housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be
adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury to concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours unless approved
precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which
contain carbon dioxide.
h. When necessary, provision for windbreak, shading for spraying, sprinkling, ponding
or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in advance of placement,
and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and
finishing operations will allow.
i. Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and
immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible and shall
not exceed 5 deg.F (3C) in any one hour or 50 deg. F (28C) in any 24 hour period.
j. During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical
disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock and excessive vibration. All finished
concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction equipment,
materials or methods by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running
water, self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over stress
the concrete.
3.4.7.15 Works In Extreme Weather
a. Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained concrete shall not be
placed during rain. Rain water shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor
to damage the surface finish.
b. When the temperature of the surrounding air is expected to be below 40 deg.F (4.4 C)
during placing or within 24 hours thereafter, the temperature of the plastic concrete,
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 25
_________________________________________________________________________________
as placed shall not be lower than 55 degrees F (13C) for sections less than 12" (300
mm) in any dimension nor 50 deg, F (10C) for any other sections.
c. When necessary, concrete materials should be heated before mixing and carefully
protected after placing; in general, heating of mixing water alone to about 140 deg.F
(60C) may be sufficient for this purpose. Dependence should not be placed on salt or
other chemicals for the prevention of freezing. No frozen material or materials,
containing ice shall be used. All concrete damaged by frost shall be removed. It is
recommended that concrete exposed to the action of freezing weather should have
entrained air and the water content of the mix should not exceed 5.5 gallons (25 liters)
per bag of cement. If water or aggregate is heated above 100 deg F (38C) the water
shall be combined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Cement
shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of wafer and "aggregate having a
temperature greater than 100 deg.F (38C).
d. During hot weather, (lie temperature of the concrete as placed shall not be so high as
to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints and should not exceed
90 deg,F (32.C). For massive concrete this temperature should not exceed 70 deg.F
(21C). When the temperature of the concrete exceeds 90 deg.F (32C), precautionary
measures approved by Project Manager shall be put into effect. When the temperature
of the steel is greater than 122 deg.F (50C) steel forms and reinforcement shall be
sprayed with water just prior to placing the concrete. The ingredients shall be cooled
before mixing, or flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt completely
during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water if, due to high
temperature, low slump, flash set or cold joints are encountered.
e. Other precautions recommended by ACI standard 305R-91 shall also be adopted.
Tests for Concrete Quality
3.4.8.1 General
CONTRACTOR shall make standard cylinder / cube (sample) by standard method of concrete
for testing at Project Manager’s direction. Proper facilities shall be provided for making and
curing the test specimens in accordance with the specifications A competent person shall be
employed by the CONTRACTOR whose first duty shall be to supervise all stages in the
preparation and placing of the concrete. All test specimens shall be made and SITE tests
carried out under his direct supervision and at CONTRACTOR'S cost.
Permanent record of concrete poured, samples made, and compressive strength results
obtained shall be carefully maintained at the site.
3.4.8.2 Samples
Conduct compressive strength tests on at least, one test cylinder / cube sample per 50 cubic
yards of concrete (38 cu meters) with a minimum of one sample per concrete pour. Each test
sample shall consist of no less than three concrete test cylinders/cubes made from a single
sample of concrete from a randomly selected batch of concrete, taken at point of discharge
from mixer or truck, cured under standard conditions. One cylinder/cube from each sample
shall be tested at age 3 days and two at age 28 days unless otherwise directed by the Project
Manager.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 26
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.4.8.3 Adequacy of Mix
In case of Concrete mix, the appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be

satisfied if none of the strengths of the specimen is below the specified strength or if the
average strength of the three specimens is not less than the specified strength and the
difference between the greatest and least strengths is not more than 20% of that average.
When the results of tests show that the strength of any concrete is below the minimum
specified, Project Manager may give instructions for the whole or part of the work concerned
to be removed and be replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall bear
the cost of any other part of his, or any other CONTRACTORS work, which has to be removed
and replaced as a result of the defective concrete. If any concrete is held to have failed. Project
Manager may order the proportions of that class of concrete to be changed in order to provide
specified strength.
Finishing of Formed Concrete
3.4.9.1 General
a. After removal of forms the surfaces of concrete shall be given one or more of the finishes
specified below in locations designated by the Drawing or as specified in Clause 8.5.
b. When finishing is required to match a small sample furnished to CONTRACTOR, the
sample finish shall be reproduced on nil area at least 100 square feet in an inconspicuous
location designated by Project Manager before proceeding with the finish in the specified
location.
3.4.9.2 As-Cast Fishes
a. Rough Form Finish:

No selected form facing materials shall be specified for rough form finish surfaces. Tie
holes and defects shall be patched. Unless if required to be retained if so directed by
Project Manager. Fins exceeding 1/4" (6 mm) in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off.
Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the texture imparted by the forms.
b. Smooth Form Finish:
The form facing material shall produce a smooth hard uniform texture on the concrete.
It may be plywood, tempered concrete-form grade hardboard, metal, plastic paper, or
other approved material capable of producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the
facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the
practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable of preventing
excessive deflection. Material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edge, patches, dents,
or other defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used.
Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed.
3.4.9.3 Architectural Finishes
a. Textured Finishes
Textured form liners may be of formed plastic sheet, wood, sheet metal, or other material
designated in Drawings. Liner panels shall be secured in forms by cementing or stapling,
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 27
_________________________________________________________________________________
but not by methods which will permit impressions of nail heads, screw heads washers, or
the like to he imparted to the surface of the concrete, unless shown otherwise on the
Drawings. Edges of textured panels shall be sealed to each other or to dividing strips, if
specified or shown, to prevent bleeding of grout. The sealant used shall be non-staining
to the surface.
b. Applied Finishes
When finishes of plaster or similar troweled materials are to be applied, the surface of the
concrete shall be prepared to ensure permanent adhesion of the finish. If the concrete is
less than 24 hours old, it can be roughened with a heavy wire brush or scouring tool. If
the concrete is older the surface may be roughened mechanically or by etching with dilute
hydrochloric acid. After roughening, the surface shall be washed free of all dust, acid,
chemical retarder, and other foreign material before the final finish is applied.
3.4.9.4 Rubbed Finishes
The following finishes .shall be produced on concrete with a smooth form finish. Where
smooth rubbed finish is to be applied, the forms shall have been removed and necessary
patching completed as soon after the cement of the concrete as possible without compromising
any structural requirements.
a. Smooth Rubbed Finish
Smooth rubbed finish shall be produced on newly hardened concrete not later than a day
following form removal.
Surfaces shall be wetted and rubbed with carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform
color and texture are produced. No cement grout shall be used other than the cement paste
drawn from the concrete itself by the rubbing process.
b. Grout Cleaned Finish
No cleaning operations shall be undertaken until all contiguous surfaces to be cleaned are
completed and accessible. Cleaning as the work progresses shall not be permitted.
Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1-1/2 part fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout
having the consistency of thick paint. While Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of
the grey Portland cement in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding
concrete, as determined by a trial patch. Wet the surface of the concrete sufficiently to prevent
absorption of water from the grout and apply the grout uniformly with a brush or a spray gun.
Immediately after applying the grout, scrub surface vigorously with a cork float or stone and
fill all air bubbles and holes. While the grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working
the surface with a rubber float, sack or other means. After the surface whitens from drying
(about thirty minutes at normal temperature) rub vigorously with clean burlap. The finish shall
be kept damp for at least 36 hours after final rubbing.
c. Cork Floated Finish
1. Remove forms at an early stage, within 2 to 3 days of placement where possible.

2. Remove ties, and all burrs and fins.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 28
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 part fine sand with sufficient water to produce a
stiff mortar.
4. Dampen surface.
5. Apply mortar with firm rubber float or with trowel, filling all surface voids.
6. Apply a small amount of water with a fog spray to prevent too rapid drying of
compressed mortar.
7. Apply a small amount of water with a fog sprayer.
8. Produce the final texture with a cork float using a swirling motion.
3.4.9.5 Unspecified Finishes
If the finish is not specified in the Drawings, the following finishes shall be used as applicable:
a. Rough Form Finish
For all concrete surface not exposed to public view and / or are specified to have
subsequent finishing.
b. Smooth Form Finish
For all concrete surfaces exposed to public view and or are not required to have subsequent
finishing.
3.4.9.6 Related Unformed Surfaces
Tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and shall be floated
to a texture reasonably consistent with that of the formed surfaces. Final treatment on form
surfaces shall continue uniformly across the unformed surfaces.
Repair of Surface Defects
3.5.1 General
a. Any concrete failing to meet the specified strength or not formed as shown on Drawings,
concrete with surface beyond tolerances or with defective surfaces which cannot be
properly repaired or patched in the opinion of Project Manager shall be removed and
replaced at CONTRACTOR’s expenses. Project Manager may reject any defective
concrete and order it to be cut out in part or in whole and replaced at the CONTRACTOR’s
expense. Only in case of minor surface defects Project Manager may approve a surface
treatment.
b. All ties and bolt holes and all repairable defective areas shall be patched immediately after
the removal of forms.
3.5.2 Repair of Defective Areas
a. All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete.
The area to be patched and area at least 6" (150 mm) wide surrounding it shall be
dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall
be prepared using a mix of approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand or an approved
bonding agent shall then be well brushed/ applied into the surface.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 29
_________________________________________________________________________________
b. The patching mixture shall be made of the same material and of approximately the same
proportions as used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and
the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose
volume. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the grey Portland cement
on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding
concrete, as determined by a trial patch.
c. The quantity of mixing water shall not be more than necessary for handling and placing.
The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent
manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest
consistency that will permit placing.
d. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be
well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the
premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated
into place and struck off so as to leave the parch slightly higher than the surrounding
surface to permit initial shrinkage; it shall be left undisturbed for at least one hour before
being finally finished. The patched area shall be covered by approved curing compound,
except as specified in Clause 9.2 g. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a
formed wall which will be exposed.
e. Whereas-cast finishes are specified, the quantity of patched area shall be strictly limited.
The combined total of patched areas in as-cast concrete surfaces shall not exceed 2 square
ft. in each 1000 square feet (2 sq. m in each 1000 sq.m) of as-cast surface. This is in
addition to form tie patches, if the project design permits to fall within as-cast areas.
f. Any patches in as-cast architectural concrete shall be indistinguishable from surrounding
surfaces. The mix formula for patching mortar shall be determined by trial to obtain a
good color match with the concrete when both patch and concrete are cured and dry. After
initial set, surface of patches shall be dressed manually to obtain the same texture as
surrounding surfaces.
g. Patches in architectural concrete surfaces shall be cured continually for 7 days. Patches
shall be protected from premature drying to the same extent as the body of the concrete.
3.5.3 Tie and Bolt Holes
After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, the tie and bolt holes shall be filled solid with
patching mortar.
3.5.4 Proprietary Materials
If permitted or required by Project Manager proprietary compounds for adhesion or as

patching ingredients may be used in lieu of or in addition to the foregoing patching procedures.
Such compounds shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation with
prior approval of Project Manager.
Concrete Construction Tolerance
Where tolerances are not stated in the Specifications or Driving for any individual structure
or feature, maximum permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions
shall conform to the following. The CONTRACTOR is expected to set and maintain concrete
forms so as to ensure completed work within the tolerance limits. These allowable tolerances
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 30
_________________________________________________________________________________
shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for correct fitting of indicated materials.
These tolerances are not cumulative.
3.6.1 Variation from the plumb (or as specified for sloped walls)
a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers and walls.

 Maximum for the entire length or height: 3/16" (4.5 mm)
b. For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and other conspicuous lines.
 Maximum for the entire length or height: 3/16"(4.5 mm)
3.6.2 Variation from the levels or the grades indicated on Drawings
a. In floors, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises.

 Maximum for the entire length: l/4"(mm)
b. For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves of 50 feet or more in length, and
other conspicuous lines:
 Maximum for the entire length: 1/4"(6 mm)
3.6.3 Maximum allowable constant Variation of the entire building lines from established
position of property tines and related position of columns, walls and partitions.
 Maximum for the entire length: 1" (25 mm)
3.6.4 Variation of the size and locations of sleeves,

Floors openings and wall openings: 1/4" (6mm)
3.6.5 Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams
Minus: 1/4" (6 mm)

Plus: 1/2" (12.0 mm)
3.6.6 Thickness of Slabs & Walls. 1/4" (6 mm)

3.6.7 Footings
a. Variations in dimensions in plan.

 Minus: 1/2" (12.0 mm)
 Plus (plus variation applied to concrete only,
to bars dowels) 2” (50 mm)
b. Misplacement or eccentricity of concrete.
 2 percent of the footing width in the direction
of misplacement but not more than 2” (50 mm)
c. Reduction in thickness
 Minus 5 percent of specified thickness.
3.6.8 Variation in Steps
a. Rise: 1/8" (3 mm)

Tread: 1/4" (6mm)
b. In consecutive steps
Rise: 1/16" (1.0 mm)
Tread: 1/8" (3 mm)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 31
_________________________________________________________________________________
Tolerance for Pre-cast Concrete:
Forms must be true to size and dimensions of concrete members shown on the plans and be
so constructed that the dimensions of the finished product will be within the following limits
at the time of placement of these units in the structure, unless otherwise noted on Project
Manager's Drawings.
a. Overall dimensions of members per 10 ft (3 mm): +/- 1/16"
(1.0mm)
b. Cross-sectional dimensions' Section less than 3"(75 mm):
+/- 1/8" (3 mm)
Section over 3" (75 mm) less than 18" (450 mm):+/- 1/8" (3
mm)
Section over 18" (450 mm): +/- 1/4" (6 mm)
c. Deviations from straight lines in long sections. Not more
than 1/8 inch per 10 ft. (3 mm / 3 m)
d. Deviation from specified camber +/- 1/16" (1.5 mm) per 10
fl (3m) of span. Maximum differential between adjacent
units in erected position. ¼ inch (6 mm)
Tolerance for Pavements
a. Ramps
 Departure from established alignment +/- 1/4" inch (6 mm)

 Departure from established longitudinal on any line. +/- 1/4"
(6 mm) grade
 Departure from transverse template colour except all
transverse joints +/- 1/8 inch (+/- 3 mm)
 Departure from transverse template control at transverse
joints 1/4"(+/-6 mm) in width of one traffic lane
b. Pavements for Parking Areas
Twice values listed for ramp pavements.
Plant and Equipment
3.9.1 Formwork
a. Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine the concrete and shape it to the
required dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to with stand the pressure
resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete and shall have sufficient
rigidity to maintain specified tolerances.
Structurally adequate, form work shall also conform to the requirements of the special
architectural finishes of the in-situ Plain and Reinforced Concrete specified/or shown
on the Drawings. Shop drawings of such form shall be subject to the approval of the
Project Manager prior to its use. Project Manager shall refuse concreting of any part
which in his opinion may not yield specified finishes.
b. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surface or reinforced concrete work
unless required or permitted.
c. Mud centering shall not be permitted without the prior approval of the Project
Manager.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 32
_________________________________________________________________________________
d. Form work shall be made of either timber, steel, plywood, proprietary building boards
and such special material, as may be shown on the drawings or approved by the
Project Manager which gives the required finish to the surface of concrete. Wooden
frame Work shall be free from loose knots and shall be well seasoned. For the external
concrete finishes 1/16" (1.5 mm) thick mild steel sheet forms shall he used.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish shop drawings of such form work prepared on the basis
of architectural concept for the approval of the Project Manager.
e. Form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on the plans,
and be so constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid dining the placing and
compacting of concrete, and shall he sufficiently tight of prevent loss of cement slurry.
The design and engineering of the form work, as well as its construction, shall be the
responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Where necessary to maintain the specified
tolerances, the form work shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections
in the form work due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to
construction loads.
CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed conditions and until
final completion and acceptance of the WORK, sufficient control points and bench
marks to be used for reference purpose to check tolerances.
f. Maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to
view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members.
g. Where natural plywood form finish, grout cleaned finish, smooth rubbed finish,
scrubbed finish, or sand floated finish is required, forms shall be smooth (faced with
plywood, liner sheets, or prefabricated panels) and true to line, in order that the
surfaces produced with required little dressing to arrive at true surfaces. Where any
as-cast finish is required, no dressing shall be permitted in the finishing operation.
h. Whereas-cast surfaces, including natural plywood form finish, are specified, the
panels of materials against which concrete is cast shall be arranged orderly with joints
between panels planned in approved relations to opening, building corners, and other
architectural features.
i. Where panels for as-cast surfaces are separated by recessed or otherwise emphasized
joints, the structural design of the forms shall provide for locating form ties within
the, joints so that patches of the holes will not fall within the panel areas.
j. Forms shall not be re-used if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear or defect
which would impair the quality of the surface. Forms shall he thoroughly cleaned and
properly coated before re-use.
k. The formwork may be designed so that soffits of slabs and sides of beams, columns,
and wall may be removed first leaving the forms to the soffits of beams and their
supports in position.
l. Positive means, wedges or jacks of accurate adjustment and proper removal of shores
and struts shall be provided and all settlement shall be taken up during placing of
concrete. Forms shall also be securely braced against lateral deflections.
m. Where concreting of narrow members' is required to be carried out within form work
of considerable depth, temporary openings in the sides of the form work shall be
provided where necessary to facilitate the placing and consolidation of the concrete.
Small temporary openings shall be provided at the bottom of the form work to
columns, walls and deep beams to permit the cleaning out of debris and observations
immediately before concrete is deposit.
n. Form ties shall be constructed so that the ends or end fasteners can be removed
without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After the ends or end
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 33
_________________________________________________________________________________
fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall
terminate not less than twice the diameter or twice the minimum dimension of the tie
from the formed faces of concrete to be .permanently exposed to view except that in
no case shall this distance be less than 3/4" (19 mm) when the formed Face of the
concrete is not to be permanently exposed to view, form tie may be cut off flush with
the formed surfaces. Through bolts shall be permitted provided that they are greased
to allow for easy withdrawal and the holes subsequently made good. Through bolts
are not to be used on water-retaining structures.
o. At construction joints, contact surface of the form sheathing for flush surfaces
exposed to view shall overlap the hardened concrete in the previous placement by not
more than 1" (25 mm). The forms shall be held against the hardened concrete to
prevent offsets or loss of mortar at the construction joint and to maintain a true surface.
p. Runways or planks for moving labor and equipment shall be provided with struts or
legs and shall be supported directly on the formwork or structural member without
resting on the reinforcing steel.
q. All surfaces of the embedded items shall be cleaned and any accumulated mortar or
grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material is removed before
concrete is placed in them.
r. Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be swelled until
closed by wetting before concrete is placed. Plywood and other wood surface not
subject to shrinkage shall be sealed against absorption of moisture from the concrete
either by (1) a field applied, approved form oil or sealer, or (2) a factory applied non-
absorptive liner. When forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shall be
done prior to placing of the reinforcing steel. Care shall be taken that such approved
coating is kept out of contact with the reinforcement. Whereas-cast finishes are
required, materials, which will impart a stain to the concrete shall not be applied to
the form surfaces. Where the finished surface is required to be painted, the material
applied to form surface shall be compatible with the type of paint to be used.
s. In normal circumstances generally where temperatures are above 68 deg.F (20C)
where ordinary cement is used, forms may be struck after expiry of the following
periods.
 Walls, columns and vertical sides of beams 48 hours
 Slabs 14 days
 Beams soffits 14 days
 Removal of shores or props to slabs:
1. Spanning over 14 ft (4 meters) 21 days
 Removal of shores or props of beams:
1. Spanning upto 20 ft. (6 meters) 18 days
2. Spanning over 20 ft. (6 meters) 25 days
For rapid hardening cement 1/2 of the above period will be sufficient in all cases
except vertical sides of slabs, beams and columns which should he retained for a
minimum of 24 hours.
t. Proper allowance shall be made for the decrease in rate of hardening of concrete in
cold weather and the minimum periods must be increased when the mean daily
temperature is below 68 deg.F (20C).
u. When repair of surface defects or Finishing is required at an early age forms shall be
removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from
removal operations.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 34
_________________________________________________________________________________
v. Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed as soon as the concrete
has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Any needed repairs or the
treatment required on such sloping surfaces shall be performed at once and followed
by the specified curing.
w. All form work shall be removed without such shock or vibration as would damage the
reinforced concrete.
x. When re-shoring or re-propping is permitted or required, the operations shall be
planned in advance and shall be subject to approval. While re-shoring is underway no
live load shall be permitted on the new construction. In no case during re-shoring shall
concrete in beams, slab, columns or any other structural member be subject to
combined dead and live loads in excess of the load permitted by Project Manager for
the developed concrete strength at the time of re-shoring. Re-shores shall be placed
simultaneously with stripping operations are but in no case later than the end of
working day on which stripping occurs.
y. Re-shores shall be tightened to curry their required loads without over stressing the
concrete. Re-shores shall remain in place at least until representative tests of the
concrete being supported have reached specified strength.
z. Floors supporting props or shores under newly placed concrete shall have their
original supporting props or shores left in place or shall be re-shored. The re-shoring
system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated loads and in all cases
have a capacity equal to at least one hall of capacity, of the shoring system above. The
re-shores shall be located directly under a shore position above unless other locations
arc permitted.
aa. The re-shoring or re-propping shall extend over a sufficient number of story’s to
distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads in
such a manner that the design superimposed load of the floors supporting shores or
props are not exceeded.
bb. No loads, other than those permitted by the Project Manager in connection with the
actual work in hand, shall be allowed on suspended floors until 28 days after
concreting where ordinary Portland cement is used and 14 days when rapid hardening
Portland cement is used.
cc. It is required to give forms for reinforced concrete an upward camber to ensure that
the beams or slabs including cantilever slabs do not have a sag when they have taken
up their deflection. Camber, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, should be about
1/240 for supported beams and slabs and 1/180 for cantilevers.
Acceptance of Structure
3.10.1 General
a. Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements will be accepted
subject to the other terms of the CONTRACT Documents.
b. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which has
been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted subject to the other terms of the
CONTRACT Documents.
c. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot
be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as provided in these
Specifications or in the CONTRACT Documents. In this event, modifications comply
with the requirements.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 35
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.10.2 Dimensional Tolerances

a. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by the tolerances of
Section 3.6 considered potentially deficient in strength and subject to the provisions of
Section 3.11.4.
b. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by the tolerances of
Section 3.6 may be rejected and the excess material shall be subject to removal. If removal
of the excess material is permitted, it shall be accomplished in such a manner as to
maintain the strength of the section and to meet all other applicable requirements of
function and appearance. Permission is required if excess material is to remove in
accordance with this section.
3.10.3 Appearances
a. Architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding the specified limitations shall be
removed in accordance with this Section.
b. Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if the strength, appearance
or function of the structure is adversely effected or misplaced items interfere with other
construction.
c. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding the limits of Section 3.6 & of Section
3.11.4 and which are exposed to view, may be rejected and shall be repaired or removed
and replaced if required.
d. Other concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely affect the appearance of the
specified finish may be repaired only by approved methods.
e. Concrete not exposed to view, but of defective appearance, may be accepted at the
discretion of the Project Manager.
3.10.4 Strength of Structure
a. The strength of structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if it fails to

comply with any requirements' which control the strength of the structure, including but
not necessarily limited to the following conditions:
i. Concrete strength requirements not considered to be satisfied in accordance
with Section 7.
ii. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position or arrangement variance
with the requirements of the CONTRACT Documents.
iii. Concrete which differs from the required dimensions or location in such a
manner as to reduce the strength.
iv. Curing less than that specified.
v. Inadequate protection of concrete from extreme temperature during the early
stages of hardening and strength development.
vi. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or premature removal of form
work likely to result in deficient strength.
vii. Poor workmanship likely to result insufficient strength
b. Structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required when the strength of the
structure is considered potentially deficient.
c. Core tests may be required when the strength of the structure is considered potentially
deficient.
d. If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not
confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be required and their results evaluated
in accordance with ACI Standard 318.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 36
_________________________________________________________________________________
e. Concrete work judged inadequate by structural analysis or by results of a load test shall
be reinforced with additional construction, if so directed by Project Manager or shall be
replaced, at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
f. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing arid/or
analysis required by this Section,
g. THE EMPLOYER will pay all costs of additional testing and / or analysis which is made
at his request and which is not required by specifications, or the CONTRACT Documents.
Methods of Measurement of Concrete Works
3.11.1 General
a. Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities, or herein, all items shall
be deemed to be inclusive of, but not limited to, the following:
i. Labor/plant and all costs in connection therewith.
ii. Materials, goods and all costs in connection therewith, e.g. conveyance, delivery,
unloading, storing, returning, packing, handling, hoisting, lowering.
iii. All fixtures and all costs in connection therewith for precast works.
iv. Fitting and fixing materials and goods in position.
v. Waste of materials, and Square cutting.
vi. Mixing, transporting, hoisting, placing in from at any level, compacting through
vibration &, curing etc. complete including the cost of form work & its removal
(but excluding cost of reinforcement).
vii. Establishment charges, overhead charges and profit.
viii. All other expenses, charges and taxes specified in Conditions of CONTRACT.
b. Works shall be measured net as fixed in position as per drawings and instructions of
Project Manager. Each measurement shall be taken to the nearest 1/2" (12. 0 mm). This
rule shall not apply to any dimensions stated in the descriptions.
3.11.2 Concrete Measurement
a. Concrete shall be measured as executed but no deduction shall be made to the following:
 Volume of any steel embedded in the concrete.
 Volume occupied by water pipes, conduits etc., not exceeding 4 square inch (2500 sq.
mm) each in cross-sectional area.
 Voids not exceeding 1 square foot in work given in square feet and 0.1 sq m in work
given in sq meters. If any void exceeds above limit total void shall be deducted.
 Voids not exceeding 1 cubic foot in work given in cubic feet. 0.03 cubic meter in
work given in cubic meter. If any void exceeds above limit, unit total void shall be
deducted.
b. Voids, which are not to be deducted as per Section 3.11.2.a above, refer only to openings
or vents which are wholly within the boundaries of measured areas. Openings or vents
which are at the boundaries of measured areas shall always be subject to deduction
irrespective of size.
c. Junctions between straight and curved works shall in all cases be deemed to be included
with the work in which they occur.
d. Concrete work shall be classified and measured separately as follows unless otherwise
described elsewhere:-
e. Buildings, foundation beams, foundation slabs, footings, bases of columns, machine
foundations, mass concrete etc., in cubic feet (Cubic meter).
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 37
_________________________________________________________________________________
 Floor slabs on ground with floor beams in cubic feet (Cubic meter).
 Walls in foundations, plinth and superstructure in cubic feet (Cubic meter) stating
thickness,
 Columns, piers, pilasters, pillars etc., in cubic feet (Cubic meter).
 Lintels, beams and brackets in cubic feet (Cubic meter).
 Suspended floors, roofs and stair landings in square feel (sq. metre) stating thickness.
 Stairs (including landing) in cubic feet (Cubic meter).
 Railings in cubic feet (Cubic meter), square feet (Sq. meter), or linear feet (meter)
stating description.
 Parapets, purdees and the like in cubic feet (Cubic Meter) stating thickness.
 Jali, blocks in square feet (Sq. Meter) stating thickness & description.
 Precast concrete items shall each be enumerated except if otherwise shown in the Bill
of Quantities, separately stating the description.
c. Measurement of walls shall be taken between attached columns, piers or pilasters. The
thickness of attached columns, piers or pilasters shall be taken as the combined thickness
of the wall and the columns, piers or pilasters. Attached or isolated columns, piers,
pilasters and the like (except where caused by openings) having a length on plan not
exceeding four times the thickness shall be classified as columns. Those having a length
over four times the thickness and caused by openings in walls shall be classified as walls.
d. Columns shall be measured from the top of footings/beams or floor surfaces to the
underside of beams or slabs as the case may be. Where the width of the beams is less than
the width of columns, the extra width at the junction shall be included in the beam.
e. The depth of the beams shall be measured from bottom of the slab to the bottom of the
beams, except in case of inverted beams where it shall be measured from top of slab to
the top of beam. The cross section below or above the slab.
3.11.3 Formwork Measurement
a. Formwork if separate and extra payment is specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities
shall be measured in square feet (Sq. m) as the actual surface of the finished structure
which required to be supported during the deposition of the concrete, including the upper
surfaces to the work sloping more than 15 degree from the horizontal. No allowance shall
be made for overlaps and passing at angles and no deduction shall be made for the
following:-
 Voids not exceeding ten square feet (1 Sq. m).
 Intersections of main beams with walls or columns.
 Intersections of secondary beams with main beams.
b. Form work shall be deemed to be inclusive of, but not limited to items detailed in section
12.1 and the following:-
 Batten, struts, reversed cut strings, bolting, oiling, wedging, easing, striking, removing
and making good exposed faces of concrete after removal of form work. Also yokes, wales
sheathing, jack rods, jacks, working platforms and finishers, scaffolds, etc.
c. Forming chamfers not exceeding 2" (50 mm) wide and forming splayed internal angles
not exceeding 1/2" (12.0 mm) wide shall not be for extra.
d. Temporary stop ends for constructed joints shall not be measured and for.
e. Classification of formwork (if separate and extra payment is specifically stated in the Bill
of Quantities) shall be as follows:-
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 38
_________________________________________________________________________________
 To horizontal or sloping soffits of suspended slabs, floors, roofs, staircases,

landings and the like.
 To sloping upper surfaces of suspended slabs, floors, roofs and the like where
more than 15 degree from horizontal.
 To vertical or battering sides of foundations, foundation beams and slabs, ground
beams, machine foundations and the like.
 To vertical or battering sides of walls, solid balustrades and the like.
 To vertical or battering sides.
 To vertical or battering sides of stanchion casings, columns, piers, plasters and
the like.
 To sides and soffits of openings in walls, recesses in walls, projecting panels on
walls and the like.
 To sides and soffits of horizontal or sloping beam casings, beams, brackets,
lintels, staircase, strings and the like.
 To sloping upper surfaces of beam casings, beams, brackets, lintels, staircase-
strings and the like where more than 15 degrees from horizontal.
 To edges of beds, roads, footpaths, paving and the like.
 To edges of suspended slabs, floors, roofs, landing and the like.
 To risers of steps and staircases.
 To sides of kerbs, up stands and the like.
 Form work to throats, grooves, chases rebates, chamfers over 2" wide (50 mm)
splayed internal angles over 1/2" wide (12.5 mm) moldings and the like shall each
be measured separately in linear feet stating the size.
3.11.4 Reinforcement Measurement
a. The rate tendered for any type of reinforcement by the CONTRACTOR shall also be
inclusive of the cost of binding wire wastages, and the cost of concrete, metal or plastic
chairs and spacers or hungers, etc.
b. All reinforcement shall be provided in length shown in drawings and as per Specifications.
c. Should the CONTRACTOR provide lengths of reinforcement which are greater than
shown on the Drawings no payment of extra length shall be made? Overlaps, unless
clearly shown in working Drawings, shall not he allowed and measured.
d. The CONTRACTOR shall be paid for reinforcement by weight computed from Table -
3-2and from linear measurements of reinforcements actually used at SITE as per the
Drawings, Specifications and instructions of Project Manager. No payment shall be made
for steel chairs or wastage. CONTRACTOR shall not claim for the difference in the actual
weights of bars and their standard weights given in Table -3-2.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 39
_________________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 3-2 – BAR SIZES AND WEIGHT PER UNIT LENGTH
ASTM "Soft" Weight per unit length Nominal Diameter Nominal Area
Metric
Bar Size Size (lb/ft) (kg/m) (inch) (mm) (inch2) (mm2)
(SI)
#2 #6 0.167 0.249 0.250 6.35 0.05 32
#3 #10 0.376 0.561 0.375 9.525 0.11 71
#4 #13 0.668 0.996 0.500 12.7 0.2 129
#5 #16 1.043 1.556 0.625 15.875 0.31 200
#6 #19 1.502 2.24 0.750 19.05 0.44 284
#7 #22 2.044 3.049 0.875 22.225 0.6 387
#8 #25 2.670 3.982 1.000 25.4 0.79 509
#9 #29 3.400 5.071 1.128 28.65 1.00 645
#10 #32 4.3030 6.418 1.270 32.26 1.27 819
#11 #36 5.313 7.924 1.410 35.81 1.56 1006
#14 #43 7.650 11.41 1.693 43 2.25 1452
#18 #57 13.60 20.284 2.257 57.3 4.00 2581
#18J - 14.600 21.775 2.337 59.4 4.29 2678
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 40
SECTION 4 – MASONRY
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4 – MASONRY – PART 1

4.1. Concrete Block Masonry
4.1.1 Scope
The work covered by this section of the specification consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all the operations in connection with
masonry work, complete in strict accordance with the specification herein and the applicable
drawings subject to the terms and conditions of the CONTRACT.
4.1.2 Materials
4.1.2.1 Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland cement meeting the requirements specified under
“CONCRETE” in sub-section 2 of these specifications.
4.1.2.2 Aggregates
Aggregates used shall meet the requirements specified under “CONCRETE” in sub-section 2
of these specifications. All the aggregates dry and properly screened shall be acceptable for
block making.
4.1.3 Concrete, Masonry Units
4.1.3.1 Concrete masonry blocks shall be made on the Project Site and shall be of the sizes required
by the drawing and / or as directed by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE and shall
be generally conform to the requirements of B.S.S. 2028, 1364: 1968 “Precast Concrete
Blocks” unless specified otherwise in the Specifications.
4.1.3.2 The blocks shall be solid or hollow as required and shall be carefully made so that they are
true in line and face with square corners and free from all defects. The ends of the blocks,
which will form the grooved or as directed by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE.
In the case of hollow blocks, the cavities shall be true to the shapes and sizes specified and
shall have uniform wall thickness on the outside of the cavities.
4.1.3.3 The concrete for the blocks shall be mixed in a concrete mixer in the proportion of one (1)
part of cement, there (3) parts of sand and six (6) parts of well graded coarses aggregate not
exceeding ¾” in size or one (1) part of cement and seven (7) parts of well graded all in
aggregates not exceeding ¾” in size.
4.1.3.4 Concrete blocks shall be machine moulded. The concrete shall be well worked into the
moulds, vibrated, tamped and pressed to ensure that the moulds, vibrated tamped and
presented to ensure that the blocks are dense and free from voids.
4.1.3.5 The blocks shall be cured by keeping moist continuously for a period of at least ten (10) days
and then shall be allowed to dry in shade for at least twenty (20) days before being used in
masonry.
4.1.3.6 All blocks shall have clean cut straight and true edges, smooth dense faces of uniform
appearance without voids, honeycombs, projections and shall be free from cracks spalls, chips,
ragged edges or other defects detrimental to their use.
4.1.3.7 Where blocks are to be plastered or rendered, the block surface shall have a coarse texture
suitable for bonding the plaster as approved by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 41
_________________________________________________________________________________
4.1.3.8 The average compressive strength of any ten blocks picked at random after curing and drying
shall be not less than 1500 lbs/sq. inch when tested in accordance with B.S. 1364: 1963
“Precast concrete blocks”.
4.1.3.9 The average moisture content of all the concrete masonry units shall not exceed 30 percent of
the total water absorption of units. The shrinkage of cement concrete blocks in much greater
at the time it dries for the first time after molding subsequent to curing. It is therefore, essential
that CONTRACTOR shall take full care to see that blocks are sufficiently and thoroughly
dried so that their initial shrinkage is completed before the blocks are laid in the wall. Not only
well dried blocks shall be used, but the blocks shall also be laid dry without wetting except
with slightly moistened surfaces on which mortar is to be applied to obviate absorption of
water from the mortar and even during curing of the mortar joints the blocks shall be slightly
moistened and shall not be allowed to be excessively wet till they receive any plaster or render.
4.1.3.10 The blocks shall be stored in such a manner so as to avoid any contact with moisture on the
site of works. The blocks shall be stock piled on planks or other supports free from contact
with the ground and if necessary cover for protection against wetting. The blocks right from
casting to curing, drying, stock piling and their subsequent placing in masonry walls shall
be handled with care.
4.1.4 Cement Mortar for Masonry
4.1.4.1 Proportions
Cement Mortar shall be composed of one part of ordinary Portland cement to 6 (six) parts of
sand for all concrete block walls Hand mixing when permitted by the CONSULTANT’S
REPRESENTATIVE shall be done on clean hard platform as much as required for immediate
use with only just sufficient water to produce mortar of a proper consistency. If directed by
the CONSULTANT’S RERESENTATIVE the mixing shall be done by mechanical mixers.
Sand shall be of an approved quality and shall pass 100% through 3/16” sieve.
4.1.4.2 Gauging
The ingredients for mortar shall be measured in boxes. No re-tempering of mortar shall be
allowed nor shall mixing of any anti-freezing ingredients in mortar be permitted.
4.1.4.3 Mixing
The dry materials shall be dry mixed for approximately 2 minutes and for 3 minutes after
addition of water making total minimum time of 5 minutes in a mortar mixer. When hand
mixing is permitted, or dry mix, shake well, turn over materials for each bath before adding
water, until uniform color or mixed materials indicates cementitious material thoroughly
distributed throughout the mass. After dry mixing is complete, add water until thoroughly
mixed mortar of the required plasticity is obtained. If mixed is not satisfactorily done, then the
CONTRACTOR shall take such steps as directed by the CONSULTANT’S
REPRESENTATIVE. Mortar shall be used within half an hour of mixing. Mortar standing
more than half an hour shall not be used.
4.1.5 Masonry and Jointing
4.1.5.1 All masonry shall be laid plumb, true to line and level in accurately spaced course with each
breaking joints with the course below. Corners and reveals shall be plumb and true. Chases
grooves, reglet blocks and raked out joints shall be kept free from mortar and other debris.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 42
_________________________________________________________________________________
4.1.5.2 The thickness and length of various walls shall be indicated on the drawings. Usually English
or Flemish bond is used, however Rat trap bond can be used for walling instead of English or
Flemish bond.
4.1.5.3 Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, the spaces around frames and other
built-in items shall be solidly filled with mortar, except the joints that are to be pointing shall
be raked out ¾” deep.
4.1.5.4 Work required to be built in with masonry including anchors, wall plugs and accessories shall
be built-in, as the work progresses. Wood plugs and blocking shall not be built into masonry.
4.1.5.5 All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely and solidly filled with mortar as the
blocks are laid. In horizontal bedding joints, mortar shall be spread over the entire top surface
of the block to a uniform layer of 3/8” thick for vertical joints mortar shall be applied to a
block unit when it is standing vertically, and then placing it horizontally on the horizontal
bedding mortar and pressing it against the previously laid unit in that course, making a vertical
joint of 3/8” thickness. In horizontal bedding joints mortar shall not be spread so much ahead
of the actual laying of unit that it tends to stiffen and loose its plasticity resulting in poor bond.
If it happens, then the stiffened mortar shall be removed and fresh mortar laid by the
CONTRACTOR at his own cost. When the mortar has stiffened somewhat, it shall be firmly
compacted with a jointing tool.
4.1.5.6 The thickness of joints shall not be exceed 3/8 inch and the joints shall be raked ½ inch deep
when the mortar is still fresh, so as to provide for proper bond for the plaster. Any mortar
which falls on the floor from the joints or is removed due to raking of joints shall not be re-
used.
4.1.5.7 No masonry to be erected when temperature of outside air is below 40 oF unless suitable
means as approved by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTAITVE are provided to heat the
material and provide protection from cold and frost to ensure that it will harden without
freezing.
4.1.5.8 When the masonry is to receive plaster on one side and pointing on the other, the block shall
be placed in such a way that the better face shall be on the side of pointing.
4.1.5.9 Wherever blocks about columns, they shall be anchored there by means of anchor steel bars,
as shown on the drawings or any other type of anchor steel bars, as shown on the drawings or
any other type of anchors as approved by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE at a
vertical spacing of approx. 12 inch for wall upto 6” thick and approximately 24” for walls
more than 6” thick unless otherwise directed by the CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE.
Alternatively the masonry may be built-up first leaving the dovetail type ends near the
columns and the columns then be cast so that the concrete of the columns and the masonry
make a dovetail type of joints, provided it is permitted in writing by the CONSULTANT’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
4.1.5.10 Erection of partition and panel walls shall be delayed, wherever possible until the frame of
the structure is taken up. Care should be taken that no deformation occurs due to structural
loads. Otherwise the top course of partitions under slabs and beams shall not be laid until
the form has been removed and the roof slab placed.
4.1.5.11 In damp soils to prevent the rise of moisture from the ground due to capillary action the
foundation and basement masonry when, so directed by the CONSULTANT’S
REPRESENTATIVE shall be laid in richer mortar than specified in which case the
CONTRACTOR shall be paid the extra cost of cement used. In addition a damp proof course
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 43
_________________________________________________________________________________
shall be provided consisting of 1 to 2 inches thick layer 1:2:4 cement pudlow mortar or an
approved type of bituminous course.
4.1.5.12 All masonry work and portions of walls shall be bonded together as directed by the
CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE. In order to ensure appropriate bonding between
walls, masonry bonds will be executed by extending alternate courses of units of an
intersecting wall or partition through the thickness of the wall or partition it intersects.
4.1.6 Coordination
4.1.6.1 Cooperate with other trades in setting built-in items, taking special care in cutting fitting
setting units so that built-in members are in their true, respective positions slush voids full.
4.1.6.2 For items provided in other sections such as door frames fasts, miscellaneous metal work
occurring in the masonry sleeves, anchor’s support nailing strips brace jambs, etc., are to be
built in the masonry.
4.1.6.3 Special care shall be taken in building block at door frames, CONTRACTOR shall see that
frames are square and plumb. Check frames before building work around or against them. The
CONTRACTOR shall see that full electric conduits are not housed into frames, so as to
prevent extension of frame anchor.
4.1.6.4 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to his own work and also to the
work of other sections.
4.1.7 Protection and Cleaning
4.1.7.1 Surface of masonry, not being worked on shall be properly protected at all times during the
construction operations. When rain is expected and the work is discontinued the top of
exposed masonry walls shall be covered with strong water-proof membrane, well secured in
place.
4.1.7.2 Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with water and fiber brushes as directed by the
CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE.
4.1.7.3 Protect adjacent work during cleaning operations. Make good any damages from neglect of
this precaution.
4.1.8 Samples
Samples of all kinds of materials, to be used on the job, shall be submitted to the
CONSULTANT’S REPRESENTATIVE and shall be approved by him.
4.1.9 Testing
All the materials and completed masonry work shall be subjected to standard testing, and, if
found below the given standard specifications, shall be rejected. Rejected material shall be
removed from the site immediately. All testing shall be done at CONTRACTOR’S cost.
4.1.10 Measurement and Payment
Measurement and payment for all masonry and other items, covered under this section of the
specifications, will be made for the actual works executed at the Unit Rates entered in the Bill
of Quantities appended hereto and in accordance with the conditions of the CONTRACT and
shall be the full compensation for furnishing all materials, labour complete in accordance with
these Specifications.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 44
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4 – MASONRY – PART II

4.2. Brick Masonry
4.2.1 Scope
The work under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with
furnishing and installing plain Brick Masonry and fair face Brick cladding (Gutka) of specified
size in position complete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and
applicable drawings and or as established by the Engineer. Instead of Brick Masonry,
compressed Earth block may be used subject to the approval of Engineer.
4.2.2. Codes and Standards
The work shall conform to the requirements of the following Codes and Standards, unless
otherwise specified.
• ACI 530-88 Building code requirements for masonry structures
• ACI 530.1-88 Specifications for masonry structures
• PS 208 Classification, strength and properties of bricks
• ASTM C 67-81 Standard method for sampling and testing brick and structural clay tile
• ASTM C 144-81 Standard specifications of aggregates for masonry mortar
• ASTM C 150-81 Specifications for Portland cement
• UBC 2405 Quality control
• UBC 2406 Allowable stresses
4.2.3. Submittals
a) The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for his approval:
b) Methodology and Sequence of work
c) Specimen samples of bricks, aggregates for mortar or grout and Portland cement.
Specimens of bricks shall be representative of a complete range of colors, textures and
sizes
d) Results of all the tests performed upon the materials and masonry units obtained from the
site of work as per directions of the Engineer.
4.2.4 Tolerances
4.2.4.1 Brick
No overall dimension of brick (width, height and length) shall differ from the specified
standard dimension by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm)
• Standard dimensions of brick = 9” x 4-1/2” x 3” (230 x 115 x 75mm)
• Fair face brick (gutka) = 9” x 2-1/4”” x 2-1/4” (230 x 62 x 62 mm)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 45
_________________________________________________________________________________
4.2.4.2 Brick Work

All brick work shall be erected true to line, plumb and level and the variation:
• Plumb in any length of wall shall not exceed 1/12” (2mm) in 3 feet (one meter)
• 3/8” (10mm) in a storey height or 1 inch (25mm) in the entire height.
4.2.5. Inspection and Testing

Regular inspections shall be carried out to control the quality of the works and to ensure that
materials, construction and workmanship are in compliance with the plans and Specifications.
Inspection and test records shall be maintained and made available to the Engineer as a routine,
on each working day.
4.2.5.1 Inspection
Inspection for quality control shall include, but is not limited to the following:
a. The masonry units i.e. bricks, reinforcement if used, cement, lime, surkhi, aggregate,
water and all the other materials meet the requirements of the applicable standards of
quality
b. Materials are properly stored and prepared for use
c. Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredients,
d. The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that the
proportions of the constituents are entirely controlled.
e. The bricks pass a visual inspection for soundness, compact structure, reasonably
uniform texture and shape; and that the bricks are free from cracks, wrap-age, large
pebbles, balls of clay or particles of lime that would affect the serviceability or
strength of the brick.
4.2.5.2 Testing
Burnt bricks shall be of uniform color, finish and free from cracks, warp-age, exposed stones,
pebbles or particles of lime. The size of the bricks shall be in accordance with that shown on
the Drawings. The testing of bricks shall comply with ASTM C 67. Physical requirements of
the bricks shall be as given in Table 4-1.
TABLE 4-1
Bricks Minimum Maximum water Maximum Saturation
Compressive Strength Absorption in 5
Co-efficient
(brick flat wise) hour
Individual 1300 psi 25% 0.90

Average of 5 1600 psi 22% 0.88
bricks
a) The saturation coefficient is the ratio of absorption by 24 hours submersion in cold water
and to that after 5 - hours submersion in boiling water.
b) In case the bricks do not have the compressive strength as specified then the Engineer
shall use his best judgment in permitting incorporation of the best bricks available in the
area, taking into consideration the nature and structural stability of the works.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 46
_________________________________________________________________________________
c) If 10 bricks per thousand are defective or if the average weight of nominal 9” x 4-1/2” x
3” (230 mmx115x75mm) brick is between 3.2 kg – 4.2 kg (frog 6 mm deep) or the bricks
are out of dimension the whole lot shall be rejected and the Contractor shall remove the
rejected lots from the Site.
4.2.6. Delivery and Storage
4.2.6.1 Delivery
The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortar shall be such as will
not damage the bricks nor delay the use of mixed mortar.
4.2.6.2 Storage
Masonry materials shall be so stored that at the time of use the materials are clean and
structurally suitable for use.
4.2.7 Mortar
4.2.7.1 Cement
All cement for mortar for brickwork shall conform to the applicable requirements set forth in
Section Plain and Reinforced Concrete.
4.2.7.2 Sand
a) Sand for mortar used in brickwork shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall meet
the requirements set forth in ASTM C 144. The Fineness Modules of the sand shall range
between 1.9 & 2.8 and the grading shall be within the limits
b) Sand shall be stored at the Site in such a manner that it is not mixed with foreign matter.
Methods employed by the Contractor for unloading, loading, handling and storage shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Sufficient quantity shall be maintained at the
Site at all times to assure continuous work.
4.2.7.3 Water
The water used in the manufacture of bricks and in the preparation of mortar shall be in
complete conformity with the applicable requirements set forth for water in Section Plain and
Reinforced Concrete.
4.2.7.4 Surkhi
Surkhi shall be prepared by grinding special bricks into powder form or may be
obtained/purchased from approved manufacturers.
4.2.7.5 Mortar Composition
4.2.7.5.1 Cement Sand Mortar

Mortar for all brickwork shall, except as otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer,
shall consist of one part Portland Cement to four parts of sand by volume for 4-1/2” (115
mm) thick walls and one part of cement in six parts of sand for 9” (230mm) and over thick
walls for building works and one part of cement to 5 parts of sand for other works, and
sufficient water to produce the proper consistency for the intended use. Where directed by
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 47
_________________________________________________________________________________
the Engineer for increased workability, hydrated lime putty, approved by the Engineer, shall
be added to the mortar but shall not exceed 25 percent, by volume of the dry cement.
4.2.7.5.2 Mortar for fair face Brick Cladding (gutka)

The mortar for all fair face brick (gutka) masonry cladding shall consists of cement, surkhi
and sufficient water to produce proper consistency in the following composition:
Cement: Surkhi
1: 4
OR
Swan pozzolana in the ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
4.2.7.5.3 Mortar Batching

Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar shall be such as will accurately determine
and control the amount of each separate ingredient entering into the mortar and shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. If a mixer is used, it shall be of approved design and
the mixing time after all the ingredients are in the mixer, except for the full amount of water,
shall not be less than two minutes. Mortar shall be mixed only in sufficient quantities for
immediate use and all mortar not used within 30 minutes after addition of the water to the
mix shall be wasted. Re-tempering of mortar will not be allowed. Mixing troughs pans shall
be thoroughly cleaned and washed at the end of each day's work.
4.2.8. Bricks
4.2.8.1 Brick Materials

Bricks for plain brick masonry shall be first class bricks made from carefully selected earth
which shall be good loam or clay. The earth shall be free from objectionable quantities of
lime, gravel, coarse sand and roots and other organic matter. The salt contents shall not exceed
0.3 per cent and calcium carbonate content shall not exceed 2 per cent.
4.2.8.2 Brick Manufacture

All bricks shall be manufactured by the Trench Kiln Method or other standard method
approved by the Engineer. The molds to be used in the manufacture of bricks shall be
thoroughly sanded before each use and shall be sufficiently larger than the size of the bricks
being manufactured to allow for shrinkage in drying and burning. Each finished brick shall be
a nominal 230x115x75 mm in size, shall weigh between 3.2 and 4.1 kilograms and shall have
a "frog" 6 millimeter deep on the upper face. The bricks shall be thoroughly burnt but without
being vitrified. The bricks used shall be well burnt, uniform in shape, size, texture, color and
should produce a ringing sound when struck. The bricks shall be free from flaws, cracks, chips,
stone nodules of lime or kankar or other blemishes. Bricks over burnt, vitrified, irregular in
shape or not having uniform colour or under burnt shall not be used. Bricks of uniform size
shall be used throughout the work and the source of supply shall not be diversified.
4.2.8.3 Stacking and Sampling

The bricks shall be sorted and arranged in stacks of one or two thousands or as directed by the
Engineer. Each stack shall be 10 courses high and two bricks thick so that at least 2 feet (0.6
meters) space between the stacks shall be left for the purpose of inspection. Each size or class
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 48
_________________________________________________________________________________
of brick shall be stacked separately. For purposes of inspection and tests the sample bricks
shall be selected by the Engineer or a person authorized by the Engineer for this purpose.
These samples shall be furnished by the Contractor without charge. The sampling shall
conform to ASTM C 67. For the modulus or rupture, compressive strength and absorption
determinations at least 10 bricks shall be selected from each lot of 25,000 bricks or a fraction
thereof. For larger lots five additional bricks shall be selected from each 50,000 bricks or a
fraction thereof contained in the lot. In no case shall less than 5 bricks be taken.
Additional specimens may be taken at the discretion of the Engineer. Each specimen shall be
marked so that it may be identified at any time. Markings shall not cover more than 5 per cent
of the superficial area of the specimen.
4.2.9. Scaffolding
Contractor shall provide safe scaffolding of adequate strength for use of workmen at all levels
and heights. Scaffolding which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsafe, shall not be used until
it has been strengthened and made safe for use of workmen to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Damage to masonry from scaffolding or from any other causes shall be repaired by the
Contractor.
4.2.10. Execution
4.2.10.1 Placing Brick Masonry

The methods and equipment used for transporting the bricks and mortar shall be such as will
not damage the brick nor delay the use of mixed mortar. Brick shall not be placed during
rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash the mortar from the brick. Mortar already
spread which becomes diluted by rain shall be removed and replaced before continuing with
the work. All brick to be used in brick masonry shall be moistened with water for three to
four hours before they are used by a method which will ensure that each brick is thoroughly
and uniformly wetted. All bricks shall be free from water adhering to their surface when
they are placed in the brick masonry.
Bricks shall be laid "frog" upward with mortar joints and in English/Flemish bond as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Both bed and vertical joints shall be
approximately 6mm and 10mm in thickness completely filled with cement mortar as
specified herein, and each brick shall be bedded by firmly tapping with the handle of the
trowel. All horizontal joints shall be parallel and all vertical joints in alternate courses shall
be directly over one another. Excess mortar at the outer edges shall be removed and joints
drawn straight with the edge of a trowel and a straight edge. All anchors and similar work
required to be embedded in the brick masonry shall be installed as the work progresses. At
the completion of the work all holes or defective mortar joints shall be cut out and re-
pointed.
Where shown on the drawing the exterior faces of the walls shall be finished by striking the
joints as the work proceeds. The joints shall be struck by raking the green mortar after the
brick work has been laid and finishing the joint with a pointing tool. Horizontal joints shall
be struck to form a weathered joint and vertical joints shall be struck with a V notch. Care
shall be taken that the striking tools do not develop a cutting edge as the object of striking
the joint is to compress the mortar into the joints.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 49
_________________________________________________________________________________
The exposed faces of all brick masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned and left bare with struck
joints as specified above.
The fair face Brick cladding (gutka) shall be laid in running bond unless otherwise as shown
on the drawing or directed by the Engineer.
4.2.10.2 Curing
All brickwork requiring mortar shall be cured by water or other acceptable methods. All
methods and operations of the Contractor in curing the different portions of the work shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. When curing by water, the brickwork shall be
kept wet for 7 days unless specified otherwise or covered with water-saturated material or
by a system of perforated pipes, mechanical sprinklers, porous hose, pounding or by any
other approved method which will keep all surfaces to be cured continuously wet. Water
used for curing shall meet the requirements for water used in the manufacture of bricks.
4.2.10.3 Finishing
All bricks shall be skillfully laid frog face up with level courses, uniform joints, square
corners, plumb verticals and true surfaces, except when otherwise shown on Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. Where the brickwork is required to be covered by mortar coating,
the required finish shall be as indicated on the Drawings and shall meet with the
requirements of the relevant specifications.
4.2.10.4 Cement Mortar Coating

Brickwork surfaces which are intended to receive paint coatings, shall have an over coating
of cement mortar. The mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement to four parts of sand
by volume and sufficient water to produce the proper consistency for the intended use. The
surface on which mortar is to be applied shall be rough, clean and damp. The first layer of
mortar, about 6 mm thick shall be forcibly dashed onto the surface so as to bond more
tightly. The full thickness of the cement coating shall be ½” (12mm) except where otherwise
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
4.2.10.5 Pointing
Brickwork surfaces which are intended to receive pointing shall be given V-notch pointing
by striking the joints. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still
sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool which compacts the mortar.
Raked joints shall be ½” (12mm) deep V-notch, 70 degree apex in order to give pressed and
compacted surface. All joints shall be given finish with 1:3 cement sand mortar with a
pointing tool.
4.2.11 Repairing Brickwork
a) If, after the completion of any brickwork, brick is out of alignment or not level, or does
not conform to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or shows a defective surface,
it shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense, unless the Engineer
grants permission in writing to patch the defective area.
b) At the completion of the work, all holes and defective mortar joints shall be cut and
repointed. Exposed masonry shall be protected against staining or other damages and
excess mortar shall be cleared off the surfaces as the work progresses. All exposed
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 50
_________________________________________________________________________________
masonry shall be clean, smooth, plumb and shall be of acceptable finish. In the event
ordinary cleaning is not adequate, special methods such as sand blasting or otherwise as
approved by the Engineer, shall be used to clean the surfaces.
4.2.12. Horizontal Damp Proof Course
All Horizontal damp proof courses unless otherwise specified in the drawings shall consists
of class 'B' cement concrete (3000 psi) 2” (50mm) thick, mixed with 2.5 kg of pudlo/bag of
cement or other approved quality water proofing compound as per manufacturer's
specifications and shall be laid at required levels as per drawings and instructions of the
Engineer. The D.P.C shall be tamped, consolidated, leveled and edges corners made to the
requirements of the relevant drawings including finishing and curing complete. Including two
float coat of hot bitumen 10/20 penetration grade shall be applied over the class “B” cement
concrete @ 7 kg/100 sft.
4.2.13. Vertical Damp Proof Course
All vertical damp proof courses unless otherwise specified in the drawings shall consists of
½” thick cement sand plaster in 1:3, mixed with 2.5 kg of pudlo/bag of cement or other
approved quality water proofing compound as per manufacturer's specifications and shall be
applied at required elevation as per drawings and instructions by the Engineer, including two
float of hot bitumen 10/20 penetration grade shall be applied over plaster @ 7kg/100sft..
4.2.14. Measurement and Payment
4.2.14.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no measurement
and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified works related to the relevant
items of the Bills of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in
the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bills of Quantities.
• Cutting & chiseling of masonry wherever required.
• Cement sand mortar used in laying bricks including wastage.
• Curing and repairing the masonry work.
• All joint reinforcing bars, reinforcing anchor bars or hoop iron
• Horizontal Damp proof course of class “B" concrete (3000 psi) including damp proof
materials.
• Vertical Damp proof course of 1:3 Plaster including damp proof materials
• Scaffolding for Masonry Work.
• 2-1/2” long steel nails to be fixed in Brick masonry after every 5th course at a distance
6” c/c for fair face Brick Cladding.
• Cement sand mortar in 1:4 at the back of the fair face brick (Gutka) cladding to make
it in plumb if required.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 51
_________________________________________________________________________________
4.2.14.2 Brick Masonry
4.2.14.2.1 Measurement
In case of different thickness of slab in different areas or room or for any other reason
whatsoever, if chiseling of masonry is required, the Contractor shall do so at his own cost
where, for any reason whatsoever, the height, of the wall is short of ceiling height, of the
actual height shall be made good with 3000 psi nominal mix concrete. This concrete shall
neither be measured nor be paid under item of concrete but will be paid for under item of
wall masonry. Similarly where the lintel heights are such that the Contractor has to chisel
the masonry or provide cast-in-place concrete to make up the height of the course, no
payment will be made for chiseling, but where such cast- in-place concrete is provided,
payment for the same will be made at the unit rate for masonry. Measurement of acceptably
completed works of brick masonry will be made on the basis of number of cubic feet for 9”
(230mm) thick and above and for 4-1/2” (115mm) thick and below in Sq. feet as provided
& installed in position as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. All opening
more than 1 Sq. ft (0.1 Sq. meter) area left in the masonry wall shall be deducted.
4.2.14.2.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of brick masonry on the basis of
unit rate per cubic foot for 9” (230mm) thick and above and 4-1/2” (115mm) thick and
below in square foot quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation
for all the works related to the item.
4.2.14.3 Fair Face Brick Cladding in Cement Surkhi
4.2.14.3.1 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of fair face brick cladding will be made on the
basis of actual area in Square feet of wall laid in position to the line, level as shown on the
Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
4.2.14.3.2 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of fair face brick cladding on the
basis of unit rate per Square foot quoted in the Bills of Quantities and shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the item.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Page 52
SECTION 5 – CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5 - CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

5.1 Scope of Work
The work covered under this section of Specification consists of providing all material,
labor, plant equipment appliances and performing all operations conducted with the
fabrication add erection of all woodwork, millwork, construction, assembly, surface finish
treatment and building in of all cabinet type items, supports, etc, of wood or metal and
incidentals, associated woodwork appurtenances, procuring and applying preservatives,
installation of "Finish Hard Ware" in connection with finish woodwork as per details shown
on the drawings or as this section is covered with detailed specifications as laid down
herein.
5.2 Submittals
The submittal should include:
a. Samples of all the materials and components.
b. Shop Drawings showing door types, details and locations, referenced to the door
type and hardware group shown on door and hardware schedules.
c. Certificates stating that doors were constructed with timber of the species specified
having mixture content and meeting equilibrium and relative humidity
requirements specified.
d. Sample efface veneers for selection of colour and pattern.
5.3 Applicable Standards
Latest editions of following; ASTM Standards, Pakistan Standards and British Standards
are relevant to these Specifications wherever applicable.
CP 112-71 The structural use of timber in buildings.
IBS 459-65 Match boarded doors.
168 565-72 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork.
BS 745.69 Animal glue for wood.
881186-71 Quality of timber and workmanship in joinery.
BS 1202-74 Nails
BS 1203-79 Specifications for synthetic resin adhesive for plywood.
BS 1204-79 Synthetic resin adhesives for wood.
BS 1210-63 Wood screws.
BS 1245-75 Metal door frame (steel).
BS 1282-75 Guide to the choice, use and application of wood preservatives
6S 1455-72 Plywood manufactured from tropical hardwoods.
BS 1494-51 Fixing accessories for building purposes.
BS 1567-60 Wood door frames and linings.
BS 1579-60 Connectors for timber.
BS 3444-72 Block board and laminated board.
BS 3842-65 Treatment of plywood with preservatives.
BS 5268 Preservative treatments for construction timber.
Pt.5 1977
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 53
______________________________________________________________________________
5.4 Tolerances
 Size: Plus or minus 1.6 mm overall dimensions

 Maximum warp: 6 mm
 Squareness: Maximum diagonal difference 3 mm (between length of diagonal
measured on face of door or window from upper right corner to
lower left comer and length of diagonal measured from upper left
comer to lower right corner).
5.5 Delivery and Storage
The delivery and storage items include:

a. Deliver and store products in waterproof, protective containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time to use.
b. Keep products dry, stack products off ground on level platforms, fully protected
from weather, including direct sunlight?
c. Identify type, size and location of each door ventilator before delivery in order to
permit installation at correct location.
d. All materials and assembled units are to be protected from weather and stored in
such a way as to prevent decay and attack by fungus and termites.
5.6 Products
5.6.1 Timber
5.6.1.1 General Characteristics

The timber shall be in accordance with the requirements of" BS: 1186 'Quality of Timber
and Workmanship in Joinery', Part 1,' Quality of Timber'. .
First quality timber shall be from the heart of a sound tree, the sap wood being entirely
removed, the wood being uniform in substance, straight in fiber, free from large or dead
knots, flaws, shakes or blemishes of any kind. The colour of good timber shall be uniform
throughout and among coloured timbers darkness of colour is an apparent indication of
strength' and durability.
For first quality deodar wood, the size of the knot shall not be more than 25 mm and there
shall not be more than one knot in every 0.4 Sq. meter of timber.
5.6.1.2 Seasoning of Timber

Timber shall be properly seasoned. It shall be kin or air dried to reduce the moisture content
to a maximum of 15% of its natural weight.
5.6.1.3 Hard and Soft Wood

Door trances, glazed, semi glazed and paneled shutters and core of flush doors shall be
made in soft wood unless otherwise specified.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 54
______________________________________________________________________________
Softwood .consists of deodar, chili, partal and maranti. Unless otherwise specified or
allowed by the Project Manager only deodar wood shall be used for softwood. Hardwood
consists of Shisham, Teak, Iroko, Walnut, Mahogany, beach or oak whichever specified.
5.6.1.4 Preservation of Wood

Prior to installation of finish wood works in their respective positions, preservatives shall
be applied to safeguard the wood work against fungus, termite and borers.
The preservatives shall be of the best available quality as approved by the Project Manager.
The method of application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
5.6.1.5 Plywood and Veneer
5.6.1.6 General
BS: 565 Section 5, 'Glossary of Terms Applicable to Plywood', defines plywood as 'an
assembled product made up of plies and adhesives, the chief characteristic being the
crossed plies which distribute the longitudinal wood strength. The term ply wood in
general sense includes similar products such as laminated board, block board and batten
board. BS: 1455 shall be used for acceptable standards of plywood.
5.6.1.7 Three Ply and Multi-Ply Wood

Three ply construction includes a 'face' a 'back' and a core of inner ply. Multi-ply includes
a face, a back and a core of three or more inner plies. With very few exceptions the grain
of each veneer in the core runs at- right angles to that of the veneers on either side of it.
The construction of plywood may be balanced with an odd number of Veneers arranged
symmetrically or unbalanced. The tendency of the finished board to distort is reduced by
adopting a balanced construction.
The construction may vary for a given panel thickness by the inclusion of veneers of
various thickness. This will affect the strength properties.
5.6.1.8 Interior and Resin Bonded

Plywood according to BS: 1455 is classified into two main types, viz interior and resin
bonded.
Interior type plywood is suitable for most interior work including flush doors, door
panels, and any location where resistance to moisture is not required. Adhesive used
include casein, soya, blood albumen and animal glues as well as synthetic resin extended
with other substances.
Synthetic resin bonded plywood while being suitable for the same purpose as interior
type, has a much greater resistance to moisture. The more resistant types are suitable for
external flush doors and door panels,
Shop front facias, and for any purpose where it may be exposed to moisture. Adhesives
used include urea, melaminephenol and resorcinol formaldehyde (arranged in order of
increasing moisture resistance).
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 55
______________________________________________________________________________
5.6.1.9 Veneer
Grade I Veneer shall be of one piece of firm smoothly cut veneer. The veneers shall be
free from knots, worm and beetle holes, splits, dots, glue-stains, filling or inlaying of any
kind or other defects. No end joints are permissible.
Grade II Veneer shall present a solid surface free from open defects. Veneer may be in
one or two pieces. Pieces of Veneers when jointed need not necessarily be matched for
colour or be of equal width. A few sound knots are permitted with occasional minor
discoloration and slight glue stains, isolated pin holes not along the plane of the veneer.
The uses, for which plywood made with the grades defined above are considered useful,
are outlined hereunder:
Grade I for Use in its natural state.
Grade II for use where subsequent painting and /or veneering is intended.
5.6.1.10 Laminated Board

This is built-up board, with narrow strip 3 to 7 mm wide, faced both sides with either one
or two veneers from 1.2 mm to 3.7 mm thick. Where single or double face veneers are
used, the grain usually runs at right angles to the grain of the core strip. This type of board
when available varies between 13 mm to 25 mm in thickness and is an ideal base for the
highest class of veneered wood. For detailed specifications BS; 3444 'Block Board and
Laminated Board' shall be used.
5.6.1.11 Block Board

This board conforming to BS 3444 is of similar construction to laminated board but core
is built-up of blocks upto 25 mm wide. It is used as a base for veneering and for painted
work but is considered slightly inferior to laminated board for the former use. The range
of size and thicknesses in which it is manufactured are similar to those of laminated
board.
5.6.1.12 Adhesives
For joiners work animal glues complying with BS: 745, 'Animal Glues for Wood' or
synthetic resin adhesive complying with BS: 1204, ' Cold Setting Synthetic Resin
Adhesives for Construction Work in Wood' shall be used. For flush doors and other forms
of construction that rely mainly upon the adhesive, and particularly where exposure
conditions are severe and prolonged dampness is likely to occur, one of the more moisture
resistant adhesives shall be employed, the choice depending upon the severity of the
conditions to which the work will be exposed.
5.6.2 Hardware
5.6.2.1 Nails and Screws

For joiners work, wire nails oval, chequered head, lost head round or panel-pins
complying with BS: 1202, ' Wire Nails and Cut Nails for Building Purposes' or wood
screws in accordance with BS: 1210 shall be used. The gauge of nail or screw used shall
be suited to the woods being fixed and to which a fixing is being made, and the length
shall be such as will give a sufficiently strong and secure fixing. CP: 112. The Structural
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 56
______________________________________________________________________________
Use of Timber in Buildings' shall be followed which gives relationship between gauge,
amount of penetration and strength. All nails and screws used with reactive timber
(becoming stained and dis-figured by reaction with ferrous metals) shall be of non-ferrous
metals or shall be protected in some manner before use if the wood work is likely to be
subjected to moist conditions, e.g. external doors.
5.6.2.2 Holdfast
 Crank shaped holdfast of size 200 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm made of steel plate. One
end to be fixed with 100 mm x 10 mm long screws.
 Crank shaped holdfast of size 300 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm made of steel. One end to
be fixed with 100 mm x 10 mm long screws.
5.6.2.3 Hinge
 Oxidized brass built hinge of size 100 x 50 mm weighing 0.14 Kg with the standard
size of brass pins fixed with brass screws of required size.
 Double-action Oxidized brass, spring-butt-hinge of size 100 x 50 mm weight 0.28
Kg each with standard size pins and spring fixed with brass screws of required
size'.
 Extra heavy steel-butt-hinge of size 130 mm x 80 mm weighing 0.45 Kg with
standard size of pins fixed with appropriate size of steel screws.
5.6.2.4 Tower Bolt

 Oxidized brass, 150 mm long, weighing 0.14 Kg each fixed by means of
appropriate size of brass screws;
 Sled, 150 mm long, weight 0.29 Kg each fixed by means of appropriate size of
steel screws;
5.6.2.5 Handle
Oxidized brass or aluminum alloy, 100 mm long fixed with the screws of the material.
5.6.2.6 Stopper
Foot-operated friction door stopper of best quality available locally and is approved the
Project Manager.
5.6.2.7 Lock
Automatic dead locking mortise lock with two beveled latches and handles and
COLOMBO DESIGN locks and knobs complete or equivalent available locally and as
approved by the Project Manager.
5.6.2.8 Hydraulic Door Closer

Single-action type, face fixing, best quality available and as approved by the Project
Manager.
The size and weights of all the above materials are approximate.
Hardware shall be carefully and securely fitted. Upon handing over the work hardware
shall be demonstrated to operate freely. Keys shall be placed into respective locks an
upon acceptance of the work. keys shall be tagged and delivered to the Project Manager
in duplicate.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 57
______________________________________________________________________________
5.6.3 Execution
5.6.3.1 Fabrication
All "Wrought" timber is to be sawn, planed, drilled or otherwise machined or worked to
the correct sizes and shapes required.
The joiner shall perform all necessary mortising, tennoning, grooving, matching,
tonguing, rebating and all other works necessary for correct jointing. He shall also
provide all metal plates, screws, nails and other fixings that may be necessary for the
proper execution of the joinery works specified. The joiner shall also carry out all works
necessary for the proper construction of all framings, linings, holdfasts and other
contrivances as per architectural details and/or instructions of the Project Manager for
their adequate support and fixing in the building.
Loose joints are to be made where provision is required to be made for shrinkage or other
movements acting in the direction other than that of the stresses because of loading.
Glued joints are to be used where provision need not be made for shrinkage or other
movements in the connection, and where sealed joints are required. All glued joints shall
be cross-longed or otherwise reinforced. All nails, springs etc. shall he punched and
puttied. All cutting edges of tools shall be sharp to avoid burnishing.
All wood work, as fat- as practicable, shall be assembled in shop, finished and prime
coated before delivery for fixing. In addition to machine sanding, all woodwork shall be
smoothed by hand using "00" sand paper to have the required smooth surface, free from
machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grains and other defects. All wood work shall
be fitted to plaster and other finished work in a careful manner so as not to injure these
surfaces. Where plaster or other work is damaged or disturbed, it shall be restored to its
original state by the Contractor at no additional cost.
All wood work shall be neatly finished to the exact dimensions specified. All nails and
screws shall be of approved type. Hammer shall not be used for driving in or starting in
the screws. All screws shall be dipped in oil before they are inserted in the wood. The
heads of nails or screws shall be sunk and puttied or dealt with as directed by the Project
Manager.
5.6.3.2 Priming
Where priming is specified, the timber shall be coated with a thick mixture of red or white
lead and linseed oil. The Contractor shall provide for priming and touching up primer
where necessary during the progress of work.
5.6.3.3 Door frames

The door frames shall be secured in place by means of corrugated anchors of non-ferrous
metal or galvanized ferrous metal bent up against the back of the jambs and screwed in
place and built into the masonry as it is being constructed. There shall be one such anchor
near the top and bottom of each jamb at not over 900 mm intervals between the top and
bottom anchors. Frames shall be secured to the anchors by means of 9 mm diameter bolts
or screws extending through the frames, beads of bolts or screws shall be countersunk
and covered with the stops, which shall be screwed in place.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 58
______________________________________________________________________________
5.6.3.4 Door Jamb & Door Shutters

1. Door Jamb in GI sheets of 146swg
2. Door shutters:
a) Solid wood – too expensive
b) Flush doors made of plywood and veneer.
5.6.3.5 Flush Door

Providing and fixing 1-½" thick wooden flush doors with solid core with approved HDF
MOULDED facing skin on both sides of the shutter, with matching hot Pressed PVC
lipping on all sides of the door shutters, including 5" x 2" G.I (16 gauge) door frame,
Complete in all respects.
Standard Sizes: 3' 6" x 7' 0"
3' 0" x 7' 0"
2' 6" x 7' 0"
5.6.3.6 Fitting Door Shutters

All the doors shall be fitted, hung and trimmed as hereinafter specified and as indicated
on the Drawings.
Doors shall have a clearance, of 4 mm at sides and top unless otherwise directed by the
Project Manager and shall have 20 mm clearance at bottom. All the doors having a
thickness of 44 mm or more shall have the lock or latch edge beveled at the rate of 3.0
mm in 50 mm. Doors shall be hung and trimmed with hardware as specified. All the locks
shall be installed at the same height. Knob locks and knob latches shall be located at
height as directed by the Project Manager. Door locks shall have the center of the locks
at the same height as the center of the knob locks.
5.6.4 Measurement and Payment
5.6.3.7 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contact documents, no
measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified work related
to the relevant items of the bill of quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have
been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.
The Bill of Quantities to include:
a. All finished hardware fittings in carpentry and joinery works.
b. Glass and glazing including other materials and accessories required for
installation and finishing.
c. Prime coat, painting and wax polish in carpentry and jointry works.
d. Ant termite treatment to wood works.
e. Adhesives.
f. M.S. steel plate, non-shrink grout, teak wood plank, rough wood, sleeve, lead
caulking polishing and painting and as shown on drawings.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 59
______________________________________________________________________________
5.6.3.8 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed quantity of all types of polished wood works will
be made on the basis of net actual area in sq.ft. meter, fabricated and installed in position
as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
5.6.3.9 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptably measured quantity of all types of wood works on
the basis of unit rate per sq.ft. meter quoted in the bill of quantities and shall constitute
full compensation for all the work related to the item.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 60
SECTION 6 – TERRAZZO WORK
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6 - TERRAZZO WORK

6.1 Scope of Work
The work covered by this section of the specifications, consist of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations complete in
strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable drawings and
subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work under the section includes the
followings:-
a) Precast terrazzo tiles flooring

b) In situ terrazzo flooring
c) Terrazzo Dado and Skirting
d) Terrazzo on stairs
e) Terrazzo finished precast partitions for Toilets
6.2 Applicable Standard
Unless otherwise specified, terrazzo work shall be in conformity with British Standard
Code of Practice C.P. 204 In Situ Flooring Part 1, 'General' and Part 3. "Terrazzo Flooring"
as applicable to the work shown on the drawings and specified in the Bill of Quantities.
6.3 Materials
6.3.1 Cement. Sand, Aggregate and Water for Concrete
Cement. Sand, Aggregate and Water for Concrete shall conform SECTION 3 Specification
for "Plain and Reinforced Concrete".
6.3.2 Marble Chips
Marble Chips shall be crushed marble and shall be best quality white or coloured sound
and hard local marble chips approved by the Project Manager and of the as mentioned in
the Bill of Quantities or as required by the Project Manager.
6.3.3 Dividing Strips
Dividing strips shall be glass, brass or marble strips 4-5 mm thick and 1-1/2" wide or as
specified in the Bill of Quantities.
6.3.4 Angle Clips
Angle clips for precast toilet partitions shall be chromium plated steel or stainless steel clips
as shown on drawings.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 61
______________________________________________________________________________
6.3.5 Bolts of precast toilet partitions
Bolts for precast toilet partitions shall be 5/16" inch bars bolts chrome-plated, with acron
heads, fitted to wall anchors.
6.3.6 Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be first grade, mechanically compressed type conforming to PS-531.
Tiles shall be 12"x12"x0.88" / 30.0x30.0x2.2cm with a toping of 0.4" or 10.00mm thickness
composed of 1:2 cement & marble chips. The base being 1:3 cement mortar. The colour,
quality and size of chips shall be as per Project Manager's approval.
6.3.7 Cleaning Compound
The Compound used for all cleaning of terrazzo shall be an approved neutral chemical
cleaner free from acid and alkali or any other material that will affect the colour or
otherwise damage the Terrazzo and shall not affect the conductivity of terrazzo floors.
6.4 Samples
All materials used for Terrazzo and marble work as well as samples of terrazzo floor and
marble work shall be submitted to the Project Manager and his approval obtained. Same
materials should also be tested and this shall be got done by the Contractor at his own
expense from a Laboratory approved by the Project Manager.
6.5 Execution
6.5.1 In Situ Terrazzo Flooring
The floor shall consist of a wearing surface to consistency and net thickness as specified in
Bill of Quantities, laid over 1:2:4 under bedding concrete of the specified thickness. The
net uniform thickness specified for wearing surface shall be that obtained after grinding
and polishing. The 1:2:4 concrete shall be mixed and laid in the manner specified for
cement concrete floor using a minimum quantity of water.
The concrete shall be leveled with a trowel and straight edge consolidated and finished with
steel trowels to an even but rough surfaces. The top layer of cement and marble chips mixed
in the proportion of 1:2 (1 cement and 2 marble chips) shall be laid over it within 12 hours.
The cement and marble chips must be mixed dry in such quantities that are sufficient for a
unit area of one specified shade. Water shall be added to only such quantities that can be
mixed thoroughly and consumed in less than 30 minutes, the quantity of water being the
minimum for workability.
Mixing must to be done on water tight platform and any mix not used within 30 minutes
shall be discarded and removed from the Site. A layer of cement and marble chipping
mixture should be well troweled into the surface of the base concrete before filling to the
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 62
______________________________________________________________________________
top level of the screeds. The layer should be well compacted and all voids shall be filled in.
A layer of neat cement, of the specified colour shall then be well-troweled into a plain
smooth surface. Floors shall be laid in panels of sizes as shown on drawings and in Bill of
Quantities or as directed by the Project Manager. Dividing strips, as specified shall be
provided and fixed to exact levels making an allowance for grinding.
Three days after laying, the top layer must be evenly and smoothly machine ground with
Carborundum blocks of coarse, medium and fine grades so as to ensure that all marble
chipping are evenly exposed all over the surface.
If marble chips are not evenly exposed the Contractor shall pull down the sin face and relay
it at his own cost. The surface after grinding shall be left undisturbed and cured for 2 to 3
weeks after which it shall be cleaned of dirt and dust gently by rubbing with pumice stone
or washing soda in sufficient water. Three days after the surface has been cleaned, it shall
be rubbed hard with 1:10 solution of oxalic acid using fell. The surface shall then be cleaned
and washed with plenty of water. After the surface has dried a final gloss shall be given by
polishing surface to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
6.5.2 Terrazzo Dado & Skirting
Marble chips and cement shall conform to specifications for floor. Mixing shall be done in
the same manner and proportion. The plastered surface over which the dado/skirting is to
be applied shall be well roughened and watered, cement mortal of specified ratio shall then
be plastered over this well roughened surface to indicated thickness. Before the base course
had set, the layer of terrazzo mixture of the specifications for flooring shall be well troweled
into the surface of the base to a thickness which after, grinding shall result in the finished
thickness as per Bill of Quantities. A layer of neat cement of the specified colour shall then
he well troweled into the surface leaving a plain smooth surface. After 24 hours the
Contractor shall start finishing as for floors specified above, Terrazzo skirting shall be
provided around all terrazzo floors unless otherwise shown. Skirting and dado shall be
straight, level and in plumb. Intersections at floors shall be straight and flush. They shall
be with 1/4 radius coved at floor unless otherwise shown.
6.5.3 Terrazzo on Stairs
The stair risers and treads shall be finished according to exact sizes including the terrazzo
making allowance for grinding of terrazzo.
6.5.4 Terrazzo Finished Precast Partitions of Urinals
Partitions walls of urinals shall be precast R.C.C. slabs finished will) l/'l" thick polished
terrazzo on both faces. The finished thickness of these walls shall be 3" or as shown on
drawings and BOQ R.C.C. slab shall conform to the specification for "Concrete" and
terrazzo as per this section. Fixing of these partitions of floor walls etc. shall be as directed
by the Project Manager and as shown on Drawings.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 63
______________________________________________________________________________
6.5.5 Terrazzo Tile Works
The terrazzo tiles will be laid to the required levels and grades over a bedding of cement
mortar comprising of 1 part of cement and 3 parts of sand by volume. I thickness of cement
sand bedding screed shall be as per Bill of Quantities.
The curing period of the bedding shall be as directed by the Project Manager. As large an
area of bedding shall be spread at one time as can be covered with tiles before the mortar
has set. Surplus mortar shall be removed. The thickness of bedding in any space shall not
be less than 1/2" / 12.5mm.
Floor and wall surfaces to receive the tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, oil
and other objectionable matters. Tiles shall be laid out from the Centre line of each space
in an outward direction and the pattern should be made symmetrical with a minimum
number of cut tiles. Joints between the tiles shall be of uniform width. Tiles shall be cut
with a suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be pumice stone. Tiles shall be laid to the
straight edges.
After seven days the terrazzo tile floors shall be machine ground to a true even surface
using various grades of abrasive stones as required and directed by the Project Manager.
After the first grinding the floor shall be grouted with the same colour composition as used
for its manufacture. The grout shall be of the consistency of thick cream and shall be
brushed over the floor to fill in the joints and after 72 hours the grouting coat shall be
removed by grinding till a smooth and even surface is obtained. Area and portion of the
floor inaccessible for the grinding machine shall be ground and rubbed by hand. The final
gloss shall be given by polishing the surface to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The tiled floor shall be kept wet for at least 72 hours and no one should be allowed to walk
on the tiles during that period.
6.6 Measurements and Payments
6.6.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the contract Documents, no measurement

and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified works related to the relevant
items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in
the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.
i. Grinding, washing polishing and finishing of Terrazzo work.

ii. Under bedding and screening.
iii. Preparation of concrete surface for Terrazzo works.
iv. Cement concrete base.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 64
______________________________________________________________________________
6.6.2 Measurement
Measurement of acceptable completed works of Terrazzo Flooring, Dado, Skirting. Treads,

Risers etc., will be made on the basis of number of sq. ft. / square meter provided & installed
in position as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Project Manager.
6.6.3 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantify of Terrazzo Work on the basis of
unit rates per.sq.ft / square meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities & shall constitute full
compensation for all the works related to the items.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 65
SECTION 7 – CERAMIC TILES
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 7 - CERAMIC TILES
7.1 General - Ceramic Tile Finishes
7.1.1 Floor Finishes
a. Unglazed ceramic floor tiles.

b. Rectified ceramic tiles.
c. Porcelain tiles:
d. Porcelain fittings for staircases.
e. Quarry tiles.
7.1.2 Wall Finishes
a. Ceramic tiles for walls.

b. Porcelain tiles for walls:
c. Tile fittings.
d. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
7.2 Coordination
1. Do not install ceramic tile finishes until predecessor construction activities in spaces
are completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained
to comply with referenced Standard Specifications and manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. The works of ceramic tile finishes have to be coordinated with the works cement sand
screeds specified under section and with mechanical and electrical works.
3. Refer to the Schedules at the end of Part 3 of this Section for setting main details.
7.3 Submittals
7.3.1 General
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the submittals listed here
after in this Article in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and
Section “Submittal Procedures”.
7.3.2 Action Submittals

1. Qualification Data
For manufacturers of tiles, adhesives and grouts.
2. Product Data:
For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
a. Include in product data submittal reports of test conducted by third party testing
agency to demonstrate compliance of submitted product with specified
requirements. Test reports shall not be dated more than one year old.
3. Shop Drawings: For the following:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 66
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Tile patterns and locations.

b. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
c. Details of interface with adjoining floors.
d. .For wall tiles installed to Tile backing gypsum board panels or cement boards,
included calculations to proof that over-turning of tile and substrate will not
occur.
4. Tile Samples for Initial Selection
Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing
the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and
composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color
selection.
5. Grout Samples for Initial Selection
Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full
range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
6. Samples for Verification:
7. Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated.
Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
a. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at
least 300 mm square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with
grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and
approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Engineer.
b. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
c. Stone thresholds in 150-mm lengths.
8. Master Grade Certificates:
For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and
Installer.
7.3.3 Informational Submittals

1. Product Certificates
Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with
requirements.
2. Installer Experience
List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out successfully by the
installer with the same product.
3. Qualification Data:
For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 67
______________________________________________________________________________
names and addresses, names of engineers and employers, and other any
information required by Engineer.
4. Setting Material Test Reports
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile setting and -grouting
products with specified requirements.
5. Cleaning and maintenance data
Cleaning and maintenance data for inclusion in Project’s Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
1. Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants
Submit material datasheet and other documents.
2. Regional Materials
Submit material datasheet and other documents.
7.4 Quality Assurance

A. Regularity Requirements
The works under this Section shall comply with requirements as applicable to this
Project, unless otherwise more stringent requirements are specified throughout this
Section.
B. Quality System
Provide the products of a manufacturer holding valid ISO 9001 certification.
C. Compliance Standards
The work of suspended gypsum board ceilings shall comply with the requirements
of the Standard Specifications referenced in this Section.
D. Product Tests
Test reports obtained from manufacturer for tests run by a qualified independent
testing agency, or third-party-witnessed in-house testing with calibrated test
equipment’s to demonstrate compliance of submitted ceramic tiles with
dimensional and mechanical properties specified in this Sections. Section should
have been conducted within maximum one year before date of submission,
otherwise contractor will be requested to conduct pre-construction testing to proof
the same at no extra cost. Tests should also have been run on samples obtained
from the production of the factory or production unit producing ceramic tiles
submitted for this project.
E. Installer Qualifications
Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 68
______________________________________________________________________________
An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer and qualified according to

ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
G. Source Limitations for Tile
Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one
source with resources to provide products from same production run for each
contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
H. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials
Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout
component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or
producer.
I. Pre-installation Meeting
Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements of "Project Meetings.
Coordinate the work of ceramic tile with the work of other trades.
7.5 Mockups
Before installing ceramic tile, construct mockups, in accordance with requirements of
“Quality Requirements”. to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Build mockups for each form of ceramic tile construction and finish required.
2. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of erecting subsequent
work items may become part of the completed Work.
7.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of referenced Standard
Specifications for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials with water, foreign matter and soil,
and other causes.
C. Compliance Standards
The work of suspended gypsum board ceilings shall comply with the requirements
of the Standard Specifications referenced in this Section.
D. Product Tests
Test reports obtained from manufacturer for tests run by a qualified independent
testing agency, or third-party-witnessed in-house testing with calibrated test
equipment to demonstrate compliance of submitted ceramic tiles with dimensional
and mechanical properties specified in this Sections. Section should have been
conducted within maximum one year before date of submission, otherwise
contractor will be requested to conduct pre-construction testing to proof the same
at no extra cost. Tests should also have been run on samples obtained from the
production of the factory or production unit producing ceramic tiles submitted for
this project.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 69
______________________________________________________________________________
E. Installer Qualifications
Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications
An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer and qualified according to
ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
G. Source Limitations for Tile
Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one
source with resources to provide products from same production run for each
contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
H. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials
Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout
component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or
producer.
I. Pre-installation Meeting
Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements of Section "Project
Meetings. Coordinate the work of ceramic tile with the work of other trades.
7.7 Products
7.7.1 Products General

A. Ceramic Tile Standard
Provide tile that complies with the following standard specification:
1. EN ISO 13006.
2. Provide highest quality grade (First or Master) in manufacturer’s range.
7.7.2 Manufacturers
A. Proposed Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with Specifications and other Contract Documents, the
following manufacturers are proposed for consideration of Contractor as offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Ceramic Tiles Manufacturers:
a. Equal and approved unnamed manufacturer.
2. Ceramic Tiles Suppliers:
a. Unnamed Supplier who provides equal and approved product.
3. Setting and Grouting Materials Manufacturers:
a. Equal and approved unnamed manufacturer.
B. Standards for Tile Installation Materials:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 70
______________________________________________________________________________
Provide materials complying with ANSI Standards referenced in "Setting

Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns

Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other
products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with
the following requirements:
1. Submit samples selected based on Material Selection Sheets.
2. Provide materials that match the samples that have been approved by
Engineer.
3. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining
flat tile and approved by Engineer.
D. Factory Blending
For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples.
E. Mounting
Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is
indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or
edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in
writing that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of
installations and has a record of successful in-service performance.
7.7.3 Floor Tiling

A. Fully Vitrified Stoneware (Porcelain) Floors Tiles
Extremely compact-body impervious paver tiles, homogenous throughout the
thickness fabricated in the dust-pressed method from clay mixed with Kaolin,
quartz and feldspar or other porcelain mix and vitrified with lowest porosity
through cycles of high-temperature firing in roller kilns. Stoneware tiles are to be
manufactured to EN ISO 13006 Group B1a (E ≤ 0.04%) tiles and meet the
requirements specified here after. Use of tiles to any other ISO-13006 Grade is not
acceptable:
1. Characteristics
a. Dimension: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule.
b. Nominal Thickness: Minimum 10 mm excluding keying ribs.
c. Surface Condition: Plain with matt finish for floors.
d. Color and Pattern: Match basis of design product.
e. Back Condition: Raised pattern for keying.
f. Edge Condition: Square.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 71
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Performance Properties:
a. Bending Resistance: 27 N/mm2 to ISO 10545.4.
b. Abrasion Resistance: 205 mm3 to ISO 10545.6.
c. Surface Hardness Mohs Resistance: 6.
d. Resistance against Chemical Agents: Unaffected to ISO 10545.13.
e. Liner Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 9 MK-1 to ISO 10545.9.
f. Stain Resistance: Resistant to ISO 10545.14.
g. Skid Resistance: 0.60 Wet Rubber or Dry Leather, B.C.R. test
method, matt tiles.
h. Color Stability: No change in brightness or color to DIN 51094.
3. Dimensional Tolerances
Tiles shall be tested to UNI EN ISO and meet requirements of EN ISO
13006.
B. Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles
Are to be manufactured to EN ISO 13006 group B1b (0.5% E≤ 3%) tiles and meet
the following requirements:
1. Characteristics:
a. Manufacture: Dust pressed, burning to verification.
b. Composition: White ware, ceramic mix.
c. Size: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule.
d. Nominal Thickness: Minimum 8.00 mm excluding keying ribs.
e. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
f. Color and Pattern: Match basis of design product.
g. Back Condition: Raised pattern for keying.
h. Edge Condition: Square.
c. Surface Hardness: 6.
d. Resistance against Chemical Agents: Unaffected to ISO 10545.13.
e. Liner Thermal Expansio -1 to ISO 10545.9
f. Stain Resistance: Resistant to ISO 10545.14.
g. Skid Resistance: 0.60 Wet Rubber or Dry Leather, B.C.R. test
method, matt tiles.
h. Color Stability: No change in brightness or color. to DIN 51094.
Tiles shall be tested to UNI EN ISO and meet requirements of EN ISO
13006.
C. Rectified Ceramic Floor Tiles
Locally produced extra thick ceramic floor tiles complying with EN ISO 13006
Group B1b (0.5% < E ≤ 5%). Tiles shall be of pebble pattern on top surface with
abrasive content.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 72
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Impact resistance to BS EN 10545, highest grade.

2. Skid Resistance: 0.60 Wet Rubber or Dry Leather, B.C.R. test method,
matt tiles.
3. Pattern: Pebble pattern.
4. Metal Oxide: For coloring.
5. Thickness: 13 mm, minimum.
6. Size: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule or selected by
Engineer.
D. Porcelain Fittings for Staircases

Fittings for stair and step finishes are to be ready-to-set fittings inclusive of formed
nosing and linear grooves designed to increase slip resistance. Surface finish is to
be chemically treated matt surface for slip resistance
1. Characteristics
a. Thickness: Not less than 10 mm.
b. Surfaces Features: Acid-resistant, antibacterial, non-slip and wear
resistant.
c. Edges: Square.
d. Style: Rustic Tiles.
e. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of
colors.
2. Physical Properties
a. Water Absorption: Maximum 0.5 % according to EN ISO
10545.3.
b. Breaking Strength: Not less than 1300 N according to EN ISO
10545.4.
c. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 35 Mpa according to EN ISO
10545.4.
d.
according to EN ISO 10545.6.
e. Thermal Shock Resistance: Fully resistant according to EN ISO
10545.9.
f. Resistance against Chemical Agents: Unaffected according to En
ISO 10545.13
g. Slip Resistance: According to DIN 51130.
3. Fittings Components
a. Step Tile: Matt Surface with Grooves, and of dimension as
selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s ranges.
b. Size of Face Plate: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s
ranges.
4. Size of Tradition Tile for Landings
As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s range.
E. Quarry Tiles and Fittings:
Shall be heavy duty tiles, and fittings of color through body (homogenous
throughout the thickness) fabricated in extrusion process, and burnt to above-red
heat, from natural clay blend or shale with inclusion of abrasive aggregated of
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 73
______________________________________________________________________________
silicone carbide, aluminum oxide or other rustproof abrasive of comparable

hardness in the wearing surface.
Quarry tiles are to be manufactured to ANSI A 137.1 and meet the following
requirements.
1. Characteristics:
a. Size: As shown on Drawings.
b. Nominal Thickness: 16.00 mm, minimum for tiles and 12.50 mm
for trim units, minimum.
c. Edge Condition: Square.
d. Surface Condition: Plain and unglazed.
e. Back Condition: Of raised or depressed pattern.
f. Color: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard
range.
2. Finishing
Provide straight or covered bases as indicated on finish schedule for each
type.
3. Performances
a. Water Absorption: Not exceeding 5% to ASTM C 373.
b. Breaking Strength: 250 pounds average to ASTM C 648.
c. Abrasive Hardness: Index of 35 or greater to ASTM C 501.
d. Bond Strength: Greater than 3.5 kg/cm2 ASTM C 482.
7.7.4 Wall Tiles
7.7.4.1 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles

Are to be manufactured to EN ISO 13006 group B 2a (3% < E ≤ 6%) tiles and meet the
following requirements:
1. Characteristics:
a. Manufacture: Dust pressed, burning to verification.
b. Composition: White ware, ceramic mix.
c. Size: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule.
d. Nominal Thickness: Minimum 6.00 mm excluding keying ribs.
e. Surface Finish: Glazed.
f. Color and Pattern: Match basis of design product.
g. Back Condition: Raised pattern for keying.
h. Edge Condition: Square or cushioned, to match design product.
c. Surface Hardness: 6.
d. Liner Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 9 MK-1 ISO 10545.9
e. Stain Resistance: Resistant to ISO 10545.14
f. Color Stability: No change in brightness or color to DIN 51094
Tiles shall be tested to UNI EN ISO and meet requirements of EN ISO 13006.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 74
______________________________________________________________________________
7.7.4.2 Glass Mosaics

A. Glass Mosaics:
Are to comply with the following requirements:
1. Classification: Crystal glass.
2. Pattern: Square tiles, opaque solid color.
3. Thickness: 3 mm, minimum.
4. Surface Texture: Smooth and flat.
5. Edges: Sharp not cushioned.
7.7.4.3 Tile Fittings

A. General
Same material and method of manufacture as for adjoining tiles.
B. Grade
Highest in manufacturer’s range.
C. Types
As indicated on Drawings
1. Cove base.
2. Internal and external corner fittings.
3. Other types as indicated on Drawings.
7.7.4.4 Stone Thresholds

A. General
Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes
and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining
finished floor surfaces.
B. Fabricate thresholds to thickness indicated, but not more than 12.7 mm above
adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no
greater than 1:2.
C. Marble Thresholds
Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements and with a
minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241. Match Engineer's
approved sample for color and finish.
D. Granite Thresholds
Provide granite thresholds complying with ASTM C 615 requirements.
E. Match Engineer's approved sample for color and finish.
7.7.4.5 Setting and Grouting Materials

A. Prepackaged Setting Mortar
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 75
______________________________________________________________________________
Proprietary factory-prepared blend of carefully selected raw materials, Portland cement and
graded aggregates which is manufactured for use with latex mortar admixture to produce a
latex Portland cement mortar of the following properties:
1. Service Rating to ASTM C 627: Extra heavy.
2. Water Absorption: Not more than 5 % when tested to test method referred to in ANSI A
118.4-6.1.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 34.00 MPa at 28 days when tested to ANSI A118.4-
6.1.
4. Pot life: Not less than 1.00 hour.
5. Time to foot Traffic: Not more than 12 hours.
6. Time to Heavy Traffic: Not more than 72 hours
B. Latex-Portland Cement Adhesive (Thin Set Mortar)
ANSI A118.4 of the following compositions:
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, re dispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate
additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
a. For wall applications, provide non sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph
F-
4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
3. Use for floor installation, unless other material is specified.
a. Use product of waterproofing properties. Water absorption value shall not
exceed the water absorption value of tiles set with the thin set adhesive.
C. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Epoxy Tile Grout
ANSI A118.3 and requirements specified hereunder, with a VOC content of 65 g/L
or less.
1. General Performance Properties:
a. Needs no sealing.
b. Recommended for exterior applications for case of joints subject
to direct sun rays where used in swimming pools and other
outdoors applications.
c. Resistant to Bacteria attack.
d. Inclusive of antimicrobial protection to block growth of mold and
mildew when used with the antimicrobial protection product.
e. High chemical resistance.
2. Physical Properties:
a. Water Absorption to ASTM C-413: 0.19%, maximum.
b. Water Cleanability: Pass 80 minutes.
c. Initial Setting Time: Pass > 2.00 hours.
d. Tensile Strength ASTM C-307: 20 MPa, minimum.
e. Compressive Strength ASTM C-579: 57 MPa, minimum.
f. Modulus of Rupture ASTM C-580: 37 MPa, minimum.
g. Linear Shrinkage ASTM C-531: 0.07%, maximum.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 76
______________________________________________________________________________
h. Sagging Test: Pass with no change; test method E5.4 to ANSI

118.3.
i. Flexural Strength ASTM C-580: 26 MPa, minimum.
j. Service Temperature: 80°C Continuous and 182°C Intermittent,
minimum.
k. Quarry Shear Bonds: 15 MPa, minimum.
l. Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM C-321: 1.00 MPa, minimum.
m. Chemical Resistant: Recommended for Intermittent exposure (3
days) to corrosive cleaners when tested to ASTM C-267.
n. Use for tile installations (Floors) under this Section.
D. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, and Epoxy Tile Adhesive
Epoxy adhesive designed for the installation of large format ceramic tiles,
porcelain tiles, and stone on sound concrete, masonry and Portland cement plaster
clean surfaces. The product shall be recommended for commercial and installations
of porcelain tiles of sizes indicated on Drawings and which may be subject to
physical abuse, shock, and mild chemicals in Interior and Exterior applications.
Product proprietary tile adhesive product complying with requirements of ANSI
A118.3 and the following Requirements.
1. Performances:
a. Fast permanent bond.
b. Water cleanable.
c. High-bond strength.
d. Non-sag consistency.
e. Low modulus consistency.
f. Solvent free.
g. Can be used in spot application.
2. Mild Chemical Resistance Performance Properties:
a. Water Absorption, ANSI A118.3-1999: 0.1%, maximum.
b. Shear Bond Strength Marble/Concrete ANSI A118.3-1999: 5.8 Mpa,
minimum.
c. Compressive Strength ANSI A118.3-1999: 57.8 MPa, minimum.
d. Modulus of Elasticity ASTM-D 695: 2 x 103.
e. Tensile Strength ASTM-D 638: 25.3 MPa.
f. Elongation ASTM D 638: 1%.
1) Use for tile installations (floors and walls) under this Section.
2) Provide non-staining white formulation.
E. Polymer Modified Cement Grout
ANSI A 118.7.
1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form
for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
2. Unsanded grout mix for joints (3 mm) and narrower.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 77
______________________________________________________________________________
7.7.4.6 Elastomeric Sealants

B. General
Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of
Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Colors
Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
7.7.4.7 Miscellaneous Materials

A. Sand Beds
B. Clean natural sand free from foreign matters and boulders or stones in any size,
graded as fine to medium coarse sand to a Standard Specifications approved by
Engineer, placed loosely, distributed and hand compacted in uniform thickness to
obtain finish floor level of tile floors indicated on Drawings.
C. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds
Latex-modified, Portland-cement based formulation provided or approved by
manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. Comply with
requirements in Section "Hydraulic Cement-Based Underlayment".
D. Tile Cleaner
A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by
tile and grout manufacturers.
7.7.4.8 Metal Accessories

A. Dividing Strips
Shall be alloy 316 stainless steel with polished finish. Depth of divider is to give
secure anchorage into mortar bedding and to finish to exact level of floor.
1. Thickness: 6.00 mm.
B. Metal Beads
Proprietary metal fittings, high quality produced for use in decorative applications,
extruded aluminum alloy and temper 6063T5 and scratch-resistant colored
polyester powder coating. Install one integral piece for each application.
1. Use for external corners and other locations where ceramic fittings are not
indicated on Drawings or directed by Engineer.
2. Size as approved by Engineer.
C. Divider Strips and Edging
Metal or combination of metal and neoprene base, designed specifically for
flooring applications, in longest lengths available, and as follows:
1. Exposed-Edge Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 316 or better.
2. Cross-Section Profile: Angle or L-shape.
3. Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 78
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Width: 10 mm.
5. Control-Joint Filler: Neoprene, in color selected by Engineer from
manufacturer's full range.
6. Extent: Extent Use combination metal\neoprene for movement and control joints
through ceramic floor tiles as stipulated by requirements of referenced
installation standards.
D. Accessories for Thick Set Mortar Installation:
1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50.8 by 50.8 mm by
1.57-mm diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for
minimum wire size.
a. Use reinforcing wire fabric for installations over compressible thermal
insulating materials.
2. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Use
for reinforcing separations between dissimilar backgrounds if wall tile is set
with thick wet mortar bedding.
a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-
coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after
fabrication into lath.
1) Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring.
2) Weight: 0.7 kg/sq. m.
7.7.4.9 Mixing Mortars and Grout

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar
and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and
grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for
installations indicated.
7.8 Execution
7.8.1 Examination
A. Examine substrates, areas where tile will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of installed tile. Curing may also be achieved through use of plastic sheets.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films,
and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI
A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations; if not
4. Coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 79
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
7.8.2 Preparation
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain
soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using
a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with
a heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-Portland
cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced
standard for tile installation.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material
manufacturer's written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Provide substrates for wall tile installed with dry-set or latex-Portland cement
mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108
series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use cement plaster, with expanded mesh reinforcement where necessary,
and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
D. Blending
For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units
taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved.
E. Samples
If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site
before installing.
7.8.3 Installation, General
A. Tile Installation Standards
Comply with BS 5385.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment
and fixtures to form a complete covering without
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and
drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully
grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items
for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 80
______________________________________________________________________________
Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize
tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-
filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation
joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing
tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. Movement Joints: Provide 10 mm wide, non-structural,
intermediate movement joint in floor tiling of all tiled areas,
based on TCA handbook, extending to the full depth of the
finishing layer:
1. At 9 m in any direction for ceramic tiles bedded in semi dry mix
2. At 15 m in any direction for other types of rigid floor tiles or slabs.
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations
indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed
would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
7.8.4 Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule
C. Joint Widths, General
Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in Contract Documents or approved on site
by Engineer, install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles: 3.00 mm.
2. Rectified Ceramic Tiles: 3.00 mm.
3. Porcelain Floor Tiles: 3.00 mm.
4. Quarry Floor Tiles: 3.00 mm.
D. Level of Finished Flooring, General:
1. Wet Areas
Set ceramic tile finished in wet areas similar to bathrooms, toilets,
powders, laundries, shower areas and the like sloped to floor drains to drain
surface water. Arrange that tiles are sloped to floor drains from the four
sides.
2. Dry Areas
Set ceramic tile finishes in dry areas (other building spaces) level at the
Finish Floor Level (F.F.L.) indicated on Drawings.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 81
______________________________________________________________________________
E. Floorings; Bedding and Grout Details:

1. Wet Areas, Out-Flat Distribution Corridors, Commercial Areas and
Heavy-Duty Applications: Set rectified ceramic tiles, porcelain, ceramic
and quarry floor tiles with thin set adhesive mortar to cement-sand leveling
screeds as specified in, Section “Cement-Based Screed”.
a. Bedding: Water cleanable epoxy-based adhesive.
b. Grout: Water cleanable epoxy-based grout
c. Contact Area: 100%.
2. Other Applications
Set ceramic tiles and porcelain, ceramic and quarry floor tiles with thick
wet mortar bedding on a layer of clean loose sand bedding uniformly and
manually distributed, leveled and compacted.
a. Bedding: Latex-modified cement-sand mortar prepared by through
adding water and mechanical mixing as per manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Grout: Latex-modified Portland-cement-based grout.
c. Contact Area: 100%.
F. Bases
Set all types of ceramic bases in all types of applications to walls prepared with
cement sand plastering with Latex-modified Portland cement setting adhesive.
External and internal corners are to be metered at 45 degrees.
1. Joint Width: Respect joints and widths in adjoining flooring as long as tile sizes
match. Otherwise, Joint width is to be 3.00 mm.
2. Bedding: Same as bedding material used in adjoining flooring.
3. Grout: Same as bedding material used in adjoining flooring.
4. Contact Area: 100%.
G. Stairs Finishing
Set porcelain floor tiles and fittings to smooth finished concrete stairs using water-
cleanable epoxy-based adhesive as specified. Grout joints with epoxy grout. Set
bases same as specified before.
H. Silicone Sealer
Silicone sealer to all grouted joints. Clean adjoining tile surfaces promptly.
7.8.5 Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule
A. Joint Widths, General
Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in Contract Documents or approved on site
by Engineer, install tile on Walls with joints in widths specified hereafter. Respect
joints in floors as long as interfacing dimensions of floor and wall tiles match.
1. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles: 3.00 mm.
2. Porcelain Wall Tiles: 3.00 mm
B. Bedding and Grouting Materials
Any used bedding or grouting material shall be certified as non-sag.
C. Setting to Concrete and Masonry Backgrounds
Set porcelain and ceramic with either of the following methods
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 82
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Adhered Tile Technique: Latex-modified Portland cement setting adhesive on

15 mm thick coat of cement sand plaster (plaster base coat) of mix proportion similar
to that specified for Portland cement plaster base coats in Section "Portland Cement
Plaster" applied onto keying scratch (dash) coat as specified in same section.
Separations between dissimilar backgrounds are to be fitted prior to plastering.
a. Thickness of Adhesive Bedding: Comply with manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
b. Contact Area: 100%.
2. Back Battering Technique: Thick wet cement-sand mortar bedding on concrete
and masonry walls. Walls are to be prepared with Portland cement-sand keying
spatter dash coat (scratch coat) of mix proportions and materials same as specified
in Section "Portland Cement Plaster". Separations between dissimilar backgrounds
(concrete and masonry units) are to be reinforced with galvanized metal lath as
specified in this section. Wet cure dash coat for a minimum of 48 hours.
a. Thickness of Mortar Bedding: 15-25 mm.
b. Contact Area: 100%.
D. Setting to Gypsum Backing Panels or Cement Boards: Thin-set mortar on
coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board or cement board used as tile
backing panels:
1. Bedding: Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-modified, premixed, portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
E. Grouting: Grout porcelain and ceramic wall tiles with latex-modified Portland
cement colored grout. Fill full depth of joints and finish flush with adjoining tile
surfaces.
1. Apply silicone sealer to all grouted joints. Clean adjoining tile surfaces promptly.
F. Silicone Sealer: Silicone sealer to grouted joints in wet areas. Clean adjoining tile
surfaces promptly.
7.8.6 Glass Mosaic Installation Schedule
A. Set glass mosaic with proprietary glass mosaic adhesive as specified in this Section.
B. Grout glass mosaics with unsanded modified cement-based grout as specified.
C. Clean adjoining tile surfaces promptly from grout material.
D. Apply silicone sealer to all grouted joints. Clean adjoining mosaic surfaces promptly.
7.8.7 Cleaning and Protecting
A. Cleaning
On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they
are free of foreign matter.
1. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted
by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than
10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous
plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with
clean water before and after cleaning.
2. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by
coating manufacturer that is acceptable to grout manufacturer. Trap and
remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 83
______________________________________________________________________________
Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded,
and otherwise defective tile work. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,
in a manner acceptable to Engineer, that ensure tile is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect
installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after
grouting is completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral
cleaner from tile surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 84
SECTION 8 – PLASTER AND POINTER
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 8 - PLASTER AND POINTER

8.1. Scope of Work
The work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection
with providing and installation of cement plaster complete in strict accordance with this
section of the Specifications, applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions
of the Contract.
The scope of this section of specification is covered with detailed Specifications as laid
down herein.
8.2. Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following Pakistani, British & ASTM standards are relevant to these
specifications wherever applicable.
8.2.1 Pakistan Standard
P.S.23 Ordinary Portland cement.
8.2.2. ISO (International Organization for Standardization).
R.579 Definitions and terminology of cement.
R.579 Method of testing strength of cements compressive and flexural strengths
of plastic mortar (Rilem-Cembureau method).
R.680 Chemical analysis of cement-Main constituents of Portland mortar cement.
R.682 Chemical analysis of cements-Determination of sulphur as sulphide.
8.2.3 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
C. 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
C. 631 Bonding Compounds for interior plastering.
8.2.4 BST (British Standards Institution)
812 Methods for Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates, Sands and
Filters.
1199 Sands for External Renderings. Internal plastering with Lime and Portland
Cement and floor screeds. .
1369 Metal Lathing (Steel) for Plastering.
5262 External Rendered Finishes.
5492 Internal Plastering.
8.3. General
8.3.1 Except as may be otherwise shown surfaces specified, all plaster work, both internal and
external, shall be ordinary Portland cement plaster of the required thickness shown on
the Drawings.
8.3.2 Plastering shall not commence until electric conduits, drainage, sanitary pipes, inlets to
tanks, brackets, clamps, doors arid window frames and all sorts of inserts and embedded
items arc Fixed in position. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make sure
that all such work is carried out before starting of plaster work. Chiseling and repairing
of cement plaster shall not be permitted without the approval of the Project Manager.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 85
______________________________________________________________________________
8.4. Materials
8.4.1 Cement
Cement for plaster shall be Portland Cement either ordinary rapid hardening 01 sulphate
resisting cement as specified complying with P.S.232 01 BS-12 and shall conform to
requirement specified in the sections plain and reinforced Concrete.
8.4.2 Sand
Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirement of BS 812, BS-11 99 and AS 1 M C-
144.
It shall comprise natural sand crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand. It shall be hard
durable, clean and free from adherent coatings such as clay and from any appreciable
amount of clay in pellet form. It shall not contain harmful materials to adversely affect
the hardening, the strength, the durability or the appearance of the plaster or any materials
in contact with it. The quantity of clay, silt and dust shall not exceed 5% by weight for
sand or crushed gravel or 10% by weight for crushed stone sand.
The grading of sand for internal plaster work and external rendering shall be within the
following limits.
Percentage by weight passing slew sizes:
Sieve Internal Cement

Size Plaster work and external rendering
(mm) W
0.275.00 100
0.09472.34 90-100
0.04771.18 70-100
0.02470.6 40-80
0.01270.3 5-40
0.00670.15 0-10
The grading specified .above shall be suitable for smooth finishing coats, scraped finishes
and for pebble-dash or dry-dash for textured surfaces, produced by the treatment of the
freshly applied final coat with a tool, the coarser particles shall be removed by screening
through a 1/12”/2 mm sieve.
8.4.3 Water
Water for plaster shall conform to requirements specified in the section for plain and
reinforced concrete.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 86
______________________________________________________________________________
8.4.4 Additive
Additives for controlling the setting and working characteristics of plaster or for
imparting anticorrosion, fungicidal or water proofing properties, shall be added to the
plaster strictly in accordance with the particular manufacturer's written instructions. Good
quality hair or manila fiber in reasonably well distributed proportion may be to the plaster
to assist application and reduce droppings. No additives shall be used except as specified
in the Contract Documents.
8.4.5 All materials and workmanship for plaster, not explained in these specifications shall
comply with the requirements of relevant BS-CP 211 and CP-221 as directed by the
Project Manager.
8.5. Proportioning and Mixing

8.5.1 Measurement of materials by volume shall be by containers of known capacity to
maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy or caked material shall be used. Mixing
equipment boxes and tools shall be clean. Materials shall be proportioned as specified on
the drawings, in the Bill of Quantities or as directed by the Project Manager. Mixing shall
be continuous until complete and all ingredients are evenly distributed.
8.5.2 Only limited water shall be added for proper workability and such quantity of the mortar
shall be prepared as that which will be consumed in thirty minutes after preparation. -
Preparation of mortar in bulk quantity for use during the entire day or for any other time
more than that stipulated above is expressly prohibited. Re-tempering shall not be
permitted and all mortar which has begun to stiffen shall be discarded.
8.5.3 Plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed either by hand on a clean cement concrete
platform or by a mechanical mixer, as directed by the Project Manager.
8.6. Preparation of Surface to Be Plastered

8.6.1 Surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, form oil and other surface
impurities which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surface
concerned. The surface of all concrete ceilings, beams and columns shall be lightly
hacked by approved means to give the required key for plastering.
8.6.2 All masonry surfaces to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all matter which will
otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface
shall be washed with clean water and kept damp for 24 hours before further treatment.
The surface thus prepared shall be treated uniformly with cement and sand slurry. The
slurry to be used shall be one part cement to one part sand by volume with water added
to make a stiff creamy mix. The slurry shall be applied with a stiff brush on surface which
has previously been well wetted. The surface so treated shall be left to cure for three days.
8.7. Application of Plaster

8.7.1 The plaster of a thickness less than the specified thickness shall be rejected. If the plaster
is to be more than 1/2" /13mm thick, it shall be done in two coats. The surface of first
coat shall be made rough before the second coat is applied. The plaster shall not have
wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumb. The edges and corners shall represent a
straight line. The plaster shall be kept wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 87
______________________________________________________________________________
payment shall be allowed for jambs, junctions, corners, edges round surfaces or for more
than one layer of plaster required due to any unevenness in the work done by the
Contractor. The plaster work is to cover all conduits, pipes etc. fixed, in the walls and
ceiling. Wherever specified metal lath shall he nailed firmly before plastering is
commenced. The plastered surface shall be tested frequently with 9.843’/3 meter straight
edge and plumb bob.
8.7.2 Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discoloration or any defects shall not be
acceptable. Any such plaster or loose plaster shall be removed and replaced with plaster
in conformity with these specifications. The Contractor shall cut and patch all defective
work at his own cost. All damaged plaster shall be patched as directed by the Project
Manager. Patching plaster shall match with and shall be finished leveled with adjoining
plaster.
8.8. Metal Lath over Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Joint

a. Metal lathing shall be fabricated from sheet steel, and shall be of uniform quality
and tree from flaws broken strands, cracks and corrosive pitting, shall he
rectangular and true to shape and shall comply with BS-1369.
b. All lathing shall be galvanized. Where plastering material depends entirely on the
lathing for its key, these shall be not less than two complete mesh openings per
1.12"/28 in one direction and the width of the aperture shall not be less than
0.2”/5mm.
c. Sheet shall be not less than 1.60 Kg. /m2 when fabricated, using 0.7mm thick steel
sheet. Where used on smooth surfaces to form a key it shall be not less than 1.20
Kg /m2 when fabricated, using 0.02"/0.5mm thick steel sheet. Typing wire shall be
0.048"/1.2mm diameter galvanized annealed iron wire.
d. Before plastering, wherever block masonry meets with reinforced concrete
member’s 6"/150mm wide continuous strip of expanded metal lath shall be nailed
to the masonry and the reinforced concrete member covering the point completely
to prevent cracking of the joint.
8.9. Beads & Profiles

a. Angle beads, corner beads, stop beads, architrave beads, depth gauge beads, edging
profiles, plaster dividing profiles, interior angle profiles, plaster borders and the
like shall all be manufactured from sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication, all
beads & profiles shall be perforated at edges to ensure good adhesion of the plaster
work. Thickness and dimensions shall suit particular locations and plaster work
thickness.
b. Nails for fixing lathing shall be galvanized and have either clout heads or small flat
heads to suit particular locations.
c. All angle beads, stop beads, architrave beads, depth gauge beads, and the like are
to be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8.10. Cleaning and Protection

8.10.1 Rubbish and debris shall be removed as necessary to make way for work of other trades
and as directed by the Project Manager. As each room or space is completed all rubbish,
debris, scaffolding and tools should be removed to leave the room clean.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 88
______________________________________________________________________________
8.10.2 Prior to plastering all aluminium windows and finished metals should be covered by sheet
of plastic or tarpaulin to protect damage.
8.10.3 Protect finished plaster from injury by any source. Contractor shall also protect walls
floors and work of other trades from plaster materials.
8.11. Tolerances
a. Surfaces of plaster work shall be finished with a true plane to correct line and level
with all angle and corners to a right angle unless otherwise specified.
b. Maximum permitted tolerances shall not exceed l/8"/3mm in 6.562 ft/2m variation
from plumb or level in any exposed line or surface and 0.06"/1.5mm variation between
planes of abutting edges or ends.
8.12. Pointing Work

a. Joints of masonry work to be pointed shall be properly raked to 1/2" depth, cleaned
and wetted.
b. For struck pointing the mortar shall be filled in the joints flush with masonry with
a pointing trowel and then pressed with proper pointing tools to form weathered
and struck horizontal and triangular or V-notched vertical joints.
c. For flush pointing after pressing mortar in the joints these shall be tilled up with
mortar and finished level with edges.
d. After pointing the face of the work shall be cleared of all surplus mortar. No
washing shall be done till the pointing has set. All defects shall he treated at
Contractor's expense. All work shall be kept wet for 10 days and protected from
extreme temperatures and weather.
8.13. Measurement and Payment
8.13.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no
measurement and payment will be made for the under mentioned specified works related
to the relevant items of the Bill of Quantities. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have
been included in the quoted unit rate of the respective items of the Bill of Quantities.
The work itens include:
a. Metal lath over reinforced concrete and masonry joint.
b. Joints, junctions, corners, drip course, edges and rounding.
c. More than one layer due to any unevenness in the finished works.
d. Cutting & patching of all defective works.
e. Surface preparation, cleaning and protection as specified.
f. Water proofing agent for water proof plaster.
g. Angles beads, corner beads, stop beads, architrave beads, depth gauge edging
profiles, plaster dividing profiles, interior angle profiles and plaster borders
used in. plaster works as shown on drawings.
8.13.2 Measurement
Deductions shall not be made for ends of joints, beam posts, etc., and openings not
exceeding 1.64 Sq. ft/0.5 Square meter each and no addition shall be made for reveals,
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 89
______________________________________________________________________________
jambs, soffits, sills, etc. of these openings not for finishing the plaster around ends of
joints , beams posts, etc.
In case of opening of area exceeding 1.64 sq.ft/0.5 square meter each, deduction shall be
made for the openings and also addition shall be made for reveal jambs, soffits, sills, etc.
of openings.
Measurement for acceptably completed works of plaster/ pointing will be made on the
basis of number of Sq.ft. / Square meter of the surface area plastered/ pointed as shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
8.13.3 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity of plaster / pointing basis of unit
rate per sq.ft/m2 quoted in the Bill of Quantities and shall constitute full compensation
for al the works related to the item.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 90
SECTION 9 – INTERIOR PAINTING
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 9 - INTERIOR PAINTING

9.1 Part-I – General
9.1.1 Scope
Surface preparation and field painting of interior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
9.1.2 Coordination:
Coordinate the work of interior working with the works of all other trades. Paint exposed
surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain natural. If an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the
item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color of finish is not
indicated, Engineer will select from standard colors and finishes available.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
b. Light fixtures.
c. Any other item specified to have factory applied colored paint or coating system.
d. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
e. Other requirements as specified in this Section.
9.1.3 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Requirements:

As specified in this Section.
9.2 Submittals
9.2.1 General
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the submittals listed here
after in this Article in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and
Section “Submittal Procedures”.
9.2.2 Action Submittals
9.2.2.1 Qualifications Data
For manufacturer and third party testing agency.
9.2.2.2 Material List
An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference
specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's
catalog number and general classification.
9.2.2.3 Product Data
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 91
______________________________________________________________________________
Product data should be indicated forFor each type of product.

9.2.2.4 Manufacturer's Information
Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
9.2.2.5 Manufacturer’s Color Chart for Initial Selection
Manifacturer’s color chart shuld be indicated for each type of topcoat product.
9.2.2.6. Samples for Verification
For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on
representative Samples of the actual substrate.
a. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit
until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
1) Include a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label
each Sample for location and application.
b. Submit three Samples on each substrate indicated for Engineer's review of color
and texture only.
9.2.3 Informational Submittals
9.2.3.1 Product Test Reports
For each submitted paint system as available with manufacturer. Test reports should have
been prepared by or under the supervision of a third party testing agency on samples
selected from current production runs. Submit test reports for the following paint
properties. Test reports shall be fully descriptive and shall indicate number of tested
samples, sample preparation, thicknesses of different layers, curing and setting time,
painting procedure, reference standard for test and test procedure:
a. Chemical composition.
b. Specific gravity.
c. Viscosity.
d. Gloss degree.
e. Adhesion to substrates as used in the project.
f. Resistance to yellowing.
g. Scrub resistant using brush scrapers.
h. Opacity.
9.2.3.2 Products Certificates
From Manufacturer attesting compliance of submitted materials with specified
requirements.
9.2.3.3 Qualifications Data
For installer.
9.2.3.4 Cleaning and maintenance
Cleaning and maintenance instructions for each paint system for inclusion in Project’s
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 92
______________________________________________________________________________
9.3.1 Quality System

Provide the products of a manufacturer who holds valid ISO 9001 certification.
9.3.2 Applicator Qualifications
A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design,
and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with
a record of successful in-service performance. Paint applicators shall be identities that
approved and accredited by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
9.3.3 Source Limitations
Obtain fillers, putties, undercoats and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats. Furnish paint materials as comprehensive integral paint
system with all materials from same manufacturer or from sources recommended by top
coat manufacturer in product’s technical data sheet.
9.3.4 Proprietary Names
Use of manufacturer's proprietary product name in any tender or contract document to
designate quality standard or aesthetics of paint is not intended to imply that products
named are required to be used for exclusion of Work. Equivalents products of other
unnamed manufacturers may be submitted by Contractor as comparable products.
9.3.5 Comparable Product Requests
Coordinate with requirements specified in Section "Product Requirements". Submit three
copies of each request for consideration. Identify product to be replaced. Include a detailed
comparison of physical properties, qualities and performance characteristics between
specified and proposed comparable paint product, including as a minimum:
1. Chemical composition and properties.
2. Opacity
3. Clean-ability.
4. Scrub resistance, wet and dry.
5. Adhesion.
6. Exposure resistance.
9.3.6 Definitions and Abbreviations
1. Refer to, Section References.
2. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
3. Abbreviations:
a. DFT: Dry Film Thickness.
b. UL: Underwriter Laboratories.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 93
______________________________________________________________________________
9.4 Preconstruction Testing
9.4.1 Emulsion paint systems (latex water-based paints)

Emulsion paint systems (latex water-based paints) under this Section shall
successfully pass tests to the requirements International Standards (ASTM, BS EN, ISO
or DIN). Tests shall be conducted or witnessed and accredited by a third party testing
agency qualified for paint testing for the following properties:
1. Quantitative material analysis.
2. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. Abrasion resistance.
4. Flexibility.
5. Wash-ability.
6. Absorption.
7. Dry opacity.
8. Accelerated yellowness.
9. Recoating.
10. Skinning.
11. Color retention.
9.4.2 Testing Samples
Contractor shall prepare testing samples on substrates identical to substrates indicated in
the project, using the approved paint material applied in accordance with submitted method
statement. Prepare triplicate samples, two samples will be handed to laboratory and the
third sample shall be submitted to Engineer. Samples shall be applied with motorized
application method to ensure uniform paint film thickness. Samples shall be tagged on back
face to state paint system information as specified before. For paints failing the tests,
submit alternate products.
9.5 Mockups
9.5.1 Bench Mark Samples

Before painting, prepare bench mark as specified in, Section “Quality Requirements” to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
9.5.2 Apply mockup for each type of paint material, finish or color and for each substrate to
receive paint finish. Area of each sample is to be 9 sq. m., unless lower area is directed or
accepted by Engineer.
Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
paint system specified in Part 3.
9.5.3 Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have
been activated.
9.5.4 Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. If preliminary color
selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors
selected by Engineer at no added cost to Employer.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 94
______________________________________________________________________________
9.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
9.6.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
9.6.2 Storage
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at an
ambient temperature as recommended by manufacturer in technical datasheet Maintain
storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
2. Store materials that have low flashing point in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
9.7 Project Conditions
9.7.1. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 10 and 32 C.
9.7.2 Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air are between 7 and 35 C.
9.7.3 Do not apply interior paints in when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 3 C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
9.8 Part -II - Products
9.8.1 Manufacturers
9.8.2 Proposed Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with Specifications and other Contract Documents, the following
manufacturers are proposed for consideration of Contractor as offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work:
9.8.3 Decorative Paints and Coatings
a. Paints (for decorative paints and performance coatings).
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 95
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Equal and approved unnamed manufacturer.
9.8.4 Paint General
9.8.5 Material Compatibility
Provide primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with
the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
9.8.6 Material Quality
Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified
that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.
9.8.7 Colors, Textures, shades and Effects
As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

9.8.8 Health and Environmental Requirements
The requirements in this Article shall apply to materials furnished under this Section.
9.8.8.1 VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings
Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings and Primers: ≤ 50 g/L.
2. Non-flat Paints, Coatings and Primers: ≤ 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints to Ferrous Metals: ≤ 250 g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: ≤ 100 g/L.
5. Dry-Fog Coatings: ≤ 400 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: ≤ 340 g/L.
7. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: ≤ 420 g/L.
9.8.8.2 Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings

Provide topcoat paints and anticorrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that
comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints
and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop.
9.8.8.3 Aromatic Compounds

Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total
aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene
rings).
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 96
______________________________________________________________________________
9.8.8.4 Restricted Components
Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
9.9 Interior Primers
9.9.1 Interior Portland Cement Plaster Primer

Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application
9.9.1.1 Dry Film Thickness
As recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.025 mm.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 97
______________________________________________________________________________
Factory-formulated 100%-acrylic for sealing and priming stucco as standard with

manufacturer for acrylic-based paints.
Factory-formulated epoxy-polyamide based primer or other epoxy resin recommended by
manufacturer for Portland cement plaster substrates. Use DFT as recommended by
manufacturer but not less than 0.025 mm.
9.9.4 Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer
Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive lead-and chromate- free epoxy-based
metal primer.
9.9.5 Dry Film Thickness
As recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.030 mm.
9.9.6 Primer coat
A primer coat shall be a second priming coat applied after installation in place on surfaces
already prepared with first factory-applied priming coat.
9.10 Interior Fillers and Putties
9.10.1 General
Obtain from same manufacturer of the paint system and to be compatible with other coats
of the system.
9.10.2 Block Filler
Latex block filler suitable for interior and exterior applications.
9.10.3 Acrylic Paint Systems
Use acrylic-based materials.
9.11 Acrylic Emulsion for Cement Based Surfaces
9.11.1 General
Interior Acrylic Emulsion Paints on Cement based Surfaces shall be based on 100% acrylic
or acrylic-polymer-emulsions that are manufactured with high quality acrylic resins,
approved by Engineer.
9.11.2 Testing
Shall meet requirements for excellent grade paints when tested according to ASTM
Standards:
a. Polymer Content:
1) Quantitative Identification of Polymer Content: ASTM D 3168, or ISO 3233.
b. Performances during Application:
1) Sag Resistance (using Multi-notch Applicator): ASTM D4400.
2) Spatter Resistance (During Roller Applications): ASTM D4707.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 98
______________________________________________________________________________
3) Blocking Resistance: ASTM D4946.

4) Color Development in Tinted Latex Paints: ASTM D5326.
c. Performances of Cured Paints:
1) Fire Retardancy: ASTM D1360
2) Hiding Power (Dry Opacity) for Roller Applied Paints: ASTM D 5150.
3) Wet-to-Dry Hiding Change: ASTM D5007.
4) Leveling of Paint (by Draw down Method): ASTM D4062.
5) Gloss and Sheen Uniformity: ASTM D 3928.
6) Burnish Resistance: ASTM D6736
7) Leaching of Water Soluble Material: ASTM D7190.
8) Practical Washability: ASTMD4828.
9) Accelerated Efflorescence: ASTM D7072.
10) Scrub Resistance (by Abrasion Weight Loss): ASTM D4213.
11) Water Resistance in 100% humidity: ASTM D2247.
12) Florescent UV Condensation exposures: D4597.
13) Alkali and Mildew Resistance.
14) Flexibility.
15) Absorption.
16) Accelerated Yellowness.
17) Recoating.
18) Skinning.
19) Color Retention.
9.11.3 Acrylic Emulsion Paint

Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint suitable for repeated washing. Paint
shall be highly recognized as interior emulsion paint, of acrylic-polymer emulsion binder
as specified before, of high leveling and hiding properties and excellent flow properties and
wash-ability properties. Crack bridging capability of paint shall be 1.00 mm minimum.
Paint shall be of anti-fungal and anti-bacterial properties. Solid content shall not be less
than 36%, by volume when tested to above referenced standards.
9.11.4 First and Second Coats

Acrylic latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of not less than 0.060 mm per coat,
and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 99
______________________________________________________________________________
9.11.5 Acrylic Emulsion Paint (Matt and Silk)

Interior 100% acrylic (pure) resin based emulsion to produce a highly durable, flexible
and water-resistant coating suitable for repeated washing and scrubbing (not less than
3000 Cycles abrasion test), alkali resistant and excellent opacity and adhesion.
9.11.6 First and Second Coats
Acrylic latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of not less than 0.060 mm per coat,
and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
9.12 Epoxy Paint for Cement Based Surfaces
9.12.1 High performance architectural coating (HIPAC)

High performance, two-component chemically-cured waterborne epoxy coating for use as
a hard, durable high performance architectural coating (HIPAC):
9.12.2 Special Qualifications
a. Suitable for use on surfaces where the performance of resisting growth of fungus and
bacteria is required.
b. Applicable to walls (stands on walls).
c. Applicable to concrete and cement sand plaster.
9.12.3 Performance Requirements
a. Film Properties
1) Abrasion Resistance: Good.
2) Pencil Hardness: Good.
3) Flexibility: Excellent.
4) Impact Resistance: Excellent.
5) Water Resistance: Excellent.
6) Chemical/Stain: Resistance Excellent.
b. Product Data
1) Pigment: Lightfast Non-Lead Pigments and Mineral Extenders
2) Binder: Polyamide Cured Epoxy.
3) Solvent: Aromatic Hydrocarbon and Alcohol.
4) Volume Solids: 43% +- 1% - varies with color.
5) Flame Spread Rating: Class A (0-25) over non-combustible surfaces.
6) Gloss Degree: Provide finished epoxy coating of matt, semi-gloss or gloss finish
as per description given on Finish Schedule.
c. Application
1) Film Thickness:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 100
______________________________________________________________________________
2) Wet: 115-290 microns

3) Dry: 50-125 microns.
9.12.4 Anti-Toxic Epoxy Finish Paint

a. High solids content, non-sag, epoxy –based finish paint.
b. Recommended for water-submerged continuous service conditions in water tanks.
c. Compatible with crystalline waterproofing specified for water tank waterproofing.
d. Light color as selected by Engineer.
9.13 Polyurethane Paint for Cement Based Surfaces
9.13.1 Top and under coats

Top and under coats are to be spray-applied, aliphatic polyurethane based, non-toxic, air
drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface to produce a durable, flexible and water-resistant
coating with excellent adhesion and color retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive
further coatings. Finish is to be highly gloss.
Color shall be as selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
Primer and Fillers for surface preparation are to be as recommended by manufacturer.
9.14 Acrylic Emulsion Paint for Gypsum Boards and Cement Boards
Same materials as specified for application onto cement based substrates.
9.15 Opaque Finish of Wood Surfaces
9.15.1 Polyurethane Paint System

Top and under coats are to be spray-applied, aliphatic polyurethane based, non-toxic, air
drying to a smooth, highly opaque surface to produce a durable, flexible and water-resistant
coating with excellent adhesion and color retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive
further coatings. Finish is to be highly gloss.
Color shall be as selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
Primer and Fillers for surface preparation are to be as recommended by manufacturer.
9.15.2 Alkyd Paint System for Woods
Top and under coats are to be alkyd based, oleo-resinous, non-toxic, drying to a smooth,
highly opaque surface to produce a durable, flexible and water resistant coating with
excellent adhesion and color retention. Undercoat is to be suitable to receive further
coatings. Finish is to be gloss or semi-gloss as selected by the Engineer.
9.16 Ferrous Surfaces Finish Paint System (Architectural Work Items)
9.16.1 Acrylic Aliphatic-Polyurethane Enamel

Two-pack acrylic resin based enamel cured with aliphatic polyisocyanate applicable on
steel surfaces, steel surfaces primed with epoxy-based primers and steel surfaces coated
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 101
______________________________________________________________________________
with zinc. Dry enamel film shall exhibit excellent gloss and color retention, durability,
scratch and abrasion resistance and chemical resistance. Comply with the following:
1. Binder: Acrylic\aliphatic polyurethane.
2. Pigments: Rutile titanium dioxide and/or color pigments and functional extenders.
3. Appearance: Semi-Gloss.
4. % Solids, by Volume: 57, minimum.
5. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
6. Application: Airless spray.
7. Primer: Epoxy-zinc-rich or epoxy-based as specified for substrate to be coated.
8. Thinners: As recommended by manufacturer.
9. Dry Film Thickness: Apply two coats at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 75 microns per coat, minimum.
9.17 Traffic-Related Paints
9.17.1 Traffic Marking Paint

Refer to, Section "Traffic Coatings".
9.17.2 Curb Paint
Use pedestrian-grade traffic coating same as used for adjoining top surface of the reinforced
concrete walkways.
9.17.3 Paint for Traffic Guide Wall Labels
Multi-purpose phosphoric paint
9.17.3.1 Performances
Additional visibility to traffic guide wall labels.
9.17.3.2 Binder
Acrylic resin.
9.17.3.3 Properties
a. Solid Contents: 48%; minimum.
b. Density: 1.06 kg/Liter; minimum.
9.19.3.4 Colors
White and Yellow.
9.19.3.5 Dry Film Thickness
50 microns, minimum.
9.18 Execution
9.18.1 Examination
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 102
______________________________________________________________________________
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
9.18.2 Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates
When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
9.18.3 Suitability of Substrates
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions.
9.18.4 Coordination of Work
1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the
total system for various substrates.
2. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use
of compatible primers.
3. Notify Engineer about anticipated problems when using the materials specified
over substrates primed by others.
4. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces are dry.
5. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
9.19 Preparation
9.19.1 General
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
9.19.2 Cleaning
Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could
impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 103
______________________________________________________________________________
9.19.3 Surface Preparation

Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to requirements of BS 6150:1991 and
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
Remove and re-prime incompatible primers.
9.19.4 Cement-Based Materials

Prepare cement plaster, and mineral surfaces to be painted as follows:
a. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use
mechanical methods of surface preparation.
b. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
c. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.
If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct
this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
d. Prepare surfaces with two coats of filler or putty that is compatible with under coats
and finish coats and obtained from same manufacturer of paint coats:
1) Use compatible acrylic-based filler under acrylic emulsion paints.
2) Use oil-based filler under alkyd paints. Use of copolymer-based fillers under alkyd
paints shall be subject to written approval of Engineer based on manufacturer’s
certification and submitted samples.
3) Use alkyd based filler under epoxy based paints, unless otherwise recommended
by manufacturer.
4) Sand after setting of filler and patch remaining spots or irregularities and lightly
sand to obtain perfect smooth uniform surface suitable for receiving paint coats.
9.19.5 Gypsum Boards

Preparation of joints and remedy of board defects induced during construction of gypsum
board assemblies are specified in, Sections covering different gypsum board assemblies.
Preparation of gypsum board surfaces shall comply with requirements of board
manufacturer, referenced Standard Specifications and this Section Galvanized Surfaces:
Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and
surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from
coil stock by methods recommended by manufacturer and paint applicator.
a. Apply one coat of wash primer to promote and enhance adhesion of paint system to
the galvanized surface.
9.19.6 Ferrous Metals

Clean un-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical
cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of SSPC standards and the following:
a. Treat metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 104
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
9.19.7 Structural Steel Substrates
Clean structural steel surfaces; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances.
a. Bare Structural Steel; Surfaces: Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint
system manufacturer and according to Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00 – 1967, Sa
3: Blast cleaning to visually clean steel. Surface shall be completely free from oil,
grease, mill scale and rust.
b. Coated Structural Steel (before applying undercoat or Finish coat): Touch up bare
areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean
with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer
as the shop coat or the touch up material recommended by manufacturer of the
paint system.
9.19.8 Wood Substrates
a. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
b. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
c. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
d. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
9.19.9 Material Preparation
a. Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign\ materials and residue.
c. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
d. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
9.20 Application
9.20.1 General
Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
louvers and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 105
______________________________________________________________________________
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
9.20.2 Scheduling Painting

Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
9.20.3 Application Procedures

Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
9.20.4 Brushes
Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for
surface or item being painted.
9.20.5 Rollers
Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
9.20.6 Spray Equipment

Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for
material and texture required.
9.20.7 Minimum Coating Thickness

Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to
achieve dry film thickness indicated, unless higher thickness is recommended by
manufacturer. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by
manufacturer but not less dry film thickness specified.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 106
______________________________________________________________________________
9.20.8 Mechanical and Electrical Work

Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms
and occupied spaces.
9.20.9 Prime Coats

Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to
material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas
in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
9.20.10 Completed Work

Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work
not complying with requirements.
9.20.11 Tint
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
9.21 Field Quality Control

a. Employer reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as
often as the Employer deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied.
b. Engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being
used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of the Contractor.
c. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests as selected from tests specified under
“Pre- Construction Testing” Article in this Section according to case and noted defects
of technical observations.
d. Employer may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
used does not comply with specified requirements.
e. Contractor shall remove noncompliant paint from the site, pay for testing remove
rejected paint from surfaces painted with it and paint the surface with alternative
approved paint.
9.22 Cleaning and Protection

a. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
b. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
c. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 107
______________________________________________________________________________
d. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
e. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
f. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
g. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
9.23 Interior Painting Schedule

Coordinate the following paint coats with surface preparation steps as specified.
9.23.1 Special Paint System

Apply in compliance with recommendations in manufacturer’s technical data and literature.
9.23.2 Concrete and Concrete Masonry Surfaces

Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces:
9.23.2.1 Acrylic Paint Finish on Concrete and Concrete Masonry Surfaces
Acrylic Paint Finish on Concrete and Concrete Masonry Surfaces should be direct
application on Un-plastered Surfaces. There should be 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Surface shall be prepared and made good using acrylic based fillers and putties
obtained from same manufacturer.
b. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior.
c. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.036 mm.
d. Undercoat: same material for finish coats specified hereafter diluted to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
e. First and Second Finish Coats: Acrylic-latex, interior paint applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 0.06 mm per coat, and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
f. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.
9.23.2.2 Epoxy Paint Finish
a. 2 finish coats over primer.
b. Surface shall be prepared and made good using acrylic based fillers and putties
obtained from same manufacturer.
c. Primer: 1 coat of manufacturer’s standard water based epoxy primer.
d. First and Second Finish Coats: 2 coats of Epoxy Paint finish as specified, to achieve
a total dry film thickness of 125 microns, minimum.
9.23.3 Concrete Masonry Shaft Walls
Two coats of PVA paint on made-good masonry.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 108
______________________________________________________________________________
9.23.4 Gypsum Board and Cement-Based Board

Provide the following finish system over interior gypsum board and Cement-Based Board
surfaces.
9.23.4.1 Acrylic Finish
a. 2 finish coats over a primer.
b. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.031 mm.
c. First and Second Coats: Acrylic-latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading
rate\ recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 0.060 mm.
d. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.
9.23.4.2 Portland Cement Plaster
Provide the following finish systems over new, interior Portland cement plaster surfaces.
9.23.4.3 Acrylic Finish
a. 2 finish coats over a primer.
b. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.036 mm.
c. Undercoat: same material for finish coats specified hereafter diluted to the
d. First and Second Finish Coats: Acrylic-latex, interior paint applied at spreading
less than 0.06 mm per coat, and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
e. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.
9.23.4.4 Epoxy Paint Finish
b. Primer: 1 coat of manufacturer’s standard water based epoxy primer.
c. First and Second Finish Coats: 2 coats of Epoxy Paint finish as specified, to achieve
a total dy film thickness of 125 microns, minimum.
9.23.5 Woodwork and Hardboard
Provide the following paint finish system over new, interior wood surfaces:
9.23.5.1 Polyurethane Paint System
a. 1 finish coats over a wood under coater.
b. Undercoat: Polyurethane-based, interior enamel under coater applied at spreading
less than 0.075 mm.
c. Finish Coat: Full-gloss, acrylic/aliphatic polyurethane-based, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 0.075 mm.
9.23.5.2 Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish
a. 2 finish coats over a wood under coater.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 109
______________________________________________________________________________
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel under coater applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 0.031 mm.
c. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading
less than 0.061 mm.
9.23.5.3 Zinc-Coated Metal
Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
9.23.5.4 Acrylic\Polyurethane Enamel
b. Primer: Primer for Galvanized Steel
9.23.5.5 Washing Primer
Poly vinyl butaryl (PVB) etching primer.
9.23.5.6 Primer
Polyamide epoxy primer or other epoxy resin as recommended by manufacture.
9.23.5.7 Finish Coats:
Acrylic polyurethane coating as specified.
9.23.6 Ferrous Metal

Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
9.23.6.1 Acrylic\Polyurethane Enamel
b. Primer: Epoxy polyamide or other epoxy resin as recommended by manufacture.
c. Finish Coats: Acrylic/polyurethane coating as specified. Apply minimum two coats
to obtain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less than 35-
micron
d. DFT per coat (70 microns of paint DFT
9.24 Exterior Painting
9.24.1 Crete Sand Coating - (Free From Lead and Mercury)
a. This product is composed of Natural Quartz, acrylic resins, pigments at high

temperature, anti-bacterial and anti-fungus additives, anti-foaming agents,
expanders and specially formulated base etc.
b. It can adapt itself to any climate and its heavier textures can also easily cover the
minor defects of cemented or plastered walls. This material also protects the walls
from dampness, fungus, scratch, alkali, ultraviolet rays, fire and accumulation of
humidity and water vapours.
9.24.2 Surface Preparation
The Surface to be applied must be free from grease, dust, loose or flanking paints, mold,
algae, and other contaminants, cracks and chipped plaster should be repaired with cement
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 110
______________________________________________________________________________
and sand mix and properly cured before coating. Previously painted surface must be
thoroughly scraped out so that the plaster of the surface should vividly appear, before the
use of ROCK SHIELD Textured Coatings. This process gives strong adhesion to the
surface.
Applications Drying Time Coverage Cleaning Packing
It is speedily applicable product. It is ready In normal Crete Clean the Available
to use from the pack depending upon the weather Sand Equipment in 25 kg.
surface’s porosity, if ne3eded, 10% water conditions; Coatings with plenty Bags
can be added to it. Touch dry: covers of water
immediately
ROCK SHIELD Crete Sand Coating is to 4-6 hours. 100-125
after use.
be applied by a trowel. This is intended for Proper curing sq. ft per
interior or exterior use on cement sand 72 hours. 25 kg.
plaster chipboard, plywood and asbestos.
9.24.3 Technical Data / Specification
Type of Material :Acrylic & Natural Quartz

Colour : :Natural Iron Oxide
Freeze Thaw :PROP/ETH Glycol
Dispersant :Tamol 731 SD
Potassium Tripoly
Wetting Agent :Triton X-100
Ammonium Hydroxide :Optimize PH
Antifoamer :Nopco NDW
Titanium Oxide :Tiona 575
Zinc Oxide :AZO-11
Coalescent :Texanol
Mildewcide :Skane M-8
Thickeners :TT-615/Natrosol250
Solvent : Water
Thickness: 0.75 MM – 1 MM
Consistency :Pasty
Extender : Quartz – 290
Quartz 71
C/C 300
MICA 300
Dolomite 5 Micron
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 111
SECTION 10 – GLAZING
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION-10 - GLAZING
Scope of Work
The work covered under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all labour,
equipment, tools, appliances, scaffoldings and providing glass, gaskets, sealant,
compounds and accessories required for performing all operations in connections with the
installation and setting of glass, complete in every respect in accordance with the drawings
or as directed by the Project Manager. The scope of this section of specifications is covered
with detailed specifications as laid down herein.
Applicable Standards
Latest editions of following British Standards are relevant to these specifications wherever
applicable.
 BSI (British Standards Institution)
 952 Glass for double glazing.
 CP.152 Double glazing.
General
a. Each type of glass shall have the manufacturer's label on each pane, and the labels
shall remain on the glass until final cleaning.
b. Glazing sealant shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
application.
c. Spacer shims (distance piece) shall be plasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
Thickness shall be equal to space shown on drawings between glass and rebates, bead
or cleat. Depth shall give not less than 6mm cover of glazing sealant.
d. Contractor shall submit samples for each type of glass, minimum 4"x4"/100mm x
100mm in size with protective edges. Samples of glazing sealant minimum 0.1 liter
of specified types shall be submitted. Samples of minimum of three glass blocks shall
also be submitted.
e. Contractor shall submit 12"/300 mm long sample of each type of double glazing
gasket.
f. Contractor shall also submit printed materials manufacturers, installation instructions
for specified glazing, gasket, compounds, sealant and accessories including
description of required equipment, procedures and precautions to be observed.
Delivery Storage and Handling

10.4.1 Contractor shall deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers clearly
labeled with manufacturer's name and address, material, brand, type class and railing as
applicable.
10.4.2 Contractor shall store the materials in original unopened containers, with labels intact,
protected from ground contact.
10.4.3 Contractor shall handle the materials in a manner to prevent breakage of glass and damage
to surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 112
______________________________________________________________________________
Materials
10.5.1 General
Glass shall be free from all blemishes, bubbles, distortions and other flaws of any kind and
shall be properly cut to fit the rebates so as to have a uniform clearance of 1.6 mm (1/6
inch) round the panes between the edges of glass and the rebates. All glass shall be of best
quality manufacture as approved by the Project Manager.
10.5.2 Type of Glass

10.5.2.1 Plain / Tinted Glass
Glass for doors and windows shall be Local Float Glass where the sheet glass is to be
used and for double glazing imported order made double layer vacuum glass of
appropriate thickness tinted as selected and as approved by the Project Manager.
10.5.2.2 PSG Heat-strengthened glass or PSG Tempered glass
PSG Heat-strengthened glass or PSG Tempered glass, safe glass with a compressed layer
on its surface manufactured by heating up flat glass to a temperature of around 700 C and
then blowing air on to its surface, quenching it down swiftly and uniformly. It can be
divided into two types depending on the degree of heat treatment, heat-strengthened glass
or tempered glass PSG heat-strengthened glass in manufactured by controlling the tensile
stress caused by heat treatment process with in a certain range of Temperature. PSG
tempered glass has an impact strength which is 5 times higher than that of the annealed
flat glass of the same thickness, as well as 3 to 4 times higher resistance to weight.
10.5.3 Rubber acrylic glazing sealant.

a. Two component polysulfide glazing sealant.
b. One component acrylic glazing sealant.
c. Acrylic - latex glazing sealant consisting of modified latex rubber and acrylic emulsion,
non-hardening, non-staining and non-bleeding.
d. Cleaners, Primers and sealer as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
10.5.4 Accessories
Vinyl Glazing Bead shall be for external windows and entry doors and shall be in
accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendation.
10.5.5 Glazing Type

It shall be type or ribbon of polymerized butyl or mixture of butyl and polyisol butylene
compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based, 95 percent solids thread or
fabric reinforcement, paintable, non-staining.
10.5.6 Setting Blocks

It shall be chloroprene (Neoprene) 70 to 90 udometer hardness, compatible with sealant
used, channel shaped and of the necessary height for proper perimeter clearance.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 113
______________________________________________________________________________
10.5.7 Channels, Gaskets, and Spacer's.

It shall be chloroprene (Neoprene) 40 to 50 udometer hardness compatible with sealant
used.
Installation of Glazing
a. Glazing shall comply with the recommendations contained in the "MANUAL OF
GLAZING" of the flat glass marketing Association or as specifically recommended
otherwise by the glass and glazing materials manufacturers.
b. Examine each piece of glass and discard and replace glass with new glass, if edge
damage or face imperfection is found.
c. Clean glazing channels and other framing members indicated to receive glass. Remove
coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate, Remove lacquer from metal
surfaces wherever elastomeric sealant are to be used. Apply primer and sealant
manufacturer.
d. Trim and clean excess glazing materials from surrounding surfaces immediately after
installation and eliminate stains and discoloration.
e. Cure glazing sealant and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions,
to obtain high early bond strength internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
f. No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paint and other stains have
been removed from the surface of the glass.
g. While glazing operation is in progress great care shall be taken to avoid breakage or
damage to the glass and adjoining glazing. The Contractor shall make good at his own
cost, all glass broken by his workmen while cleaning or carrying out other operations.
On the completion of the glazing work, all glass that has been set by Contractor shall,
if it becomes loose, within the maintenance period, to be re-fixed at Contractor's
expense.
Protection and Cleaning Of Glazing

a. Remove all smears, labels and excess glazing sealant, leave clean inside and outside
and free from scratches. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of
installed glass. Before final acceptance, damaged or broken glass shall be removed and
replaced with new glass at no additional expense to the Employer.
b. All glazed surfaces shall be washed clean both inside and outside within two weeks
prior to final acceptance by the Employer.
Measurement and Payment

a. No Payment shall be made for the works involved within the scope of this section
of specifications unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill of Quantities or
herein.
b. The Cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the quoted unit rate of the
relevant item of the Bill of Quantities.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 114
SECTION 11– ROOF WATER PROOFING SYSTEM
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 11 - ROOF WATER PROOFING SYSTEM

11.1 Scope of Works
The works covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all plants,
labor and material performing all operations. In connection of water proofing according to
specifications given below;
This subsection covers furnishing and installing roof waterproofing system in accordance
with the requirements shown in the drawings as specified herein:
a) Sequence of operation: Sequence of operation depends upon the individual steps
as are listed below for the application method.
b) Preparation of surface, remove alt dirt and dust from the surface. Thorough clean-
up of surface with a broom. The cleaned surface is then surveyed and all
depressions and pits in the roof of size more than 5mm are replained with
sand/cement mortar before prime coat.
i) Prime Coat: The surface to be sealed has to be cleaned of dirt, dust and all
loosed materials by sweeping it thoroughly with a broom. The cleaned
surface is then primed with bitumen (SIB) PB3 or PB4 with kerosene oil.
ii) Preparation of surface before water proofing.
iii) 0.157" (4mm) thick Ecogum torch on membrane.
iv) One layer of polythene sheet 0.008" thick.
v) 1-1/2" thick brick tiles in 1:6 cement mortar and joint filling in 1:3 cement
mortar cleaning the surface curing etc. complete.
11.2 Material (A)

1. Prime coat of bitumen PB3 or PB4 with kerosene oil.
2. One layer of Polythene Sheet 0.008” thick.
3. 4” thick mud compacted and plastered with straw mixed.
4. 1½” thick brick tiles in 1:6 cement sand mortar and joint filling in 1:3 cement sand,
cleaning the surface and curing etc. complete.
11.3 For Normal To Moderate Rain Area (B)

2. 0.157” (4 mm) thick ecogum torch applied membrane.
cleaning the surface and curing etc. complete.
11.4 For Heavy Rain Area (C)

3. One layer of high density thermo pore (30-50) Kg m3, 2” thick.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 115
SECTION 11– ROOF WATER PROOFING SYSTEM
______________________________________________________________________________
7. Cleaning the surface and curing etc. complete.
11.5 For Areas Where Greater Heat Insulation is required

The contractor shall get samples of all the materials used for the items under this section
approved by the Engineer and the same type of materials shall be used throughout the work.
Any materials required by the Engineer to be tested, shall be got done by the Contractor at
his own cost from the Laboratory approved by the Engineer.
11.6 Protection
The Contractor shall take every care to maintain the slopes, levels and shall protect the
work from any damage during the construction and maintenance period. The Contractor
shall have to remove, replace and rectify such damaged work at his own cost and risk.
11.7 Measurement
Measurement of roofing, shall be in square Ft. of the actual surfaces complete and approved
by the Engineer.
11.8 Rate and Payment

The rate for roofing shall include all materials used for roofing, all labour, equipment,
heating and other operations required to complete the work in all respects to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and as specified.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 116
SECTION 12– ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 12 - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

12.1 Part 1 - General
Aluminum-framed windows glass windows:
1. Fixed windows.
2. Horizontal sliding windows.
a. Provide sliding insect screen operating on a special track in window mainframe.
3. Bottom-hinged in-ward awning windows.
a. Provide fixed insect screen with special framing
12.2 General Performance Requirements

Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those
specified, and that are of minimum test size indicated below.
A Size
Height as indicated on Drawings and width as long as available with manufacturer but
not less than 1.20 meters.
B Structural Performance
Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads
demonstrated by testing units’ representative of those indicated for Project according
to test methods specified in this Section:
1. Design Wind Pressure:
Determine wind pressure based on wind load indicated on structural Drawing.
2. Structural Test Pressure
For uniform load structural test is equivalent to 150 percent of the design
pressure.
3. Deflection
Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less
than 1/175 of glass edge length or 19 mm, whichever is less, at design pressure
based on testing performed according to test method and pressures specified in
this Section.
C Thermal Movements
Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures:
1. Temperature Change (Range)
± 34 deg C, ambient; ± 50 deg C, material surfaces.
D Air Infiltration
Provide aluminum windows with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and
framing areas of 0.3 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM
E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 600 Pa.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 117
______________________________________________________________________________
E Water Penetration Under Static Pressure

Provide aluminum windows that do not evidence water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331at a minimum static-
air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less
than 600 Pa.
12.3 Submittals
A. General
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the submittals listed
here after in this Article in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract
“Submittal Procedures”.
B. Action Submittals
1. Qualification Data
For manufacturer and coating applicator.
2. Product Data:
Include fabrication details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
3. Product Schedule For aluminum windows.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
4. Shop Drawings For aluminum windows.
a Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
b Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by manufacturer.
c Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for
draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.
d Include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
5. Fabrication Sample
Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made from 300-mm lengths
of full-size components and showing details of the following:
a Joinery.
b Anchorage.
c Expansion provisions.
d Glazing.
6. Samples for Color Selection

Color Chips of factory-applied color finishes.
7. Samples of each hardware piece to be used
8. Warranty
Draft of warranty certificate or form that be will submitted by manufacturer at time
of Substantial Completion.
C. Informational Submittals
1. Product Test Reports: Copies of test reports available with manufacturer
performed by a qualified testing agency, for submitted aluminum windows.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 118
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Product certificates: Signed and sealed by manufacturer and coating applicator

attesting that aluminum windows provided for the project comply with
requirements specified.
3. Maintenance Data: For aluminum windows to be included in Project's
maintenance manual.

A. Compliance Standard
Provide aluminum windows that are fabricated according to the requirements of BS
4873
B. Aluminum Windows Fabricator
Shall be employing CNC automated aluminum fabrication equipment, holding valid
ISO 9001 certification and authorized by windows systems manufacturer to produce
his system for not less than 10 years.
C. Installer Qualification
Certified by manufacturer of aluminum system or installation shall be manufacturer’s
trained experienced staff.
D. Qualifications of Aluminum Finish Applicator
Recommended by Aluminum windows fabricator and holding valid Quail-coat
certification.
E. Project Meetings
Conduct meetings on Project site to coordinate the works of aluminum windows with
the works of other trades and with the works of other aluminum works manufacturers,
where the work is divided between more than one manufacturer or subcontractor.
F. Copies
Furnish copies of all meeting minutes to Engineer’s information.
12.5 Project Conditions

A. Field Measurements
Verify dimensions of actual rough openings for aluminum windows by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Established Dimensions
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field
measurements.
C. Constrcution Coordination
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
D. Where use of sub-frames is necessary to adjust rough opening dimensions and install
aluminum windows, provide, at no extra cost to Employer, extruded aluminum sub-
frames to adjust rough opening dimensions. Where exposed, match finish of aluminum
window and of mill finish where concealed from view.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 119
______________________________________________________________________________
12.6 Warranty
A. Special Assembly Warranty
Warranty certificate or form prepared, signed and sealed in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace aluminum windows that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
B. Failures
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components to function properly.
C. Warranty Period
Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Special Warranty for Aluminum Finish
As specified “Fluorocarbon - Powder Aluminum Openings Finish”.
E. Special Warranty for Glass: “Glass Glazing”.
12.7 Part 2 - Products
12.7.1 Manufacturers
A. Proposed Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with specifications and other contract requirements, the
products that may be incorporated into the Work.
1. Aluminum Extruders
a. Cable
b. Aluminum
d. Equal and approve unnamed manufacturer.
12.7.2 Materials
A. Aluminum
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 / B 209M.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 / B 221M.
3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
12.7.3 Framing Systems

A. Aluminum Extruded Window Profiles, General
1. Design:
Thermal-broken profiles for opening frame of windows and non-thermally-broken for
sash or ventilator profiles:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 120
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Thermal Breaks: High-performance plastic (polyamide) connectors separate

aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the
interior.
b. Profiles for opening frame shall overlap wall of installation face, otherwise
provide aluminum architraves of matching finish.
2. Design: Non-thermally broken profiles for ventilator or sash.
3. Alloy and Temper: As recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than strength and
corrosion resistance of alloy and temper 6063T5.
4. Thickness: Not less than 2.00-mm thick at any location for the mainframe and sash
profiles and not less than 1.00-mm thick for covers, beads and retainers.
5. Formation: Shall include special grooves and channels for housing weather-stripping.
6. Width: Provide medium aluminum profiles 89-mm wide.
7. Depth:
a. Main Frame: According to system and as necessary to accommodate components
of the aluminum window system
b. Sash: According to system and as necessary to accommodate the double
insulating glass unit used for the window.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel.
1. Reinforcement
Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 3.00 mm thick, reinforce interior
with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners
Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being
fastened, as appropriate.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories
Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Reinforcing Members
Aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; provide sufficient strength to with stand
design pressure indicated.
E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping
Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing
under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when aluminum window
is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping: Elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864.
2. Material: EPDM.
F. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping
Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool pile and resin impregnated backing
fabric.
G. Replaceable Weather Seals
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 121
______________________________________________________________________________
H. Sealant
For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide permanently elastic, Non-
shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size
and movement.
I. Additional Requirements:
1. Provide aluminum profiles that extend to overlay edges of opening jambs, sills
and heads and form continues cover or architraves, otherwise provide set-on
architraves.
2. Furnish opening profiles of opened wipe holes to drain rain water to the
outside.
3. Furnish all necessary trims and bead profiles.
12.7.4 Glazing
A. Glass and Glazing Materials
1. Glazing unit for each type of aluminum windows is indicated on Drawings.
2. Refer to Section "Glass Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements
applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
B. Glazing System
Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated in "Glass Glazing."
C. Bond-Breaker Tape
Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants
will not develop adhesion.
12.7.5 Insect Screens

A. General
Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect
screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window.
For sliding windows, provide a special track in main frame for sliding screen to operate
on and provide all necessary hardware for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames
Manufacturer’s standard profiles. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or
corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing
edge of frame.
1. Extruded-Aluminum or Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross
Braces: Not less than 1.00-mm wall thickness.
2. Finish: Match aluminum window members.
C. Aluminum Wire Fabric
1.1-by-1.3-mm mesh of 0.28-mm- diameter, coated aluminum wire.
Wire-Fabric Finish: Black.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 122
______________________________________________________________________________
D. Wickets:
Provide hinged wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for durability during
handling.
12.7.6 Hardware
A. General
Provide exposed hardware fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel complying with
AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to
smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to
accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional
contact with other metals.
Aluminum Hardware: Extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum. Finish of exposed aluminum

hardware to match finish of windows.
B. Locks and Latches

Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction
indicated and operated from the inside only.
C. Roller Assemblies Low-friction design

Refer to hardware set of sliding windows for other requirements.
D. Limit Devices
Provide limit devices as specified hereafter designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening.
E. Horizontal-Sliding Windows
Provide the following operating hardware
1. Sash Rollers: Stainless-steel, lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon tires.
2. Sash Lock: Spring-loaded, snap-type lock at jambs; one per sash.
3. Sash Lock: Spring-loaded plunger lock with keeper on meeting rail; one per
sash.
4. Removable Lift-Out Sash: Design windows and provide with tamperproof,
key-operated adware to permit removal of sash from inside for cleaning.
Provide keyed alike locks that can be operated with one key.
F. Projected Awning Windows
Provide the following operating hardware:
1. Hinge: 1-pair of aluminum butt hinge of matching finish as windows.
2. Handle: Outward operating handle located at mid of top rail of sash or
ventilator.
3. Limit Device: Concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar limit device;
located on jamb of each ventilator.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 123
______________________________________________________________________________
12.7.7 Accessory Materials

A. Joint Sealants
For installation at perimeter of aluminum windows, paintable Acrylic/polyurethane
sealants as specified in "Joint Sealants".
B. Isolation Tape
Proprietary prefabricated pressure-sensitive tapes or foam pads specially produced to
prevent electrolytic reaction between aluminum and dissimilar metals or cementitious
surfaces of opening jambs.
1. Provide tapes that are warranted for not less than 10 years.
12.7.8 Fabrication
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for
assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Framing Connections:
1. Pressed connections in hydraulic aluminum forming machines to produce
accurate neat connections that are mitered at 45 degrees.
2. Reinforcing Brackets/Connection angles: Prefabricated from an aluminum alloy.
3. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration
and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
C. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or
ventilator framing.
D. Window Opening Frame (Main Frame): Provide thermal broken frames.
E. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
1. Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide operable sash with a double row of
sliding weather stripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weather
stripping in meeting or jamb stiles, as required to meet specified performance
requirements. Provide compression-type weather stripping at perimeter of each
movable panel where sliding-type weather stripping is not appropriate.
F. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
G. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow
for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal
expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
H. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical
and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in "Glass Glazing"
I. Glazing Stops: Provide Snap-On glazing stops coordinated with "Glass Glazing" and
glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.
12.7.9 Aluminum Finish

A Hyper durable fluorocarbon powder coating as specified “Fluorocarbon-powder
Aluminum Openings Finish”.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 124
______________________________________________________________________________
12.8 Part 3 - Execution
12.8.1 Examination
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness
of sill plate, and installation clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water
and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather
tight window installation.
1. Masonry Surfaces
2. Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction Debris.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
12.8.2 Installation
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding
thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper
relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weather tight construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and
moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action
by applying protection tape as specified or installing nonconductive spacers as
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion
by applying tape as specified to contact surfaces.
F. Determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12.8.3 Adjusting, Cleaning, and Protection

A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, insect screens, hardware, and accessories for a
tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight
closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with
manufacturers written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
Construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 125
______________________________________________________________________________
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact
window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 126
SECTION 13– TERMITE CONTROL
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 13 - TERMITE CONTROL

A. Soil treatment with termiticide.
13.1.1 Performance Requirements

A. Termiticide Treatment
Provide termiticide to prevent infestation of termites including, but not limited to,
subterranean termites and white ants.
B. Service Life of Soil Treatment
Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than 10 years
against infestation of subterranean termites.
13.1.2 Submittals
A. General
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the listed here after
in this Article in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract.
B. Action Submittals
1. Qualification data of manufacturer.
2. Product Data: For termiticide; include copy of EPA label for product used.
3. Detailed method statement describing the methodology maintained in applying
each type of termite control applied under this section.
4. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is
completed, submit report for Employer's record information, including the
following:
a. Date and time of application.
b. Moisture content of soil before application.
c. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
d. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
e. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
f. Areas of application.
g. Water source for application.
C. Warranty
Draft of special warranty specified in this Section that will be submitted by
manufacturer at date of Substantial Completion.
D. Informational Submittals
1. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product
manufacturer.
2. Installer Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products.
3. Manufacturer’s recommendations that need to be included in maintenance
manual.
E. Reference Standards and Codes
1. Provide termite control product that is registered in Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) in United States of America (Registered Label).
2. Formulation and application according to other equivalent or counterpart
registration systems acceptable to Engineer may also be used.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 127
______________________________________________________________________________
F. Source Limitations
Obtain termite control products through one source from a single manufacturer for
each product.
13.1.3 Project Conditions

A. Environmental Limitations
To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated. Do not treat soil
while precipitation is occurring. Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B. Post warning signs in areas of application of termite control materials.
13.1.4 Coordination
A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and
concreting operations.
13.1.5 Warranty
A. Special Warranty
Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that
termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
infestation of subterranean termites and white ants. If subterranean termite activity
or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace
damage caused by termite infestation.
B. Warranty Period
10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
13.1.6 Maintenance Service

A. Continuing Service
Beginning at Date of Taking Over by Employer, provide 24 months continuing
service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of
termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period; and terms for future
renewal options.
13.2.1 Manufacturers
A. Proposed Manufacturers and Products
Subject to compliance with specifications and other Contract requirements, the
products that may be incorporated into the Work.
B. Termiticides
Equal and approved unnamed manufacturer.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 128
______________________________________________________________________________
13.2.2 Soil Treatment

A. Termiticide
Provide an EPA-registered termiticide in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent
termite infestation of but not limited to, subterranean termites and white ants.
B. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum
termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-
Registered Label or to other registration system accepted by Engineer during submittal
stage.
13.3.1 Examination
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and
foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite
control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
13.3.2 Preparation
A. General
Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction in
Pakistan and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning
application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood
cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes,
formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation
Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment
effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except
previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides shall not be applied
before placing compacted fill under slabs.
C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer.
13.3.3 Applying Soil Treatment

A. Application
Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified
concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the
following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated
zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment
evenly.
1. Treat soil that will not be saturated with water above water table after stopping of
dewatering, at the following locations:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 129
______________________________________________________________________________
Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: underground-supported slab construction,

including pile caps, footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall
treatment.
2. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
3. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of
foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing
pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers;
also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil
washout around footings.
4. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat
adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases.
Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on
fill or ground.
5. Masonry: Treat voids.
6. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until
formed-on ground-slabs or ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier
according to EPA Registered Label instructions.
D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 130
SECTION 14– CAR PARK CURBS AND WALKWAYS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 14 - CAR PARK CURBS AND WALKWAYS

Curbs and walkways to be constructed on top of reinforced concrete slab in car park
floors.
1. Curbs: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete.
2. Walkways: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete.
3. Finish: Post-applied colored exposed-based traffic coating, or resinous floor coating.
14.1.1 Submittals
A General
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the submittals listed
here after in this Article in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the
Contract.
B Action Submittals
Unless otherwise submitted and approved under related Sections.
1. Product Data
For each material or product used in the work.
2. Typical Details
a. For formwork, covering each case of rounds and curvatures.
b. Typical reinforcement details.
c. Typical contraction and isolation joint details.
d. Mix design.
3. Mix Design
Mix design to ensure inclusion of minimum cement content, and fibrous
reinforcement.
C Informational Submittals
1. Mix Design: Prepared by specialized ready mix supplier.
2. Method Statement: Detailing the sequential steps.
14.1.2 Quality Assurance

Mock-up for one walkway with curved curb should be made.
14.2.1 Formwork
Formwork (Shuttering) is temporary support as a mould for fresh concrete, in which
concrete is poured and cast in the desired shape and gain initial strength, hardened and
matured. All concrete pours need to be contained, to hold the concrete in place until it
hardens sufficiently to hold its own shape.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 131
______________________________________________________________________________
14.2.2 Reinforcement
Walkways Reinforcement: One layer of steel fabric; 10-mm-diameter deformed steel
bars @200 mm in both directions will be used.
Curb Reinforced: 6-mm stirrups @ 200 mm intervals and 4 bars 16-mm diameter; one
bar at each corner.
14.2.3 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Cast-in-place concrete is the preferred choice for concrete pavements. The concrete is
typically transported to site in an unhardened state, often using a ready mixed concrete
truck.
14.2.4 Curing
Dissipative temporary white compound should be used.
14.2.5 Sealant Filled Joints

A General: Shall be detailed and erected as indicated on Drawings “Joint Sealants” and
the Standard Specifications referenced there-in.
B Joint Filler: Polyurethane compressible joint filler as specified, Section “Cast-in-
Place Concrete” shall be used.
C Sealant Joints: Colored traffic use polysulphide joint sealant as specified in, Section
“Joint Sealants”.
14.2.6 Ancillary Materials

A Fibrous Reinforcement:
100% virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no Reprocessed olefin
materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use as concrete
secondary reinforcement. Proportion shall be in accordance with the written
manufacturer instruction of the manufacturer.
Specific Gravity: 0.91. 2. Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm².
B Bonding Agent
ASTM C1059, acrylic polymer based.
C Recycled rubber aggregate can be used in curbs and walkways, subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
14.2.7 Mix Designs

A Mixes are to be designed in laboratory.
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 10 mm.
2. 2. Minimum Cement Content: 280 Kg/m3.
3. 3. Compressive Strength: 300 Kg/m3 after 28 days.
4. 4. Water/Cement Ratio: 0.45, maximum.
5. 5. Synthetic fiber will be added to the mix.
B One Layer of 10-mm steel fabric reinforced.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 132
______________________________________________________________________________
14.3.1 Execution, General

Execution requirements if each work or trade shall be same as specified in related
Specification Section for the work or the trade.
14.3.2 Curbs and Walkways

A Curbs: External edges will be chamfered to details.
B Walkways
1. Embedded curb with chamfer to external edge.
2. Height: 150 mm.
3. Joints at Interface with walls: Sealants filled joints.
4. Exposed surface of walkways shall have steel trowel manual finish, and will be
leveled to a maximum tolerance of 2 mm per m of uniform slope, maximum 6.00-
mm in each length.
14.3.3 Finish
Colored epoxy-based traffic coating to exposed surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 133
SECTION 15– EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBILIES
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 15 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

This section includes
A Architectural joint systems for expansion joints.

B Prefabricated proprietary movement joint profiles
Prefabricated proprietary movement joint profiles includes within tile and paving
floor finishes are not part of the work of this Section and are covered with, Section
“Cement-Based Screed” Sections covering tile and paving Sections.
C Definitions
1. Maximum Joint Width
Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its designed
function without damaging its functional capabilities.
2. Minimum Joint Width
Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its
designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.
3. Movement Capability
Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest widths of a
joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a
percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.
4. Nominal Joint Width
The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the joint
system is installed.
15.1.1 Performance Requirements and Selection Criteria

A Seismic Requirements
Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 edition, Zone 2A.
B Selection Criteria for Heavy Traffic Areas Generally including, but not limited to,
car parks:
1. Movement
Selected model shall have the capability to handle both thermal and seismic
movements of the building.
2. Joint-Gap Size
Selected model Does shall have the correct dimensions to straddle the designed
joint-gap.
3. Load Capacity
DIN 1055: Part 3: Loading of Fork Lift Trucks and Standard Vehicles.
4. Height
To be coordinated with height of finish flooring.
5. Selection Criteria Other Areas and Buildings
Same as specified before in previous two Clauses but considering the extreme
loading case for each area and application.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 134
______________________________________________________________________________
6. Where more than architectural joint systems are selected at the same joint along
different floors, the movement capability of different systems and the technique
of handling the movement are to be coordinated between different systems.
15.1.2 Submittals
A General: Contractor shall prepare and submit to the approval of Engineer the
submittals listed here after in this Article in accordance with requirements of
Conditions of the Contract and Section “Submittal Procedures”.
B Action Submittals:
1. Manufacturer’s Standard Details: Sections, details, splices, block-out
requirement, and attachments to other work.
2. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, entire route of each
joint system and elevations. Where joint systems change planes, provide
isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.
3. Architectural Joint System Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of
the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:
a. Manufacturer and model number for each joint system.
b. Joint system location cross-referenced to Drawings.
c. Nominal joint width.
d. Movement capability.
e. Classification as thermal or seismic.
f. Materials, colors, and finishes.
g. Product options.
h. Fire-resistance ratings.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.
a. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and
finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.
5. Samples for Verification: For each type of architectural joint system
indicated.
a. Full width by one production length long, for each system required.
6. Special Warranty: Sample of manufacturer's special warranty that will be
submitted by manufacturer at time of substantial completion.
C Informational Submittals
1. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by manufacturer for current products.

A Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
Architectural joint systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to
Section "Product Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except
with Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 135
______________________________________________________________________________
D Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide architectural joint system and fire-

barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UL
2079 or E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having
Jurisdiction.
1. Floor- to-Floor and Soffit-to-Soffit Assemblies: All assemblies are fire rated.
2. Floor-to-Wall Assemblies: All assemblies are fire rated.
3. Wall-to-Wall Assemblies: Assemblies in fire rated walls are to be fire rated.
4. Fire resistance rating of joint assembly is to be identical to fire rating of the
construction to which joint assembly will be installed.
15.1.4 Coordination
On Structural Shop Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate and confirm
that the joint width or gap indicated on structural shop drawings matches with selected
architectural joint system.
15.1.5 Warranty
A Architectural Joint Systems Warranty
Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace without limitations, all or any part of the architectural joint systems specified
in this section which fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
B All architectural joint systems are guaranteed to be of good material and
workmanship and free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which
it is intended.
C Warranty shall also include:
1. Installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective metal fabrications.
2. Metal, sealants, fasteners, and all other components of architectural joint systems
specified in this section.
D Failure includes, but is not limited to:
1. Deterioration in architectural joint systems materials and coatings; other than due
to normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in glass, sealants, fixings,
coverings and other components of the work.
2. Failure to withstand structural movement.
E Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
15.2.1 Materials
A Aluminum: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209M, Alloy
6061-T6 for sheet and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be
placed in contact with cementitious materials.
2. Mill Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: As fabricated, unspecified).
B Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed
in metal frames. Provide seals from EPDM or Santoprene.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 136
______________________________________________________________________________
C Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed rectangular elastomeric extrusions

having internal baffle system and designed to function under compression.
D Strip Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions
having an internal baffle system and secured in or over a joint by a metal locking rail.
E Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a
prepackaged Aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete
substrates.
F Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling,
designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and
to meet performance criteria for required rating period.
G Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, EPDM, of minimum thickness
0.315 mm or Santoprene of manufacturer’s standard thickness.
H Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers,
and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required
for complete installations.
15.2.2 Architectural Joint Systems, General

A General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in
adjacent surfaces.
1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install
with hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other
materials.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints,
corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide
continuous joint systems.
3. Color shall be as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
B Design Architectural joint systems for the following size and movement
characteristics:
1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Movement Capability: Plus or minus 50 percent (± 50%) unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Type of Movement: Thermal.
C Water Barrier: Provide water barriers at exterior joints and where called for on
drawings. Provide drainage fittings where required to protect underlying equipment,
or apparatus.
15.2.3 Joint Systems, General
A General: Provide Architectural joint systems that satisfy the performances and other
technical requirements specified throughout this Section.
B Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings. Contractor shall confirm that
the structural width indicated on his submitted shop drawings matches and concurs
with movement capability and thicknesses/dimensions of system components in
different stages of action.
C Height of Joint System: To be coordinated with height of finish flooring.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 137
______________________________________________________________________________
D Sightline: Sightline of selected model shall not exceed sightline of the basis of design
product. Where no basis of design shown, Contractor shall obtain the written
approval of Engineer for sight dimension of each employed joint system.
E Joint Frames Material: Extruded aluminum of mill finish where embedded or
concealed and colored baked-on finish where exposed to view.
F Joint Capping Material: Where Architectural joint systems are inclusive of joint
caps, joint capping material shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Satin finish No. 6.
G Barriers: Provide separate barriers for fire and moisture.
1. Fire Barriers
a. All floor-to-floor joint systems shall include fire barriers to provide same fire
resistance rating of the fire rated construction within which barrier will be
installed (For example floor-to-floor joints within reinforced concrete
suspended slabs between floors shall satisfy minimum 2- hour fire resistance
rating as the rating of the concrete slab) .
b. Provide blanket-type fire barriers.
2. Moisture Barrier
Floor-to-floor joints systems and wall-to-wall joint systems within external
building skin walls and roof-to-roof joint systems are to be inclusive of moisture
barriers as specified.
H Architectural Joint System Seal Materials: EPDM or Santoprene. Provide models
that have easy-to-clean, easy-to-install snap-fit flush seals with no dirt traps.
I Recessed Joint Systems: Recessed types/models that allow deferred installation of
ceramic tile, marble, stone or thin finishes adhered to screeds designed to be fully
integrated seamless floors, walls and suspended ceilings constructions.
J Floor-to-Wall Joint Systems: Floor-to-wall joint systems from same manufacturer
of floor-to floor assemblies, same series, configuration, movement capability and
finish material.
K Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint System: To include aluminum framing and vinyl seal of
color selected by Engineer. Finish of aluminum is to match finish of exposed ceiling
suspension system. Coordinate with suspended ceiling system.
L Soffit-to-Soffit Joint Systems: Compression seal. EPDM seals cast in or
Compressed, lubricant adhesive adhered. Applications include, but shall not be
limited to, exposed soffit to soffit joints in exposed suspended slabs, beams and the
like.
15.3.1 Examination
Examine surfaces and block-outs where architectural joint systems will be installed for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
15.3.2 Preparation
A Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written
instructions.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 138
______________________________________________________________________________
B Repair concrete slabs and block-outs using manufacturers recommended repair grout
of compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings.
C Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction
indicated and to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.
D Cast-in Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete.
15.3.3 Installation
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
A Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint
systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap
due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Engineer where
discrepancies occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal
withoutbuckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout block-out as required for continuous
frame support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 75
mm from each end and not more than 600 mm o.c.
B Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to
comply withmanufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of
end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.
2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or
heat-weldfield-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with
adhesive orpressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
C Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by
manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing compression seals.
D Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated
termination devices.
E Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of architectural joint
assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with
assembly performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire
resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 139
______________________________________________________________________________
15.3.4 Protection
A Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due
to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install
temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial
Completion of the Work.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 140
SECTION 16– PLUMBING WORKS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 16 - PLUMBING WORKS

16.1 Part 1 -Particular Specifications
This section of the Contract involves the supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of the hot and cold water plumbing, firefighting, gas supply sanitary drainage and rain water
piping services proposed for the project.
16.1.1 Scope of Work
The work embraced by this Specification covers the supply, delivery on site, installation,
testing and commissioning of the plumbing and drainage services, installation of the
building in accordance with this Specification. This includes:
A. Internal and underground sanitary drainage system
B. Hot and Cold water system
C. Water Storage tanks, pipe work, fittings and accessories
D. Internal Natural Gas piping
E. All external services such as
F. Water supply system
G. Sewerage network
H. Storm water drainage
I. Natural gas supply
J. Installation of all sanitary wares and fittings including flush tanks, water closets,
urinal, showers, water taps, wash basins and sinks
K. Electrical equipment and installation work
L. Acoustic treatment and vibration control
M. All interfacing work with other trades including electrical, fire alarm/
protection, air-conditioning and mechanical ventilation, etc.
N. Painting and labeling of pipe work and equipment
O. Provision of all hold down bolts, spigots and struts required to be built in during
construction
P. Testing and commissioning
16.1.2 System Description- Water Supply System
The Water supply system shall as follows.
16.1.2.1 External
The contractor shall connect to the main water supply, install a main loop, provide
connections to the building, all necessary valves with chambers fittings and other
accessories as may be required to maintain a fully functional, balanced system.
16.1.2.2 Internal
A fully functional system, underground and overhead water tanks, water supply pumps,
complete piping, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be provided.
A fully operational system shall be provided for the whole block, complete with pumps,
tanks, pipe works, controls, conduits, wiring etc. in full compliance with all relevant
specifications and requirements.
This shall consist of but not limited to the following:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 141
______________________________________________________________________________
1. Cold water supply system

2. Connection from water main loop running near the building to underg round
tank. This shall deem to include all necessary valves and fittings. The water
tanks shall be complete with the following items;
3. High and low level alarms
4. Water level indicator
5. Vent pipe, overflow, drain off, access manhole, all required valve, etc.
6. Supply and installation of water supply pumps and pump rooms to supply
water from underground to overhead tanks.
7. Complete hot and cold water pipe work with taps and relevant sanitary fixtures
and fittings at toilets/ kitchens etc. as indicated in the drawings.
8. Water supply piping from overhead tank to all floors including all
accessories as a part of gravity feed system.
9. Providing, fixing, jointing and testing Polypropylene Random (PPR) pipes
make "Popular" or approved equivalent pressure pipe for cold water as per
DIN 8077-8078 for pipes and DIN 16962,PN25 for fittings (polyfusion welded
joints) inside building including fittings and specials (sockets, tees, elbows,
bends, crosses, reducers, adaptor, plugs and union etc.) supported on walls or
suspended from roof slab or run in channels including pipe hangers, supports,
cutting and making good the holes, complete in all respects.
10. Standard Sizes:1/2", 3/4", 1"
16.1.3 Sanitary and Water Drainage Systems
The Contractor shall supply and install the complete sanitary plumbing system. This
shall deem to include all fittings, sanitary fixture, fittings and accessories etc. The
conceptual design of the system is stated as follow:
Sewage and waste water system shall be double stack and waste water from toilets
and kitchens will be discharged by gravity to ground floor from where that will
eventually be connected to the inspection chambers (manholes) outside the building.
Connection of last inspection chamber(s) to main sewer network running near the
building. This shall be made by the Contractor with the consent and approval of the
engineer in charge.
Providing, fixing , cutting, jointing and testing (unplasticed) uPVC piping conforming
to ISO 3633:1991 (wall thickness=3.2 mm) including uPVC fittings with solvent cement
jointing, make "Popular Type B" or approved equal , clamping to walls and ceiling ,
hangers, supports, cutting through walls and providing sleeves through concrete slabs for
pipelines and pipe fittings of the required diameter:
Standard Sizes: 2", 3", 4"
High Density Polyethylene (HD/PE)
Pipes for Water Supply ½”-24” dia
16.1.3.1 Schedule of Materials and Equipment

The following schedule consists of the relevant materials and equipment necessary for
the completion of all sanitary and plumbing works.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 142
______________________________________________________________________________
16.1.3.2 Water Supply System

Following are the common types of overhead and underground tanks for water storages:
1. PVC Water Storage Tanks
2. Brick Water Storage Tanks
3. RCC Water Storage Tanks
Following are the common types of Pipes
1. Polyethylene pipes for supply to under and overhead tanks.
2. Polyethylene pipes complying ISO 4427:1996 & DIN 8074, 8075.
3. PPRC (Polypropylene Random Copolymer Type III tubing to DIN 8077, 8078 BSS
4991 & 5174 (for water supply to toilets/kitchen).
16.1.3.3 Soil and Waste Drainage
1. UPVC complying BS 5255/4514 (Soil, Waste, and vents).
2. RCC pipes complying with ASTM C60.
16.1.3.4 Storm Water Drainage
UPVC class B complying with BS 5255/4514
16.1.3.5 Gas Supply System

Galvanized iron (G.I) pipes
16.1.3.6 Pumps and Valves

1. Bronze bodies and trim, screwed connection up to 50mm dia.
2. Cast iron or cast steel bodies, bronze trim, flanged connections for greater than
50mm dia.
3. Non-slam type check valves at discharge side of water supply pumps.
4. Submersible centrifugal pump sets for water supply from underground to overhead
tank.
16.1.3.7 Floor Traps/Floor Gully, Gully Traps Concrete Sump & Chamber Covers
1. UPVC bodies with stainless steel grating
2. Cast iron body and frame.
16.2 Part 2 - Underground and Drainage System.

16.2.1 General
The work includes the supply and installation of the whole of the entire underground
sanitary drainage system including inspection chamber, concrete sumps, gully traps,
grease interceptors, drain lines, all frames and covers, excavation. Concreting, piling,
backfilling, re- installment of existing ground surfaces, and connections to the last
manhole, all internal components of inspection chambers and sumps shall also be included.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 143
______________________________________________________________________________
16.2.2 Installation
16.2.2.1 Excavation
All excavation shall be carried out as necessary for the construction of the works.
Excavation for pipe trenches shall not be less than 600mm wider than the diameter of
the pipes and the ground near beds shall be carefully graded.
All excavation shall be kept free from water at all times by pumping or temporary
drainage. In the event of the excavations being made deeper than necessary they shall
be filled to the proper level with lean concrete.
16.2.2.2 Backfilling
All concrete shall be thoroughly set before refilling is commenced. In backfilling the
excavation, only selected hard dry material free from lumps exceeding 75mm in
size and from stones shall be used in the initial refilling and shall be carefully placed
next to the permanent work and well packed and well rammed in layers of 150mm. The
remainder of the excavations shall be filled in with the excavated material, in layers
of not more than 300mm deep. Each layer shall be thoroughly rammed before the next
layer is placed. Surplus soil shall be piled on top of the filling to the extent of possible
subsidence. All refilled trenches shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
16.2.2.3 Pipeline Setting Out

Excavation for trenches shall be to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and
beds as specified. The trench bottom shall be of sufficient width to allow adequate
working space for pipe layers and jointers but beyond these requirements, the width
must be kept to a minimum.
16.2.2.4 Concreting Works

All Concreting works shall comply with specification of concrete given for Structural
works.
All drain lines passing under buildings and driveways are to be surrounded with concrete
which shall be carried up from the bed in a square section with a minimum of 150mm
thickness over the barrel of the pipes. Traps and gullies shall be properly bedded on and
surround with concrete.
16.2.3 Pipe Gradient
Pipe gradient for all sanitary drain lines and waste pipes shall be as shown on the
drawings or otherwise indicated below:
Pipes Diameter Gradient
100 mm (4”) 1 in 20 to 1 in 60
150 mm (6”) 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
225 mm (9”) 1 in 40 to 1 in 150
300 mm (12”) & above 1 in 150 to 1 in 250
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 144
______________________________________________________________________________
16.2.4 Pipe Laying

The pipe shall be laid singly with the whole length of the barred of each pipe on a solid
concreter bed. No pipes shall be joined together before having been laid.
Flexible jointed pipes shall be laid completely embedded in granular material to a
thickness of at least 100mm all around unless soil conditions and loads are indicated
otherwise. Granular material for bedding shall be of such ranging from 3mm to 12mm or
of free running coarse sand.
Socket shall face up the gradient. The spigot o each pipe shall be well driven home into
the socket of the pipe previously laid and the joint completed as specified and the barrel
of the pipe cleared of any obstruction before the next pipe is laid. Care shall be taken that
there is no irregularity in the inert of the joints.
The level of each pipe shall be tested by a straight edge laid in the invert of the pipe
previously laid and in the nearest level peg. If the bottom of the trench has been taken too
low, it shall be made up with concrete or cement mortar or other approved granular
material.
Pipes of 300mm/225mm diameter where shown laid through or under walls, shall be
protected by means of sleeves in such a manner that the weight of the wall shall not bear
on the pipes.
16.2.5 Inspection Chambers (Manhole)

The maximum distance between inspection chambers shall not be more than 100ft.
inspection chambers shall be of concrete construction with suitable C.I. cover.
16.2.6 Concrete Sumps

Unless otherwise shown on drawings, concrete sumps shall have minimum internal
dimension of 900mm in length and 700mm in width.
16.2.7 Pipe Sleeves
Pipe sleeves of an approved type shall be provided at all locations where pipe pass
through wall, beams, floors. Where sleeves or piping pass through reinforced concrete
walls below the water table, puddle flange shall be provided.
16.2.8 Tests
16.2.8.1 Pipe Work
Pipe work shall be hydrostatically tested to a water head of 1.2m at the high end and not
more than 3.0m at the low end shall show no appreciable loss of water after elapse of
four hours. Backfilling shall not commence until testing has been conducted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
16.2.8.2 Manholes and Inspection Chamber
All manhole and inspection chambers shall be tested for water tightness by filling
with water and observing for any drop in water level over a period of at least 4 hours.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 145
______________________________________________________________________________
16.2.8.3 Flow Test

Appropriate flow test shall be carried out to verify gradient of the underground pipe
installed.
16.3 Part 3 - Internal Sanitary System
16.3.1 Piping Installation
16.6.2.1 Pipe Support

All pipe work shall be fixed at least 50mm away from the finished surface of the
supporting structure. All fixing, hangers, holder bats, brackets, etc, shall be of mild
steel and shall be given the same finish as the piping.
Vertical pipes shall be parallel to walls or column lines and shall be straight and
plumb. Horizontal pipes shall be graded in the direction of flow as required.
Soil, waste or vent pipes shall be clamped or fixed at 1.8m centers split ring or clevis type
hangers and clamps.
16.6.2.2 Vent Pipe and Stack

When more than one trap is connected to a discharge pipe or stack, each trap shall be
provided with a vent pipe of not less than 50mm in diameter.
Each vent pipe shall be constructed upwards individually or be connected to a main
vent stack. The top end of the vent pipe or main vent stack shall either terminate as
high as the discharge stack or connect to the discharge stack at a point not less than
150mm above the top of the highest soil sanitary appliance or floor trap.
16.6.2.3 Termination of Discharge, Stack and Vent Stacks.

The top and of each discharge or vent stack shall project not less than 450mm above the
sleeves of a sloping roof or 150mm above a flat roof without a parapet, or in the case of
a flat roof with a parapet to the height of parapet above the roof. If the roof is used
for any purpose other than as a covering to the building, the discharge or vent stack
shall be extended at least 2.5m above the roof level.
16.6.2.4 Cleaning Eyes and Inspection Openings

Inspection and cleaning eyes shall be provided on soil, waste or soil and waste pipes
so as to provide access for the proper inspection and cleaning of the entire length of the
pipe. In all cases where the vertical stack of soil or soil and waste pipe extends 1.2m or
more above the ground level, an inspection opening of 200mm in length and 75mm
width fitted with a cover fixed to a flange with bolts and nuts shall be provided near the
foot of the stack.
16.3.2 Pipes Gradient

Pipe gradient for all horizontal sanitary plumbing piping shall be as shown on the drawings
or otherwise as indicated in the Table below:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 146
______________________________________________________________________________
PIPE DIAMETER GRADIENT

Diameter Gradient
32mm to 80mm 1:40
110mm 1:60
160mm 1:80
200 and above 1:100
All vent pipes shall have a minimum gradient of 1:100
16.3.3 Pipe Size

Pipe sizes for all horizontal sanitary and waste piping shall be as shown on drawings or
otherwise as indicated below.
CONNECTIONPIPE SIZE
Floor drain to floor drain110 mm (WC Compartment)
75mm (Shower)
Floor drain to floor trap75mm (WC Compartment)
75mm (Shower)
75mm (15m maximum) Planter to discharge pipe
110 mm (30m maximum)
160 mm (over 30m)
16.3.4 Traps
All inlets into a discharge pipe or discharge stack shall be properly trapped to prevent the
entry of foul air from the drainage system into the building.
16.3.5 Grating and Cover for Floor Trap and Waste

The grating and cover shall be constructed of stainless steel or bronze to the approval of the
Engineer.
16.4 Part 4 - Installation of Sanitary Appliances

16.4.1 Water Closet
Joints between spigot cast iron pipe and fixture outlets shall be made with yarn and
cement/ sand mortar not stronger than 1:2 and not weaker than 1:3 joints between un
plasticized PVC pipes and fixture shall be made with approved rubber seal ring joints.
The water closets shall be firmly bedded in cement mortar. Every pedestal water closet
pan shall be secured to the floor using stainless steel or nonferrous screws. The joining
of the outlet of the water closet pan to the branch drain-line or discharge pipe shall be
made by an approved type pan collar.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 147
______________________________________________________________________________
16.4.2 Flushing Cisterns

Flushing cisterns shall be firmly fixed to the wall by means of either bolts and nuts or
brackets. The flush pipe connecting a flushing cistern to a water closet shall be fixed
as straight as possible and shall not be less than 32mm in diameter if the bottom of the
cistern is fixed 1.5mm or more above the top of the water closet. The flush pipe shall
not be less than 38mm in diameter if the bottom of the cistern is fixed less than
1.5mm above the top of the water closet. Flush pipes from the cistern to a squat pan
shall be securely fixed to the wall. The Contractor shall apply a 12mm chromium plated
stopcock for each flushing cistern.
16.4.3 Bath Tub
The bath tub shall be bound to the earthing system of the building. A separate floor
waste shall be installed below the bath tub. Access opening shall be provided to reach the
underside of bath for maintenance.
16.4.4 Shower Mixer
Where shower mixer is of concealed type, pipe union shall be provided to allow for
connection to shower hose.
16.4.5 Waste Sanitary Appliances
Every waste sanitary appliance which is suspended shall be fixed to the wall by means
of brackets which are built or screwed into the wall. Every floor mounted waste sanitary
appliance shall be provided with pedestal, foot and leg. Any sink and wash basin may
be mounted on a cabinet or mounted on wall. Refer to architectural drawings for detail.
All fixing screwed shall be corrosion resistant. All joints between any waste sanitary
appliance and the abutting wall shall be water-tight.
Every waste sanitary appliance shall be provided with a waste filling trap for connection
to the waste pipe. The waste pipe shall connect to the floor trap above the water seal of
the trap.
Where a group of 3 or more wash basins are connected in series, loop venting is
required. However, the loop venting shall be terminated separately to the atmosphere.
The minimum diameter of shall be 25mm. The Minimum Internal Diameter of Waste Pipe
for each type of Sanitary Appliance si shown in the Table below.
Type of Appliance Minimum Internal Diameter of Waste Pipe
(mm)
Wash Basin 32
Sink (Single or double bowl) 40
Laboratory sink 40
Long bath/Shower Tray 40
Foot Bath 40
Wash Tub 50
Wash Trough/Custom-Made Sink 50
Drinking Fountain 50
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 148
______________________________________________________________________________
Minimum number of waste sanitary appliance allowed on each diameter of common waste
pipe for waste sanitary appliances connected in series is showm in the Table below.
Type of waste sanitary appliances Minimum number of waste sanitary
connected in series appliances allowed on common waste
Wash basin pipes
3
Sink (Single or double bowl) 2
Laboratory Sink 2
Drinking Fountain 12
Wash Trough/Custom-Made Sink 2
Wash Tub 2
16.4.6 Grab Bars:

Grab Bar posts and bars will be stainless steel. Grab bars purchased or installed shall
meet or exceed the applicable requirements of ANSI A117.1, ASTM F446, CSA B45
and CSA B651 standards.
The installed bars should be capable of withstanding the minimum of 500 lbs. 12” long
grab bars would be used for vertical installation only.
The screws of grab bras should be mounted into the wood stud, each at least 16” apart
for safe installation. A minimum of 1/8” hole is would be drilled for screws. Silicon
Caulk will be used to protect water penetration.
16.4.7 Surgical Scrub sinks
Surgical Scrub Sinks installed will be16 gauge stainless steel construction. They will
include 4˝-high backsplash, squared front and sides, will have removable access panel,
temperature mixing valve, and electronic-eye faucet including flat strainer, with p-trap and
tail piece. The standard model features will include deck-mount faucet and ADA-compliant
model features splash mount.
16.4.8 Shower Seat
Fold down Shower Seat will be made of Aluminum and Teak Wood. The seats would be
capable of bearing at least weight of 400 lbs.
4.9Plumbing Fittings and Accessories
The contractor shall supply and fix all plumbing fittings such as water faucets,
shower fittings, mixing valves, etc, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
connect to piping system. The contractor shall supply all fixing materials such as screws,
rawl plugs, union, collars, compression fittings, etc. as required.
16.5 Part 5 -Cold and Hot Water Supply

16.5.1 General
A complete cold & hot water supply system shall be supplied and installed in accordance
with the drawings and the requirements described hereunder.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 149
______________________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the satisfactory performance of the whole
water circulation system.
16.5.2 Water Service Connection
The Licensed Plumber shall apply for and make all necessary arrangements/inspections
with the Local Authorities for the water connection.
16.5.3 Piping Materials

All piping materials shall be of type/brands found in the list of approved fittings and
pipes for water service installation. Refer to “Pipe work materials” for water supply
piping.
16.5.4 Piping Joints
Pipe joints for the pipes shall be as follows.
PPR-C Piping Heat Fusion Welding as permanufacturer’s recommendations
16.5.5 Pipe Supports
16.5.5.1 Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to permit free
expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with mild steel clamps.
Where necessary to permit free movement for common group they shall be supported
from a common hanger bar fabricated from mild steel sections.
16.5.5.2 Underground water mains shall be supported on continuous concrete benching and thrust
blocks.
16.5.5.3 Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacing and as per
manufacture’s recommendations.
Pipe Dia Hanger Rod Dia Copper Pipe Max Spacing Steel Pipe Max Spacing
mm mm m m
Up to 25 6 2 2
32 to 50 10 2.5 2.7
80 to 100 12 2.5 2.7
125 to 150 16 3 3.6
200 to 300 19 3.6 5.3
Pipe Dia Hanger Rod Dia PRR-C Max Spacing UPVC Class D&E Pipe Max Spacing
mm mm m m
20 6 0.70 0.8
25 6 0.80 0.85
32 10 0.90 0.90
40 10 1.05 1.07
50 10 1.15 1.15
63 12 1.30 1.30
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 150
______________________________________________________________________________
16.5.6 Testing of Main

Before the main is concealed, it shall be tested for leak to twice its normal working pressure
or 690 Kpa, whichever is higher.
16.5.7 Sterilization of Main
After the pipe work has been tested and approved, but before it is coupled, it shall be
sterilized with a solution of chloride of lime.
16.5.8 Valves
All valves shall be suitable for the working pressure involved but not less than 1MPa.
Valves up to 50 mm diameter shall have bronze bodies and trim with screwed
connections. Valves greater than 50 mm diameter and above shall have cast ion or cast
steel bodies, bronze trim with flanged connections. Information on the Types of Valves
is provided in the Table below.
Stop Valves Stop valves shall be gate valves with non-rising stems,
renewable seats and cast iron or plastic hand wheel
Stop Cocks Stop cocks shall be chromium plated with renewable rubber
disc seats to British Standard. A stop cock shall be provided
to each water outlet point like basin, water cistern, bath tub and
sinks.
Strainers Strainers shall be Y-type with removable stainless steel basket.
Check Valve Check valve up to 50mm shall comply with BS 1953 Class
125 or 5154 (M). Check valve above 50mm shall comply
with BS 4090 Class 125 or BS 5153 (M)
16.5.9 Schedule of Valves

The contractor shall supply and install all valves to all fixtures as specified below.
WC Pan 25mm ball valve, similar to Ballo fix, with suitable 25mm union
piece for connection to flush valve or 12mm union piece for
connection to cistern.
Basin/sink Ball valve of size to suit distribution pipe for multi-basin
arrangement and 12mm bal valve for single-basin arrangement.
Kitchen Ball valve of size to suit each branch pipe.
16.5.10 Trap
All taps for the garden, planters and in each plant rooms shall be of the brass type.
Using otherwise mentioned all taps for sinks in kitchen, utilities rooms shall be or
chrome plated type.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 151
______________________________________________________________________________
16.5.11 Testing of Pipelines
All cold and hot water supply pipe work shall be subjected to a hydrostatically test
pressure of 12 bar or 1-1/2 items the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater.
The test period shall be two (2) hours during which no leakage is allowed.
16.5.12 Pipe Insulation (sound proofing)
The sound insulation of soil, waste, sanitary drainage and water pipes shall be from
Armawave 2540 acoustic lagging or equivalent, manufactured with an acoustic
isolation foam and a mass barrier to a total weight of not less than 5kg/m2.
The insulation should comply DIN insulation standards. Where pipes are located in a
wall or floor cavity, serves or passes through more than one sole-occupancy unit, the
sound insulation should achieve an (airborne) of not less than 25 dB if the adjacent
room is a kitchen or non-habitable room. If the adjacent room is a habitable room,
the sound insulation shall achieve an (airborne) of not less than 40 dB.
The acoustic insulation shall be fiber-free and dust-free. It should be tested to AS1530.3
to show compliance with the fire performance requirements. The acoustic insulation
shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s specifications. It should be cut to
size to neatly fit all pipe work, and incorporate overlaps on all joins. All joins shall be
secured with an appropriate foil tape.
16.6 Part 6 - Pipe Work and Fitting
16.6.1 General
The word ‘pipe work’ or ‘piping’ shall mean all pipes, drains, tubes, pipe fittings,
valves including hangers, brackets, anchors, expansion devices, sleeves, and all
accessories connected there to for the complete piping installation.
Pipelines accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc., shall have the same
working pressure rating as the associated pipe work.
All pipes and fittings supplied shall conform to relevant codes as specified in these
specifications.
Prior to any ordering or installation, the Contractor shall furnish the following information
for endorsement.
A Manufacturer for all pipes and fittings
B Specification and standards for all pipes and fittings:
16.6.2 Pipe Joints
16.6.2.1 Different materials Joint

For UN plasticized PVC pipes, all joints all shall be solvent weld/push fit joints made
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as per Clause 3 of this
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 152
______________________________________________________________________________
section and to the approval of the Engineer. Joints shall be made with proper pipe
fitting to BS 4346 and heating of for jointing sill not be permitted.
Joints between unplasticized PVC pipes and cast iron pipes shall be made with an
approved jointing ring.
16.6.2.2 Weld Joints on UPVC Pipes
Work un-plasticized PVC pipe work shall be solvent or push fit ring jointed as
recommended by the manufacturers and as detailed elsewhere in this Specification.
Where solvent welding is used, particular attention must be paid to preparation a
abrasive paper and spirit cleaner must be used. When applying solvent, heat shall be
avoided in order to prevent the cement drying before the chemical bond between the
two surfaces is completed. Mating surfaces shall be turned for even spread of the
solvent. Excessive cement shall be wiped off quickly.
Piping shall be supported from the building structure which shall support the sum of
the load of a water-filled pipe and a minimum of 120 kg applied at the point of hanging.
Vertical pipe work shall be supported at intervals of at least on per floor level.
Horizontal pipe work shall be supported by adjustable flat iron of clevis type hangers
hung by hot rolled steel rods of the following diameters and spacing, and as per
recommendations of pipe manufactures. For fifferent diameters pipes, the distance beyween
the supports and the diameter of the rod is shown below in theTable.
NORMAL DISTANGE BETWEEN DIAMETER
PIPE SUPPORTS OF ROD
25 mm 1.8m 10
32 mm 2.4m 10
40 mm 2.7m 10
50 mm 2.7m 10
65-80 mm 3.0m 12
110 mm 3.0m 16
160-200 mm 3.6m 18
16.6.4 Pipe Sleeves

Pipe sleeves shall be provided and installed by the Contractor for casting in where pipes
penetrate the concrete structure.
The minimum clearance between the pipe and pipe sleeve shall not be less than 25mm.
Sleeves through fire rated partitions or walls or floor shall be of galvanized wrought iron
pipe. The annular space of pipe sleeves shall be tightly packed with approved fire-
rated material.
Where sleeves occur in finished spaces, solid close fitted chrome plated steel plates
secured by screws shall be provided.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 153
______________________________________________________________________________
16.6.5 Pipe Work installation

All pipe work shall be installed to meet structural, architectural, and functional conditions
and shall not interfere with the work of other trades.
All pipe work shall be installed and supported so that it is free from excessive stresses due
to weight from its contents plus its own dead weight, dynamic forces due to liquid
movement, and expansion and contraction due to change in temperature.
Pipe work connected to the pumps shall be separately supported so as not to impose any
load on the pump casings.
16.6.6 Valves
16.6.6.1 General
All valves shall be of approved manufacture complying with the appropriate British
Standard and approved for the working pressure involved.
Valves shall be so installed as to be readily accessible for testing and maintenance. Valves
shall close in less than 5 seconds when operated at maximum possible speed from fully open
position.
Test cocks shall be provided at all locations shown on the drawing and the following
locations
a) 15mm diameter cock with hose bib attachment downstream of each flow
switch.
b) All valves in each instance shall be suitable in all respects for the class of service
and function.
c) All valves for all functions shall be identified by means of a tag or label which
shall clearly indicate the following;
a. Service.
b. Valve number.
16.6.6.2 Isolation Valves (Gate Valve)

Up to 50mm: Bronze gate to BS 5154 series ‘B’, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, inside
screw, union bonnet; female threaded (BS 21) connection; fitted with enameled metal and
hand wheel valves for working pressure above 16 bars shall be to BS 5154 PN 32 series
B
65 mm and above: Cast iron body to BS 5150, bolted bonnet; solid wedge disc and bronze
trim; inside screw, non-rising stem, flange connection (PN 16), fitted with cast iron hand
wheel valves for working pressure above 16 bars shall be of Class 300 cast steel wedge
gate valve with flanges to PN 25.
16.6.6.3 Check Valves
For valve size 65mm diameter and above, Provide silent check valves of the non-slam,
center-guided globe type. Valves shall be so designed such that closing action is
controlled by spring to return disc to seat before zero velocity and before reversal
of flow takes place in pipe line. Valves shall be provided with flanges to PN 16 and
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 154
______________________________________________________________________________
PN 25 (for valves with working pressure above 16 bars). Additonal check items are listed
below.
A Discs shall be free floating, center-guided and controlled by velocity of
flow without aid of grease or counter weight balance.
B Check valves shall be designed to prevent grinding of seat and disc after
assembly, with removable cap for inspection of bearings and disc movement.
C Valves shall be flanged (PN 16) cast iron body, 316 stainless steel trim,
spring and disc.
D Swing check valve to BS 5154 series ’B’ bronze with removable hinge pin and
screwed cap, suitable for operation in either horizontal or vertical position.
Threaded (BS 21) connection for 50mm and smaller. Flanged (PN 16)
connection for valves above 50mm. for valves above 16 bar working
pressure. It shall be of class 300 cast carbon steel swing check valve with
PN 25 flanges.
16.6.6.4 Pressure Reducing Valve Set
Each pressure reducing valve set shall be complete with pressure reducing or pressure
regulation valve, isolating valves, pressure gauges on inlet and outlet, pressure relief
valves and filter on inlet.
Each pressure reducing valve shall contain loading neoprene diaphragm and a full floating,
self-aligning, ignition resistant seat and shall be of the single stage, pressure reduction type
with provision for manual operation.
Valves shall be capable of operation and maintaining automatically the respective delivery
pressure and flow rates as indicated ad shall not be liable to creep. Valves shall also be
capable of maintaining the pre-set downstream pressure under static condition.
The filter on each inlet to a pressure reducing valve shall be of replaceable porous sintered
metal type.
16.6.6.5 Pressure Relief Valves
a Each pressure relief valve shall be of the fully enclosed type and fitted with hand
easing gear.
b Each pressure relief valve in a pressure reducing station shall give a flow capacity
equal to that of the pressure reducing valve.
c Pressure relief valves in locations other than reducing station shall have a flow
capacity equal to that of the pressure reducing valve.
d Pressure relief valves in locations other than reducing stations shall flow capacities
equal to that of the associated equipment.
16.6.6.6 Globe Valves
a Up to and including 50mm size shall be of bronze globe type with inside screw,
stuffing box and screw end connections.
b 65mm size and above shall be of cast iron ductile iron body for PN 16 and PN 25
respectively, with outside screw and yoker type. Flanged end connections to BS 4504.
c Globe valves shall have re-grinding renewable disc and seat ring, bronze trimmed
non-rising stem.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 155
______________________________________________________________________________
16.6.6.7 Ball (Float) Valves

Equilibrium type to BS 1212: Part 1. Foam plastic ball float with stainless steel road and
double lock nuts or copper ball float complete with brass rod. The valve shall be made of
cast iron or bronze body and suitable for minimum working pressure of PN 16. Screwed
joints shall be provided for up to 65mm diameter and flanged joints for 80mm diameter
and above. Locking device to be provided, so that the valve can only be opened when the
water level drop to a pre-determined level.
16.6.6.8 Automatic Air Vent (Air Relief Valve)
Provide automatic air vent at all high points, whether shown on the drawings or not.
Automatic air vent shall be of float type. Drain pipe shall be provided and terminated
at nearest floor drain or waste.
16.6.6.9 Strainers
a. Strainers shall be installed on all system and equipment susceptible to damage

from dirt, grit or foreign matter including, but not limited to pumps, control valves
and where required and indicated.
b. Strainer shall be Y –pattern bucket type of not less than full line size. Unit shall be
constructed of cast iron or copper alloy body with stainless steel screen of
perforations. The total perforation area shall not be less than twice the cross
sectional area of the pump suction pipe. Strainer with working pressure above 16
bars shall be of cast steel type.
c. Size up to 50mm, screwed connection shall be used whilst flanged joints (PN 16) shall
be used. For 65mm and upward flanged shall be used up to PN 25. For valves with
working pressure above 16 bars, drain cocks shall be provided.
d. Size 15 – 50mm
e. Y –type strainers with screwed cover, 18/8 stainless steel screen, 26 swg with 0.8mm
perforation. Ends screwed BS 21 taper thread.
Service Rating: 10oC to 100oC
10.5 bar 186 deg C sat steam. Size 65 – 150
f. Y –type single basket strainer. 20 mesh stainless steel screen, cover. Flanged and
drilled to BS 5404. Size 200mm and above
g. Bucker type strainers, 40 mesh stainless steel screen, bolted cover. Flanged and
drilled to BS 5404.
16.6.6.10 Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 5180 – “Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum
gauges”. The maximum scale value of the gauge shall be about 150% of the anticipated
maximum operating pressure. It shall be graduated both in imperial units (psi) and
metric units (Kpa).
Provisions shall be installed to enable each pressure gauge to be easily removed without
interruption to the installation.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 156
______________________________________________________________________________
16.6.6.11 Connector (Pipe Line Vibration Eliminator)

Flexible connectors shall be provided to prevent vibration from all rotating equipment.
Flexible connectors shall be located as close to the rotating equipment as practical.
16.6.6.12 Water Level Controllers
Water level controllers shall be provided and fitted in all water tanks for monitoring
the water levels in the water tanks and give the appropriate control/warning signals
for the system. Water level controllers shall be of the float less type using water-
proof sensing electrodes with controller containing the switching circuits and control
relays, suitable for conductive liquids like water and dilute acidic fluid. It shall be
used to automatically operate sequential pump sets and give low and high level
alarms. However, provisions shall also be provided for manual override to enable
manual operation of pump sets.
Sensing electrodes and the controller shall be suitable for operation temperature of
up to 55oC.
16.7 Part 7 - Pipe Work and Fitting – Fire Fighting

16.7.1 General
a The word ‘pipe work’ or ‘firef ighting’ shall mean all pipes, drains, tubes, pipe
fittings, valves including hangers, brackets, anchors, expansion devices, sleeves,
and all accessories connected there to for the complete piping installation.
b The Building is provided with wet firef ighting hose reel cabinets and
sprinklers.
c Pipelines accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc., shall have the
same working pressure rating as the associated pipe work.
d All pipes and fittings supplied shall conform to relevant National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) codes.
e Prior to any ordering or installation, the Contractor shall furnish the following
information for endorsement.
1. Manufacturer for all pipes and fittings
2. Specification and standards for all pipes ad fittings
3. Technical submittals for Sprinklers and Fire Fighting Pump set
16.7.2 Pipe Materials

16.7.2.1 Material
All pipes shall be Seamless Mild Steel Schedule 40
16.7.3 Pipe Joints for ¾” dia upto 1-1/2” dia
Threaded fittings
16.7.4 Pipe Joints for 2” dia and above
Welded fittings
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 157
______________________________________________________________________________
Piping shall be supported from the building structure which shall support the sum of the
load of a water-filled pipe and a minimum of 120 kg applied at the point of hanging.
Vertical pipe work shall be supported at intervals of at least on per floor level.
Horizontal pipe work shall be supported by adjustable flat iron of clevis type hangers
hung by hot rolled steel rods of the following diameters and spacing, and as per
recommendations of pipe manufactures. Information about the Nominal pie diameters,
distance between the supports and the diameter of rod is shown below in the Table.
NOMINAL DISTANGE BETWEEN DIAMETER
PIPE SUPPORTS OF ROD
18mm (3/4”) 1.8m 10
25mm (1”) 2.4m 10
32mm (1-1/2”) 2.7m 10
50mm (2”) 2.7m 10
63-75mm (2-1/2” to 3”) 3.0m 12
100mm (4”) 3.0m 16
150-200mm (6” - *”0 3.6m 18
16.7.6 Pipe Sleeves

a Pipe sleeves shall be provided and installed by the Contractor for casting in where
pipes penetrate the concrete structure.
b The minimum clearance between the pipe and pipe sleeve shall not be less than
25mm.
c Sleeves through fire rated partitions or walls or floor shall be of galvanized wrought
iron pipe. The annular space of pipe sleeves shall be tightly packed with approved
fire-rated material.
d Where sleeves occur in finished spaces, solid close fitted chrome plated steel plates
secured by screws shall be provided.
16.7.7 Pipe Work installation
a All pipe work shall be installed to meet structural, architectural, and functional
conditions and shall not interfere with the work of other trades.
b All pipe work shall be installed and supported so that it is free from excessive stresses
due to weight from its contents plus its own dead weight, dynamic forces due
to liquid movement, and expansion and contraction due to change in temperature.
c Pipe work connected to the pumps shall be separately supported so as not to impose
any load on the pump casings.
16.7.8 Valves
a All valves shall be of approved manufacture complying with the appropriate British
Standard and approved for the working pressure involved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 158
______________________________________________________________________________
b Valves shall be so installed as to be readily accessible for testing and maintenance.

Valves shall close in less than 5 seconds when operated at maximum possible speed
from fully open position.
c Test cocks shall be provided at all locations shown on the drawing and the following
locations
d 15mm diameter cock with hose bib attachment downstream of each flow switch;
e All valves in each instance shall be suitable in all respects for the class of service and
function.
f All valves for all functions shall be identified by means of a tag or label which shall
clearly indicate the following;
1. Service.
2. Valve number.
16.7.9 Hose Reel Cabinet
a NFPA 14/24 approved cabinet - doors made of 1.5mm, steel sheet with all around
folded edges door leafs hinged flush mounted on door frame, front door fastening
recessed type of glass.
b Hose reel cabinet shall be provided with nozzle and swinging type hose reel of
32mm dia Polyethylene (PE) pipe. Length of pipe in reel shall be 30m. Reducing tee
2-1/2” x 1” dia shall be built in cabinet.
16.7.10 Fire Hydrant (4-1/2’’ Main Valve)
a Fire hydrants purchased or installed shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements
and tests of ANSI and the latest revisions of NFPA Standard 14/24. Fire hydrants
shall meet all test requirements and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
b Body material made of spheroidal graphite cast iron with two way delivery. 2-1/2’’
female instantaneous outlet to BS 336:2010 with corrosion protected operation
threads for easy operation. The hydrant should be capable of withstanding the
minimum pressure of 4.5 bars upto maximum of 16 bars, as mentioned by the
Engineer.
16.7.11 Breeching inlet
Breeching inlet to be provided for firefighting purpose, fitted with inlet connection at fire
brigades access level and outlet connection at specified points. The inlet should be
manufactured complying BS 5041:33:1975 comprising of male instantaneous connections
complying with BS 336:2010, drain valves complying with BS 5154, PN16 rated and non
return valves. The breeching inlet and its fittings are suitable for a normal working
pressure of 10 bar. The inlet is painted red internally and externally. Location as per NFPA
codes or as specified by the engineer.
16.7.12 Landing Valve
a Oblique type with flanged inlet complying with BS 5041 part 1 standard with delivery
hose connection and blank cap complying with BS 336:2010 standard. The landing
valves must be classified under low pressure and are suitable for use at nominal inlet
pressure up to 15 bar.
b Disc facing rubber is of replaceable type. Valves are provided with strap and pad lock
so that the hand wheel can be secured to counter unauthorized use. The hand wheel
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 159
______________________________________________________________________________
is black painted and the body of the valve is red in color. The landing valve has a
water flow rate of 8.5 Liters/ second at 4 bar outlet pressure. The valve must fully be
in compliance with NFPA codes.
16.7.13 Fire Extinguishers
a All fire extinguishers complying with NFPA standard to be used as mentioned as per
NFPA 10 code. Capable of fighting class A, B, C and E fires, to be installed as
directed by engineer following the NFPA standards or install where engineer feel
necessary. Extinguisher must have a controlled discharged, brass nickel plated head
valve with simple squeeze operation, unique color coded handle and base (optional),
safety pin with chain, pressure gauge, syphon tube, hose holder, discharge nozzle,
discharge hose and it must be rechargeable and easy to service.
b All extinguishers must be easily identifiable and easily accessible at each level for all
the people inside the respective building fully in compliance with latest NFPA 10
code of firefighting.
16.8 Part 8 – Plumbing Equipment- Equipment and Controls

16.8.1 Water Transfer Pump
Providing, centrifugal pumps (2 Nos. - 1 running + 1 standby) specification of the pump
will be as per Bill of quantity. The pump shall be provided with control panel having auto /
manual switches, dry running protection, low / high level water controls with alternative
standby duty operation system, pump head to be verified on site by the contractor. Similarly,
water supply pumps need to be defined in terms of type and functionality. Following are
the specifications for the pumps to transport water from ground water tank to overhead
tank. It is recommended to use Centrifugal Mono Block Pump, as it fulfills the requirements
and less expensive than submersible pumps. The information on the suction lift, dischatge
head and flowrate is presented in Table below.
Item Suction Lift Discharge Head Flowrate
Mono Block Pump (0.5 hp) 22 ft 55 ft 50 – 80 lpm
Submersible Pump (0.5 hp) 50 ft 85 ft 30 - 100 lpm
16.8.2 Firefighting Pump

a Horizontal centrifugal electric pump set as per specification provided in bill of
quantity complete with automatic control panel, Pressure switch & Pressure gauge
b Horizontal centrifugal diesel engine driven pump set as per specification provided in
bill of quantity with automatic control panel, Pressure switch, Pressure gauge & diesel
tank
c Jockey electric motor driven pump set as per specification provided in bill of
quantity complete with automatic control panel, pressure switch and pressure
gauge.
d Pump control cabinet for above mentioned pump.
NOTE: Head of the firefighting pump to be verified by the contractor on site.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 160
______________________________________________________________________________
Typical Drawings for Septic Tank, Sewerage Manhole and Underground Tank for Water
Supply & Rainwater Harvesting and Overhread Tank are shown in the Figures below.
Figure 16-1 Typical Drawing for Septic Tank, Sewage Manhole
Figure 16-2 Typical Drawing for Precast Manhole

______________________________________________________________________________
Page 161
______________________________________________________________________________
Figure 16-3 Typical Drawing for UnderGround Tank
Figure 16-4 Typical Drawing for Overhead Tank
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 162
SECTION 17– ELECTRICAL WORKS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 17 - ELECTRICAL WORKS

17.1 Section 1 - Technical Provisions
17.1.1 General
The general instructions are given to the tenderers elsewhere in this contract document. The
additional instructions in the following paragraphs are given in order to invite the tenderer's
attention towards some major points pertaining to electrical work only and to assist them
in preparing tenders. These instructions shall be deemed as Technical provisions of the
Contract. For the purpose of low cost, the power distribution network scope work may be
assigned to concerned distribution company or overhead distribution network may be used
instead of underground distribution as cost of underground network will be high as
compared to overhead distribution network.
17.1.2 Scope of Work.

The work consists of furnishing all tools, plants, labour, materials and equipment and
performing the internal and external electrical works comprising of the following or as
specified in B.O.Q.
SECTION - Main Panel Board and DB's.
SECTION - Internal Wiring Concealed with PVC Conduit.
SECTION - CFitting & Fixtures.
SECTION - Cables, Conduits, Cable Trays & Rising Mains.
SECTION - Earthing System
SECTION - Miscellaneous Items.
The work shall be carried out in strict accordance with the conditions of contract, special
conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications, in coordination with other contractors on
this project and as per items of Bill of Quantities and including the responsibility of all
related works necessary for their proper functioning, testing, commissioning and
satisfactory operation and performance including maintenance for the period specified
elsewhere. The contractor shall provide for all required technical non-technical personnel,
skilled and non-skilled labour, construction equipment, transportation etc., as required for
the completion of works in strict accordance with the Technical specifications laid here-in
after.
17.1.3 Contractor's Qualification

The Electrification work shall be carried out only by a licensed Contractor authorized to
undertake such work under the provisions of the Electricity Act, 1910, and the Electricity
Rules, 1937, as adopted and modified by the Government of Pakistan.
17.1.4 Llicensed Electrical Contractor

Shall have the following qualifications.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 163
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Must have in his employment a competent graduate Electrical Engineer

registered with Pakistan Engineering Council, Islamabad.
b. Must possess a valid Electrical licence issued by the Electrical Inspector of
Islamabad region.
c. Must have in its employment an Electrical Supervisor having certificate of
competency who will exclusively look after this work.
d. Must have necessary tools, plant and instruments.
e. Must have adequate experience of similar works.
17.1.5 Rules and Regulations
The installation in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity Rules,
1937, and the latest edition of the Regulations for the electrical equipment of buildings
issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers London (I.E.E.) However, in case of
conflict between these specifications and the I.E.E. Regulations, these specifications
supersede IEE regulation.
17.1.6 Standards
The latest relevant British specifications and codes, Pakistan Standard Specifications, VDE,
I.E.C. and I.E.E. recommendations shall be applicable and be followed for the equipment
specified herein.
17.1.7 Climatic Conditions

All equipment supplied shall withstand, without developing any defect, the following
climatic conditions.
a. Maximum Ambient Temperature=120oF or 49oC

b. Minimum Ambient Temperature=28oF or (-) 2.2oC
c. Maximum Humidity=90 %
17.1.8 Specifications
The contractor shall furnish all material and equipment at site, conforming fully to the
specifications given herein and to the accepted standards as laid down by British Standards,
the Institution of Electrical Engineers, London, and the Pakistan Standard Institution. It is
not the intent of these specifications to include all details of design and construction of
various material and equipment to be supplied under this contract. The Contractor shall
supply and install all material and equipment specified herein and also all installation and
small material such as nuts, bolts, washers, shims, angles, leveling material, installation as
covered by the specifications.
All material and equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be new and in all respects
conform to the high standard of engineering design and workmanship, perform and function
as herein specified and fully meet the quality level and ruggedness requirement of the
specifications. All material and equipment which have to be supplied and installed by the
Contractor shall be passed / approved by the Engineer; even if the same is exactly in
accordance with the Bill of Quantities and drawings
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 164
______________________________________________________________________________
17.1.9 Submittal
The contractor, after the award of work, shall submit for approval of the Engineer all
drawings and Catalogues of equipment, appliances, fixtures and accessories that are to be
furnished under the contract. After final approval of a sufficient number of copies as desired
shall be furnished for distribution. Catalogues and drawings shall be clearly marked to
indicate, the items furnished. Catalogues of all fixtures, and not a few, shall be submitted.
17.1.10 Approval of Drawings and Data

The Contractor shall provide detailed electrical drawings, wiring diagrams, foundation
details, etc., for all electrical switchgear, fuse gear and all other systems etc., for the
Engineer's review for obtaining approval.
The manufacturing of electrical equipment shall be started only after the above mentioned
drawings and data are approved.
The time required for review and approval shall be considered included in the total time
of completion of job.
17.1.11 Drawings and Data

Three sets of drawings and data for each equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor
for the Engineer's approval before commencement of fabrication and manufacture which
would start only after that approval. The drawings to be supplied by the Contractor shall
be as follows:-
a. -Arrangements.
b. -Dimensional Plans, elevations and front view.
c. -Foundation Plan, anchors and configuration.
d. -Incoming and outgoing cable termination positions.
e. -Earthing arrangement.
f. Electrical Drawings showing.
g. -One-Line diagram.
h. -Detailed wiring diagram.
i. -All interconnections.
j. -Instrument transformers.
k. -Relays, their locations and internal wiring diagrams.
l. -Other electrical devices including meters instruments and their wiring
diagram.
m. -Signal and alarm circuit.
17.1.12 Shop Drawings
The design drawings show approximate conduit routes and depict only the position of
various fixtures and outlets. All the actual planning for the conduit routes shall be carried
out, well in advance of the actual execution of work, by the Contractor to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. For this purpose the Contractor shall prepare shop drawings and obtain
prior approval of the Engineer. Three prints of each shop drawings shall be submitted for
obtaining approval.
No piece of work shall be allowed to be executed at site without the availability of these
approved shop drawings. These shop drawings shall clearly depict the load balancing
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 165
______________________________________________________________________________
chart of each distribution board. Time required for the preparation and approval of shop
drawings shall be considered to have been included in the total time allowed for the
completion of the work.
17.1.13 Setting Out of Work

The Contractor shall set out the work himself and if any discrepancy is found, he shall
report the matter to the Engineer and shall act as directed. If any defective or modified
setting out is carried out by the Contractor on his own, he shall rectify or make it good at
his own cost.
17.1.14 Programming
The contractor shall keep pace with the work of the Civil Contractor and any other
specialist contractor. The engineer shall be kept informed about the programme and the
progress of work so that there is no hindrance in the execution of work at site.
17.1.15 Protection
The contractor shall take care not to damage the structure , material, equipment and
property belonging to and/or installed by other contractors during execution of work and
shall repair and make-good all losses at his own cost, if found damaged in the opinion of
the Engineer.
17.1.16 Change of Specifications.

No change in specification of the equipment / material will be allowed at any stage,
except with the prior approval of the Engineer before the opening of Tenders.
17.1.17 Purchase of Equipment / Material.

All the equipment and material e.g. transformers, switchgear, cables, conduits, light
fixtures and fans etc. will be purchased direct from the manufacturer. Certificate and
copies of delivery challans for all such material will be produced as and when desired.
17.1.18 Manufacturers and Brands.

Where brands and names of Sub-Station equipment or any other system are specified by
name, alternative can be offered provided these are equal in quality to those specified.
Satisfaction of the Engineer in this respect shall be essential and prior approval for such
deviation shall have to be obtained before submission of Tenderers. However all
equipment for substation or system shall be from one manufacturer only.
17.1.19 Factory Tests

All routine and type tests on HT LT switchgear (ACBs, MCCBs , Relays , Magnetic
Contactors , PFI Equipment and Enclosures),HT & LT cables , Emergency Diesel
Generating Sets and other equipment shall be performed at the manufactures facility or
at a recognized independent test laboratory in the presence of the “Engineer” as per
applicable international standards .The term “Engineer” henceforth in the rest of the
technical specification of electrical works shall mean an assigned, qualified electrical
engineer of Client and Consultant. The presence of both engineers shall be ensured at all
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 166
______________________________________________________________________________
times during factory tests and inspection. The contractor shall be allowed to supply
equipment to site only after successful and satisfactory testing and inspection at factory /
laboratory with 3 copies each of test reports dully issued to be maintained in client’s and
consultant’s record. The contractor shall inform the engineer about the date and time of
tests on each equipment at least two weeks in advance. The witnessing of tests by the
engineer shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for proper functioning of
the equipment, and for furnishing the guarantee. Contractor shall at its own expense make
all arrangement of transportation loading etc. for the engineer, without any claim of
addition charge or cost to the client for tests and inspection.
17.1.20 Owner's Supplied Material.

Material and equipment if supplied by the Owner shall be made available at site store to
the contractor for installation. Any lead and lift upto and within the site of work shall be
at the cost and responsibility of the Contractor. The contractor shall ensure safe handling
and proper protection after the material and equipment are issued to him at site store and
shall provide and maintain required plant and equipment for handling, proper protection
and installation at his own cost.
17.1.21 Spare Parts List

A list of spare parts required for one year's operation of each equipment where deemed
necessary “except OFM” together with unit price of each part, shall be supplied by the
contractor.
17.1.22 Guarantee
The contractor shall furnish written guarantee, in triplicate, of the manufacturer for
successful performance of each equipment. Such guarantee shall be of material and / or
workmanship. The guarantee shall cover a minimum period of 12 months effective from
the date of completion certificate.
17.1.23 As-Built Drawings.

The contractor shall, during the progress of work keep a careful record of all changes and
revisions where the actual installation differs from that shown on shop drawings. These
changes and revisions shall be accurately carried out on the shop drawings and submitted
to the Engineer for approval. After approval these drawings shall become the property of
the Owner. These updated and approved shop drawings depicting clearly As-Built
drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer. Reproducible tracings of all these As-Built
drawings shall be handed over to the Engineer. Final payment will be withheld until the
receipt of the approved As-Built Drawings.
17.1.24 Test Reports.

The contractor shall be responsible for submitting the test reports/ certificates and get the
installation inspected / passed by the Regional Electric Inspector at his own cost.
17.1.25 DISCOS Requirement.

The contractor shall assist the Owner in sponsoring application for Electrical Connection,
with respective DISCO and carry out necessary formalities. Any special requirement of
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 167
______________________________________________________________________________
DISCO shall be complied with by the contractor. The Owner shall arrange to deposit all
amounts, on demand, to relevant DISCO for providing service connection and security
deposits thereof.
17.1.26 T & T Requirement.

For the supply, installation and regularization of Telephone system, the contractor shall
obtain N.O.C. from Director General, T&T Department, Ministry of Communications,
Govt. of Pakistan, Islamabad if required. Any special requirement of the T&T
Department shall be complied with by the Contractor. The Owner shall arrange to deposit
all amounts on demand from T&T Department for obtaining telephone connections to
public Exchange and security deposits etc.
17.2 Section 2 - PVC Conduits and Accessories
17.2.1 Scope
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical
wiring.
17.2.2 Submittals
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
17.2.3 Materials
17.2.2.1 Conduit Pipe
The conduit for wiring of circuits, lights, socket outlets and other systems shall be made
of PVC manufactured under the trade names of "Polo" or “Popular” conforming to
BS6099.
Steel conduit shall conform to BSS 31/latest and shall be 'International', Hilal and/or
Premier "brands. The conduit shall be enameled with good quality non-cracking and non-
flaking black paint.
17.2.2.2 Flexible Pipe
Flexible conduit shall be furnished and installed where necessary for convenient
dismantling and/or avoiding vibrations to be transmitted. Flexible conduit shall be spiral
interlocked type made of steel strip construction and coated with zinc or chromium
plated.
17.2.2.3 Conduit Accessories
Factory made round PVC junction boxes shall be installed with non-pressure type PVC
conduits. Junction boxes shall be of 2-1/4" dia and 3" long to receive Pvc conduit and
shall be concealed in RCC of slab. The wall type junction box shall also be factory made
round PVC boxes having minimum dimensions of 2-1/4" dia and not less than 1-1/4"
long. Each junction box shall be provided with one piece cover which shall be fitted on
the box with chromium plated screws.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 168
______________________________________________________________________________
17.2.2.3.1 Conduit accessories such as switch boxes, socket outlet boxes, pull boxes and
inspection boxes shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel having dust tight covers. All
boxes shall have required number of conduit entry holes and earth terminals for
connecting E.C.P. All the rectangular or square shaped boxes shall have nipples to
receive PVC conduit with force fit. All these boxes shall be painted inside and outside
with black enamel, over a base coat of red oxide antirust paint. Shapes and sizes of
these boxes shall be determined on each application.
17.2.2.3.2 Manufactured smooth bends shall be used where conduit changes direction. Bending
of conduit by heating or otherwise shall be allowed only at special situations with the
permission of the Engineer. Use of shape 90 degree bends and Tees is prohibited. Bends
shall have enlarged ends to receive the conduit without any deduction in the internal
diameter of the PVC pipe.
17.2.2.3.3 All accessories e.g. boxes, couplings, bends, solid plugs, bushes, reducers, checkouts
etc. shall be equal in quality to the specified conduit.
17.2.2.3.4 Where inspection boxes occur in floor slabs a special cover on the box shall be installed
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.2.2.3.5 The use of looping in box shall be allowed in places where floor slab thickness permits
90 degree bends in conduit.
17.2.4 Execution
The contractor shall furnish all labour and material for the installation of conduit as
required.
17.2.4.1 Conduit shall be installed concealed in RCC ceiling slabs, columns, walls and floors etc.,
Recessed conduit shall be laid over the first tier of reinforcement and under the second
tier of reinforcement before pouring of concrete. All conduit outlet boxes to be concealed
shall be laid firmly flush with the soffit of the slab or beam. The conduit should be tied
to the reinforcement firmly so that the alignment is not disturbed by vibrators. All the
outlet boxes installed shall be stuffed and their cover plates fixed so as to prevent concrete
entering the outlet boxes.
17.2.4.2 Under no circumstances shall chassis be made for recessing conduit in the RCC structure
after it has been cast without the permission of the Engineer. Where conduits have to be
concealed in cement concrete or brick masonry, chassis shall be made with appropriate
tools not deeper than required. The conduit shall then be fixed in the chassis with iron
hooks before covering it up with at least 20mm thick plaster. Conduit ends pointing
upward shall be properly sealed to avoid entry of foreign material.
17.2.4.3 The drawings show conduit routes but planning for proper arranging conduit routes shall
be carried out by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
17.2.4.4 The entire conduit system shall be essentially completed before the wire pulling is taken
in hand. Each conduit run shall be tested for continuity and obstructions. All obstructions
shall be cleared in an approved manner. Water and moisture that has entered any section
of the conduit installation must be dried with suitable swabs to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 169
______________________________________________________________________________
17.2.4.5 Adequate expansion joints shall be provided in all conduit runs passing across the
expansion joints in the concrete slabs of the buildings. A typical arrangement is shown
on drawing.
17.2.4.6 Pull boxes shall be installed in conduit runs at intervals mentioned below to facilities the
pulling length of wires:-
i) Straight runs.-20 meter.
ii) Runs with one 90 degrees bends.-15 meter.
iii) Runs with two 90 degrees bends.- 10 meter.
17.2.4.7 Conduit runs between two outlets shall not contain more than two quarter bends or one
90 degree bend.
17.2.4.8 All the free ends of conduit shall be solidly plugged till such time as final and proper
terminations are made.
17.2.4.9 All conduits of a system shall be run at least 6" away from the other systems and services
where conduit of one system crosses the other it shall be done so at right angle i.e. 90
degree.
17.2.4.10 All multiple runs of conduit shall be arranged symmetrically.
17.2.4.11 Exposed runs of conduit where required shall be firmly held by means of G.I. saddles,
clamps and brackets etc., to the surfaces of walls, columns and ceiling. Rawal plugs or
phil plugs may be used for fixing saddles, clamps and brackets etc. The spacing
between two saddles may not be more than 30". The straight runs on walls may be 18"
to 24" below the ceiling and in the event of any obstruction due to beams the runs may
be routed them. The conduit shall have a minimum clearance of 6 mm from the surface
supporting it. Purpose made special clips and brackets may be required at some
situations to support the conduit.
17.2.4.12 No conduit less than 20mm dia. shall be used for point wiring and 25mm dia. for power
wiring. The size of conduit shall however be determined from the number of wires
required in the conduit run according to number of wires allowed as per IEE
Regulations.
17.2.4.13 Use appropriate size sleeves for crossing of beams lentils retarding walls etc. for
providing conduits / cables at later stage.
17.2.4.14 Use exposed PVC conduit wiring on ceiling side and concealed for open area side or
wall and floors.
17.2.5 Application - Outdoors – General

Exposed: PVC
Concealed: PVC
Underground PVC SCHEDULE 80
Boxes and Enclosures NEMA 250, Type 3R.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 170
______________________________________________________________________________
17.2.6 Job Conditions

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
17.3 Section -3 Wires, Cables and Cords
17.3.1 Scope
The wires & cords for conduit wiring shall be single core, made of stranded copper
conductors, PVC insulated, tested to B.S. 6004, 1975. The voltage grade shall be 300/500
volts or 450/750 V unless otherwise specified on drawings and Bill of Quantities. Three
phase wiring is being suggested for 5 marla and 10 marla, single/double story house. The
cables shall be certified and approved. The main panel board and all types of boxes should
be concealed on wall. The ceiling fan box should be concealed on ceiling and would not be
fixed with rawl bolt.
17.3.2 Materials
In order of preference as approved by the Engineer. The size of the wire shall be as follows:
i. for light or fan point wiring with 1.5MM square (or 3./029) or as specified in
the B.O.Q.
ii. for light circuit wiring with 2.5MM square (or 7/0.29 ) or as specified in the
B.O.Q.
iii. for power plug 15A wiring with 4 MM square (or 7/.036) or as specified in the
B.O.Q.
iv. the sizes of cables from Main Panel Board to Sub-Main Panel board to
distribution boards shall be as shown on drawings or as specified in BOQ.
17.3.3 Execution
17.3.3.1 The contractor shall furnish all material and labour to pull in and install wires and cables
as required. The contractor shall also supply, without extra cost, wire accessories e.g.
plugs, solder, clamps, supports, bushes, fixing pins, adhesive tapes, connectors,
identification tags, straps, filling compound and earthing clips etc. as are required to be
furnished for complete wiring installation in accordance with standard practice. The
pulling of wires shall be taken in hand only when all conduit system is complete. All
termination shall be mechanically strain free and electrically sound.
17.3.3.2 The wiring of the installation shall be strictly in accordance with the scheme, cable sizes
and circuit details as shown on drawings and specified in WCC.1
17.3.3.3 All wiring shall be continuous between terminations and use of connectors or joints
disallowed. Spur and Tee connections are strictly prohibited. Looping in system shall be
followed throughout.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 171
______________________________________________________________________________
17.3.3.4 Manufacturers recommended lubricant shall be allowed to facilitate pulling of wires, use
of all other kind of oil and soap is prohibited.
17.3.3.5 All wires occupying the same conduit shall be pulled together. Wires and cords at the
time of pulling shall not be subjected to a bending radius more than 10 times the overall
diameter of cables. Cable manufacturer’s recommendation of pulling speed and pulling
tension on cables shall govern the pulling operation.
17.3.3.6 Not more than 2 circuit wires shall be bunched in the same conduit. Wires of two different
phase, however, shall not be run or terminated in the same outlet box for single phase
wiring of lights, switches and sockets.
17.3.3.7 Porcelain or molded plastic connectors shall be provided for a joint between light point
wiring and light fixture wiring and housed in the outlet box provided for this purpose.
The contactor after terminations are made shall be wrapped in PVC insulation tape.
17.3.3.8 The quantity and the size of the wire contained in any one conduit shall not be in excess
of the numbers permitted by I.E.E. regulations.
17.3.3.9 All point and circuits wiring shall be solidly earthed by 14SWG (2.5mm square) PVC
insulated wire of color Green, Yellow to serve as CPC which shall be run inside the
conduit.
17.3.3.10 All 5A & 15A socket shall be wired separately direct from D.B. without any claim of
circuit and distinctly from light point wiring, or as specified in B.O.Q. However 5 Amps
socket shall be controlled by D.B, or as specified in B.O.Q.
17.4 Section -4 Wiring Accessories

17.4.1 Scope
This Section includes the following:
a. Single and duplex receptacles, and ground-fault circuit interrupters.
b. Single- and double-pole switches and dimmer switches.
c. Device wall plates.
d. Floor service outlets and multi outlet assemblies.
17.4.2 Submittals
Product Data For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings List of legends and description of materials and
process used for pre marking wall plates
Reports Field quality-control test reports
17.4.3 Materials
17.4.3.1 Switches
1. Indoor switches controlling lights and fans shall be single pole, 10A, one or
two way, suitable for 250V, 50Hz. The body of the switches shall be made of
molded plastic, one, two, three, four or six gang with integral built in molded
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 172
______________________________________________________________________________
plastic face plate suitable for fixing on a sheet steel outlet box. The switch
contacts shall be silver alloy tipped and these shall operate with snap action.
The switches shall be piano type, ivory white in color. The switches shall
conform to BSS 800.
2. Weather proof switches on external lighting circuits shall be rotary type with
quick make quick break action rated 5/10 Amps, 250 V, 50 Hz.
17.4.3.2 Switch Socket Outlet Units
1. Switch and socket units shall be single pole, 3 pin rated 13A or 15A, 250V, 50
Hz. These shall be molded plastic type with ivory white integral built-in face
plate. Each socket shall have its control switch by the side of it on a common
face plate. Thus the complete unit specified in BOQ shall be as switch and a
socket outlet unit. The switch socket outlet unit shall comply with BSS 546
and BSS 5733 or BSS 3052. Bells / chimes/Buzzers and bell pushes shall be
suitable for operation on 230 Volts
2. Weather proof switch units shall have a cast iron outlet box with threaded
conduit entry holes or nipples, rubber gasket and a spring loaded sheet steel
cover.
3. Ceiling roses shall conform to BSS 67/1969. Lamp batten holders shall
conform to BSS 5042 Part-I.
17.4.3.3 Execution
1. All the switches and switch socket outlet units shall be installed on 16 SWG
thick sheet steel outlet boxes of appropriate sizes All sheet steel boxes shall
have conduit entry and terminals for connecting 14 SWG or 2.5mm (sq) PVC
insulated circuit protective conductors.(CPC)
2. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
3. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Define each dimmer’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control
functions.
5. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on drawings.
Provide any additional equipment required to provide control intent.
6. Perform full-function testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling
is not acceptable.
7. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according
to manufacturers' written instructions.
9. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long
dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group
adjacent switches under single, multipage wall plates where possible.
10. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
11. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 173
______________________________________________________________________________
17.4.4 Dandification
1. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face
of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
2. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as
indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
1. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source
from a single manufacturer.
2. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
17.5 Section -5 Point Wiring, Circuit Wiring and Socket Outlet Wiring
17.5.1 Scope
The work included under this Section consists of furnishing all labor, material, services and
skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation and connection of
all circuits and equipment specified herein or shown on the drawings and / or normally
required for an installation of this type including but not limited to testing of the installation
and its handing over to the Owners. The extent of work specified herein and/or shown on
the drawing represent the minimum requirements. The installation on the whole should
conform to the best form of workmanship and shall be accomplished by workmen, licensed
and skilled in this type of work.
17.5.2 Materials
17.5.2.1 Point Wiring

For the purpose of measurement of light / fan point wiring the following work shall be
deemed to constitute the work of a point wiring:-
a. Providing and fixing conduit from a switch to wall / column / ceiling outlet, or
fan / fixture excluding final sub-circuit conduit from distribution board to the
switch as described in section 2 or as specified in B.O.Q.
b. Providing and pulling of wires from switch to fan / fixture outlet excluding
providing and pulling of final sub-circuit wiring in the conduit laid as in (a)
above and as described in Section 3 or as specified in B.O.Q.
17.5.2.2 Socket Outlet Wiring
a. For 5A socket on the light switch board and also away from the board the basis
of the measurement shall be the same as in section 2.1.
b. For 13A/15A socket outlets the work shall comprise as under:-
i. Providing and fixing conduit from distribution board to the socket outlet
as described in section 2
ii. Providing and pulling of wires in the conduit as in (a) above as described
in section 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 174
______________________________________________________________________________
17.5.2.3 Call Bell Point Wiring

This shall be identical to section W.1 i.e. wiring for light point or as specified in B.O.Q.
17.6 Section -6 Light Fixtures
17.6.1 Scope
Light fixture schedule is provided in the drawings along with catalogue numbers of the
manufacturers which are meant to serve as illustrations of the types of fixtures required for
various applications.
The contractor shall be required to submit samples of each and every light fixture for the
approval of the Engineer, before commencing with mass production of the fixtures. The
contractor should be prepared to carry out any number of modifications and improvements
in the submitted sample free of cost until a finally acceptable sample is produced. Mass
production shall be taken in hand only after a finished and modified sample has been
produced and approved in writing by the Engineer. For low cost houses, fire alarm system
should be used without the panel and it may have smoke detector with alarm. AC to DC
circuit with manual switch 5A, which is fixed in switch board will be installed as a separate
system for each area. The contractor has the option to offer acceptable equivalent of the
specified light fixtures but to be installed with prior approval from Engineer.
This Section includes the following:
a. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.
b. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
c. Emergency lighting units.
d. Exit signs.
e. Accessories, including occupancy sensors.
17.6.2 Submittals
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixtures, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
a. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
b. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
c. Ballast type and ballast factor.
d. Energy-efficiency data.
e. Sound Performance Data
f. Life, initial lumen rating, CRI, CCT, mercury content, and energy-efficiency
data for lamps and ballast system.
g. Photometric data,
h. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixture.
Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components,
features, and accessories.
i. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
j. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,
based on input from installers of the items involved:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 175
______________________________________________________________________________
k. Lighting fixtures.
l. Suspended ceiling components.
m. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be
attached [including seismic strengthening].
n. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
o. Air outlets and inlets. .
p. Smoke and fire detectors.
q. Occupancy sensors.
r. Photo sensors
s. Access panels.
t. Perimeter moldings.
u. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample
submission in Interior Lighting Fixture/Luminaire Schedule. Each sample shall
include the following:
v. Lamps and Ballasts: Specified units installed.
w. Accessories: Cords and plugs.
x. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-
controlled lighting fixture, signed by product manufacturer.
y. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting
fixture.
z. Field quality-control test reports.
aa. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment, controls and
fixtures, including emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
17.6.3 Materials
The LED lights fixtures shall be down lighters/light panels/floods lights as shown in
drawings and given in BOQ. These will be surface mounted or recessed in false ceiling as
per requirement of the project. The light fittings shall be CE/IEC & ROHS approved
according to ambient temperature comprising of LED’s of having life span of 50,000 hours.
All the light fixtures shall by certified by 3rd party having following certificates
a. Lumen Maintenance of LED Source: IES LM-80-08
b. Luminaire Fixtures Type Test: IEC 60598
c. Photo biological Safety: IEC 62471
d. EMC Test Report EN 56100-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
17.6.3.1 LF.3 Led & Driver
LED shall be class-I having at least 100 lumens/Watt and make of
CREE/EPISTAR/BRIDGLUX/LG/NICHIA or approved equivalent having color
shifting SDCM Level of <=5 for indoor light & <=7 for outdoor light. The Driver unit
having tolerance range of 110V to 277V with surge protection device & Power Factor PF
of >0.9, total harmonic distortion should be less than 15%. The driver should be
MEANWELL or approved equivalent.
17.6.3.2 LF.4 Emergency Lighting

Emergency light fixtures shall be of the self-contained 3-hour maintained/non-
maintained type, as specified, with 8 watt high efficiency fluorescent lamp and prismatic
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 176
______________________________________________________________________________
diffuser, with maintenance-free NiCad batteries, separate baseplate, plug-in luminaries

with locking screw. The emergency output shall typically be 180 lumens.
Exit sign and other legends, which shall be chosen and approved by the Engineer, shall
be to BS formats, 180mm or 90mm high, as required.
Converter systems shall be of the type suitable for mounting within luminaries, to convert
an ordinary fluorescent luminaries into a self-contained battery-powered emergency
luminaries. The emergency output shall typically be 600 lumens minimum.
17.6.4 Execution
The light fittings shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations or as
approved by the Engineer including the following items:
a. Flexible connecting wires from outlet box to the fixture shall be provided by
the Contractor; connector made of porcelain or thermoplastic material shall be
provided and installed in the outlet boxes for connecting flexible wires to the
point wires.
b. Outlet boxes or any openings in the ceilings or walls shall be covered with
appropriately fabricated accessories to provide an architectural entity to
conceal them.
c. Rawal plugs or nylon plugs with good screws shall be used for fixing purposes.
d. Completely connect and securely mount lighting fixtures. Provide additional
supports and hangers as necessary to securely fasten and support lighting
fixtures to ceiling or structure.
e. Install lighting fixtures plumb and true, and square with ceilings and walls.
Install continuous rows of fixtures such that rows appear as continuous system
without visible vertical or horizontal undulation.
f. Hang pendant fixtures plumb, and with no “kinks” in pendants or cable.
g. Install lamps in each fixture.
Quality insurance include the following items:
a. Mockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install
fixtures for mockups with power and control connections.
b. Obtain Project Director/COR’s approval of fixture for mockups before starting
installations.
c. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
d. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
e. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components
f. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation
g. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper
operation. Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to
normal. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 177
______________________________________________________________________________
verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to

lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
17.6.6 Extra Materials
Extra materials include the items described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
a. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
b. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
c. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit.
d. Ballasts: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
e. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
f. Control Devices: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
17.7 Section -7 Power Cable
17.7.1 Scope
This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and above
17.7.2 Submittals
Product Data - General: For each type of product indicated.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
Field quality-control test reports.
17.7.3 Materials
17.7.3.1 Kv Power Cables

All XLPE cables shall be manufactured to I.E.S. standard 502 or BSS-5467.
The XLPE cables shall be provided with extruded semiconducting conductor screen over
stranded circular copper conductors before XLPE insulation is provided. On each core of
conductor another layer of extruded semi-conducting core screen and copper tape screen
are provided. The number of cores required then shall be put together and the anti-spaces
filled with non-hygroscopic fiber filler and binding tape. The core is extruded with
another PVC bedding.
Galvanized steel armor is provided underneath an overall PVC sheath.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 178
______________________________________________________________________________
17.7.3.2 L.T. Cables

The low tension cables shall be manufactured to the requirements of B.S 2004, B.S. 6004,
and rated at 250/400 and 600/1000 Volts as the case may be including the following items
a. The conductors shall be annealed copper conductors, single or standard
circular or shaped as the case may be, to B.S.S. 6360/69.
b. The conductors specified for use in the cables shall be of at least 98% IASC
conductivity.
c. The reference temperature for the purpose of determining the standard
resistance of the conductors shall be 20 degree centigrade.
d. The conductors shall be insulated with poly-vinyl chloride insulation. The
minimum thickness of the insulation shall be in conformity with the
specifications to which it is manufactured.
e. Power cables shall be multicore cables, insulated and sheathed, armored or
unarmored as required.
f. 3.6Various conductors forming the cables shall be laid together and voids shall
be filled with soft plastic or fibers materials so as to give a circular shape to the
cable.
g. A tough PVC shall be extruded over the cable so as to cover the insulated
conductors and fillers.
h. Where armoring is required, a soft PVC jacket shall be provided over the laid
up cable. Steel wire armoring shall be applied on a tough PVC sheathed
extruded over the cable so as to cover the insulated conductors, fillers, jacket
and armoring.
i. Complete identification of the cable together with Owner's identification
markings if required shall be embossed on the final over sheath of the cable at
every meter length.
17.7.3.3 Cables Terminations
All PVC power cables shall be terminated with suitable brass cable glands for securing
the armor wires and incorporating a packing ring for excursion of water and moisture.
The cables shall be secured at required spacing by means of cleats fixed to walls or roofs
or hangers and where multiple runs occur perforated metal tray made of heavy gauge
galvanized steel shall be used.
17.7.3.4 Cable Markers

For underground installation cable position markers shall be sited in the ground where
cables change direction and at 30 meter intervals along straight runs of the cables.
Markers shall also be provided to locate the position of joints. Cable markers shall be
made of cast iron. Any one of the following words shall be embossed / engraved for the
identification of cable routes.
11000V. Cable.
440V. Cable.
The markers shall comprise of a cast iron circular disc of 115 mm dia. and 10 mm thick
to which an angle iron 25x3 mm bar 710 mm long shall be riveted at one end. The end
of the bar shall be frock-opened up to a length of 75mm. this end shall be embedded in a
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 179
______________________________________________________________________________
cement concrete block of ratio 1:3:6 to a length, of 180mm. The concrete block shall have
a shape of truncated pyramid with base 152x152 mm and a vertical height of 200 mm.
The cable marker shall be buried in the ground such that its total height above ground
level is 267 mm.
17.7.3.5 Cable Joints

The contractor shall be in possession of cable jointing kit and all termination shall be
made by a bonafide and experienced cable jointer. All cable termination boxes kits and
glands shall be of recognized makes and complete with claw clamps, ferrules, lugs, tapes,
solders and jointing compounds.
17.7.3.6 Wires & Cords

The wires & cords for conduit wiring shall be single core, made of stranded copper
conductors, PVC insulated, tested to B.S. 6004, 1975. The voltage grade shall be 300/500
volts or 450/750 V unless otherwise specified on drawings and Bill of Quantities.
In order of preference as approved by the Engineer. The size of the wire shall be as
follows:
a. for light or fan point wiring with 1.5MM square (or 3/029) or as specified in
the B.O.Q.
b. For light circuit wiring with 2.5MM square (or 7/0.29) or as specified in the
B.O.Q.
c. For power plug 15A wiring with 4 MM square (or 7/.036) or as specified in the
B.O.Q.
d. the sizes of cables from Main Panel Board to Sub-Main Panel board to
distribution boards shall be as shown on drawings or as specified in BOQ.
17.7.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
The cables shall be delivered wound over strong drums of suitable dimensions. The cables
ends shall be fastened to the drums and completely protected in suitable manner to protect
any injury to the cables during transportation and handling. The direction of rolling shall
be clearly marked with bold arrows on both faces of the drums.
17.7.5 Execution
The contractor shall be under obligations to provide all labor, material and accessories for
the installation of cables shown on drawings and listed in the BOQ conforming to the
specifications in this section including the following items:
a. The contractor shall provide, without any extra cost, all material for
termination of cables such as lugs, solders, clamps, supports, ferrules, bushes,
fluxes, taps, fixing pins, identification tags, , earthing clips, straps for a
complete terminal jointing operation in accordance with the best modern
practice.
b. For underground cable installation the depth of digging the trench shall be such
that the top surface of the cable shall not be less than 900mm and more than
1100 mm from the finished ground level. It will be contractor’s responsibility
to obtain true trench levels.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 180
______________________________________________________________________________
c. Cable routes indicated on the drawings shall be followed unless otherwise

specified or agreed to by the Engineer. Where change in direction of the cable
is necessitated, the bending radius of the cable shall not be less than the
diameter of the cable drum or 12 times the diameter of the cable whichever is
greater.
d. At all road crossing the cables shall pass through 100/150mm dia. core
thickness minimum 1-1/2” RCC pipes with A class specifications sleeve
shrouded in cast concrete , the mouths of which shall be sealed with cable
bitumen compound of approved quality after drawing the cable. The road cuts
shall be first filled with mud and 50mm size ballast upto 182mm level below
the road surface and after ramming it properly 1500mm thick layer of cement
concrete 1:3:6 shall be laid over it.
e. The cushion of sand to be provided in the trench before laying the cable shall
not be less than 75mm and after laying the cable 150mm. The total depth of
cushion of sand shall be not less than 225mm. Over the final layer of sand,
tiles/bricks or concrete masonry blocks of adequate strength 2" thick and
300mx200mm in size shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
rest of the trench shall be backfilled with earth, in 150mm layers and rammed
properly before dressing.
f. All trenches and holes dug for laying the cables shall not be left open and
unprotected for any length of time without completing the job and backfilling
it to the satisfaction of Engineer. Where trenches are left open due to some
unavoidable reasons the contractor shall exhibit suitable danger signals such
as banners, red flags and red lamps etc.
g. All cables shall always be lead out or lead into the ground through 2.5 meter
long G.I. pipes of 75mm dia. or suitable size with 40% clearance as approved
by the Engineer. The length of the pipe in the ground shall be 600mm. The
pipe should be attached to the poles with approved clamps.
h. Markers of approved design and inscription shall be installed as specified.
i. For installation of cable in perforated metal trays, the cable shall be tied or
bunched properly in an approved manner. Similarly for installation of cables
on cleats or raceway approval of the Engineer shall be obtained.
j. The contractor shall furnish all material and labor to pull in and install wires
and cables as required. The contractor shall also supply, without extra cost,
wire accessories e.g. plugs, solder, clamps, supports, bushes, fixing pins,
adhesive tapes, connectors, identification tags, straps, filling compound and
earthing clips etc. as are required to be furnished for complete wiring
installation in accordance with standard practice. The pulling of wires shall be
taken in hand only when all conduit system is complete. All termination shall
be mechanically strain free and electrically sound.
k. The wiring of the installation shall be strictly in accordance with the scheme,
cable sizes and circuit details as shown on drawings
l. All wiring shall be continuous between terminations and use of connectors or
joints disallowed. Spur and Tee connections are strictly prohibited. Looping in
system shall be followed throughout.
m. Manufacturers recommended lubricant shall be allowed to facilitate pulling of
wires, use of all other kind of oil and soap is prohibited.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 181
______________________________________________________________________________
n. All wires occupying the same conduit shall be pulled together. Wires and cords
at the time of pulling shall not be subjected to a bending radius more than 10
times the overall diameter of cables. Cable manufacturer’s recommendation of
pulling speed and pulling tension on cables shall govern the pulling operation.
o. Not more than 2 circuit wires shall be bunched in the same conduit. Wires of
two different phase, however, shall not be run or terminated in the same outlet
box for single phase wiring of lights, switches and sockets.
p. Porcelain or molded plastic connectors shall be provided for a joint between
light point wiring and light fixture wiring and housed in the outlet box provided
for this purpose. The contactor after terminations are made shall be wrapped in
PVC insulation tape.
q. The quantity and the size of the wire contained in any one conduit shall not be
in excess of the numbers permitted by I.E.E. regulations.
r. All point and circuits wiring shall be solidly earthed by 14SWG (2.5mm
square) PVC insulated wire of color Green, Yellow to serve as CPC which
shall be run inside the conduit.
s. All 5A & 15A socket shall be wired separately direct from D.B. without any
claim of circuit and distinctly from light point wiring, or as specified in B.O.Q.
However 5 Amps socket shall be controlled by D.B, or as specified in B.O.Q.
The cables should be tested according to BS 6004. The following tests shall be carried out
at least
a. Dielectric Strength Test.
b. Instantaneous and longtime break down strength test.
c. Temperature rise test.
d. High voltage test.
Test certificates covering all these tests shall accompany the cables supplied by the
Contractor. After carrying out the tests as laid down in these specifications both ends of the
cables shall be sealed at the manufacturer’s works.
The owner may require the Engineer to witness the tests as specified herein and the
contractor shall make necessary arrangements for the presence of the Engineer on such tests
and obtain their signatures in testimony thereof without any cost to the Owner.
17.8 Section -8 Main L.T. Switch Board
17.8.1 Scope
This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage, power circuit-breaker switchgear rated
1000 V and less for use in AC systems.
The L.T. switchboard shall be indoor type, free standing, free supporting, floor mounted,
totally enclosed, sheet steel clad, dust and vermin proof, completely wired, factory
assembled and suitable for installation back to the wall and capable of front attendance.
The switchboard shall comprise of multi panels suitable for housing, air circuit breakers,
molded case breakers or load break switches as shown on the drawings and as listed in the
schedule of quantities. The switch board shall be designed to suit services conditions and
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 182
______________________________________________________________________________
ensure security and safety during operation, inspection, operation, cleaning and
maintenance. The switch board shall be designed and tested to IEC recommendations. Each
panel shall withstand strain of 2000 Volts insulation level for one minute power frequency
test. The switchboard shall comprise of the following main components and each
removable component of the same rating shall be physically and electrically
interchangeable. Switchboard to British Electrically Standard 41-5 are also acceptable.
17.8.2 Submittals
The submittals should include:
a. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
b. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.
c. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:
d. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
e. Enclosure types and details.
f. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping
sections, and weights of each assembled section.
g. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run,
including phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
h. Current rating of buses.
i. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.
j. Nameplate legends.
k. Mimic-bus diagram.
l. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
m. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over current
protective devices and auxiliary components.
17.8.3 Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working
clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are
prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight
on each support. Indicate field measurements.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color
charts showing colors available for mimic bus.
Field quality-control test reports.
Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load
connections have been made, for record.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 183
______________________________________________________________________________
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 184
______________________________________________________________________________
17.8.4 Materials
17.8.4.1 Submain Panel Boards
The Sub-Main panel board shall be similar to the Main L.T. board and the components
in its fabrication may differ and shall comprise of the components as shown on drawings
and as described or listed in the Schedule of quantities. The rupturing capacity of the each
component for sub-main boards shall be as under:-
a. Air circuit breakers.-35 KA (or as specified)
b. Molded case circuit breaker.-25 KA
All the other details and specification as in Section 17.9 shall be applicable to this section.
17.8.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances,
and physical damage.
If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and
flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to
prevent condensation.
17.8.6 Execution
All labor, equipment, tools and plant required to complete the installation shall be provided
by the Contractor. The switchboard shall be fixed firmly on the floor in perfect line, plumb
and level position. All incoming and outgoing cable connections shall be made including
earth connections.
17.8.7 Examination
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
17.8.8 Project Conditions

Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Government or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
Notify Project Director/COR not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 185
______________________________________________________________________________
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Director/COR’s written

permission.

Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
a. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
b. Test continuity of each circuit.
c. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage factory-authorized service
representative to perform the following:
d. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections,
and equipment.
e. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's
submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring
installation complies with requirements in Division 26 Sections.
f. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
g. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of
equipment and components.
h. Report results in writing.
17.9.3.1 Testing Agency
Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports. Travelling, Boarding/Lodging, Food of the Testing
Agency to Be Borne By the Contractor
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
a. Type Tests
i. Temperature rise test.
ii. Mechanical endurance test.
iii. Making / breaking capacity test.
b. Routine Test
i. High Voltage tests.
c. Visual and Mechanical

Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
i. Switchgear.
ii. Circuit breakers.
iii. Protective relays.
iv. Instrument transformers.
v. Metering and instrumentation.
vi. Ground-fault systems.
vii. Battery systems.
viii. Surge arresters.
ix. Capacitors.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 186
______________________________________________________________________________
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
17.8.10 Adjusting
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics
17.8.11 Protection
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled
for temperature and humidity within manufacturers stipulated service conditions.
17.9 Section -9 Distribution Boards
17.9.1 Scope
This Section includes load centers and panel boards, over current protective devices, and
associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types:
a. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panel boards.
b. Distribution panel boards.
c. Transient voltage surge suppressor panel boards.
The distribution boards shall be either free standing, cubical type or wall mounting type
suitable for surface and/or recessed mounting. Each distribution boards (D.B.) shall be
tropical in design, fully dust and vermin proof and liquid repellent. The cabinet housing the
main components shall be fabricated from mild steel sheets 16 SWG thick and reinforced
with structural steel members welded to it. Front access, mechanically locked and hinged
doors, fully gasketed, having one or two leafs depending upon the size of the cabinet shall
be provided on each cabinet. All operable parts shall be provided with gaskets or lining and
screwed to the main body with chromium plated screws.
The cabinets after fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned completely derusted and
degreased before applying one coat of zinc or lead based primer and then two coats of top
quality synthetic emulsion or stove enamel paint in battleship gray color. All exposed parts
of the D.B's shall be covered with 5mm thick bake lite sheet. A load distribution chart shall
be provided in each D.B showing the areas fed by each circuit and a suitably sized pocket
inside the front door shall be provided for the purpose. Each D.B. shall be delivered
complete with all instruments accessories, rating plates, designations, as approved by the
Engineer.
Suitable cable entry glands shall be provided as required for floor mounted boards on the
incoming cables but for outgoing cables and/or wall mounted boards exact number of
conduit entry holes as are required shall be provided with male brass bushes. The bushes
shall be tin plated and fully shrouded or housed in gasketed compartments.
17.9.2 Submittals
The submitall shall include:
a. Product Data - General: For each type of panel board, over current protective
device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 187
______________________________________________________________________________
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
b. Shop Drawings for each panel board and related equipment.
c. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
d. Enclosure types and details
e. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
f. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and over current protective devices.
g. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual over current
protective devices and auxiliary components.
h. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
i. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
j. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
k. Test procedures used.
l. Test results that comply with requirements.
m. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
n. Panel board Schedules: For installation in panel boards. Submit final versions
after load balancing.
o. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panel boards and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include:
p. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
q. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
17.9.3 Materials
17.9.4.1 Components
The main components e.g. earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB / RCCB), molded case
circuit breakers, load break switches. HRC fuses and instrument as shown on the
drawings and as described in schedule of quantities shall be the same as described in
section 9. However miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) used in D.B's are briefly described
hereunder:
17.9.4.2 MCBs
The incoming shall have triple pole mcb's suitable for use on 415V 50Hz, AC and the
outgoing mcbs shall be single pole or single phase for use on 220V, 50Hz, AC. The
ratings are as shown in drawings and/or described in the schedule of quantities.
The mcbs shall be molded case type having hydraulic magnetic short circuit releases,
contacts, operating mechanism and arcing chambers.
The mcbs shall be manufactured and tested to BSS 3871/1966, and shall have a rupturing
capacity of 7.5 KA or as specification B.O.Q. The final circuit mcb's on the outgoing,
shall however be rated 5KA.
17.9.4.3 Fabrication and Features
The fabrication should include following:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 188
______________________________________________________________________________
a. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,
match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
b. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door
within hinged trim cover.
c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant
treatment or primer coat.
d. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal
frame, inside panel board door.
e. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
f. Bus Bars of Power Distribution and Branch Circuit Panel boards: Provide hard
drawn copper. The neutral bus shall be isolated from both the ground bus and
the cabinet, except at the service entrance or at the output of separately derived
systems and shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC.
g. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or mechanical type suitable for use with
conductor material.
h. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment
ground conductors; bonded to box.
i. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
j. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment
ground conductors; insulated from box.
k. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
l. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panel boards: Same gage and finish as panel board
front with flanges for attachment to panel board, wall, and ceiling or floor.
m. Feed-through Lugs: Compression or mechanical type suitable for use with
conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main
device.
n. Provide 10 percent spare circuit breakers, 20 percent spaces for future breakers,
and 20 percent overall spare current carrying capacity for future expansion.
17.9.4 Execution
All labour, equipment, tools, plant and accessories required to complete the installation
shall be provided by the Contractor. The distribution board shall be fixed as required in
perfect line and plumb. All earth terminations shall be made on the neutral block.
17.9.4.1 Testing
All D.B's shall be tested at manufacturer's works and tests shall be witnessed by the
Engineer without incurring any additional expense to the Owner.
17.10 Section -10 Earthing
17.10.1 Scope
The contractor shall be under obligation to supply all material and labor for the
completion of the Earthing system as shown on drawings, listed in the schedule / Bill of
Quantities and conforming to specifications laid down, hereinafter. The completed
installation shall, in general, conform to British Code of Practice CP 1013/1965 and
regulations of Pakistan Electricity Act. In the case of any conflict, specifications laid
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 189
______________________________________________________________________________
down hereinafter shall be followed. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems
and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented
by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.
17.10.2 Submittals
The submittals shall include:
a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
b. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations
of grounding features
c. Test wells.
d. Ground rods.
e. Ground rings.
f. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
g. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
h. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency’s field supervisor.
i. Field quality-control test reports.
17.10.3 Materials
17.10.3.1 Circuit Protective Conductor
The Circuit Protective Conductors and earthing leads shall be solid hard drawn,
insulated electrolytic copper wires of sizes given on the drawings and Bill of Quantities.
All fixing accessories such as saddles, copper bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
provided. The size of conductor above 19/.083 shall be of 1-1/8" flat copper strip or as
specified.
17.10.3.2 Earth Point
It shall comprised of 1” dia & 10 ft long steel rod with 1mm copper conductor sleeve
of 99.97% imported copper as earth electrode 100ft below ground level including cost
of boring and lowering the rod 100ft down, complete with clamp and appropriate size
of stranded copper conductor from rod to ground surface in 1½” dia G.I. pipe (length
20' only) with tee on top having watering cap, earth access hole comprising of 8" dia,
12" deep 16-SWG M.S. cylinder with 12-SWG M.S. cover, both hot dipped galvanized,
as per detail shown in drawings.
17.10.3.3 Earth Connecting Point
The earth connecting point in switch room or sub-station shall comprise
300mmx50mmx5mm (1'x2"x1/4") electrolytic copper bar having as many terminals of
3/8" dia. copper bolts, nuts, and washers as are required. The earth bar shall be fixed
on bus bar insulators of appropriate size. The fixing bolts shall be galvanized and
provided for fixing the bar on the wall. The bar shall be tinned for protection against
corrosion. Copper tapes from various equipment and earth point shall be terminated on
this bar.
17.10.3.4 Earth Electrode
For the earthing of poles or any devices or equipment rates less than 15 KW, earth
assembly as shown on the drawing shall be installed.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 190
______________________________________________________________________________
17.10.3.5 Manhole
Cast concrete inspection manhole covers shall be provided on each earth point, as
shown on drawings.
17.10.4 Execution
The execution shall include the following:
a. The circuit protective conductor (CPC) shall be run, inside, all along the
conduit installation. The CPC shall be insulated as specified elsewhere.
b. The C.P.C. or copper strip shall be laid all along the length of perforated metal
tray or walls of masonry ducts, fixed at 3' intervals. At terminations the CPC
or traps shall be bolted firmly to the equipment as per standard practice. Copper
tape at straight through joints shall be brazed or cad welded. Joints between
standard CPC shall be avoided or cad welded.
17.10.5 Quality Control
For Testing, engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-
control testing. The following field quality-control testing shall be performed.
a. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
b. Test completed grounding system at each building electric service entrance,
electric/telecom rooms, generator system, buildings and lightning protection
system where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service
disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Tests at
each ground rod before any conductors are connected are not required if a
clamp-on ground tester is used. Measure ground resistance not less than two
full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being
moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without
chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance.
c. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other
grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to
the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other
phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve
test results. Maximum value of acceptable system ground resistance is 1 ohms.
d. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values,
drive additional ground rods until resistance meets specified values.
e. Water pumping motor (if recommended and installed) will be switched
automatically.
17.11 Section -11 Testing and Commissioning
17.11.1 Scope
Upon completion of the installation the contractor shall perform field tests on all
equipment, material and systems. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 191
______________________________________________________________________________
Engineer for the purpose of demonstration equipment or system compliance with

specifications.
The contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all tools, instruments, test equipment,
material, connections, etc., and furnish all personnel including supervision and 'Stand by"
labour required for the testing, setting and adjustment of all electrical facilities and their
component parts, including putting the same into operation.
All tests shall be made with the proper regard for the protection of the equipment, and
the contractor shall be responsible for adequate protection to all personnel during such
tests.
The contractor shall record all test values of the tests made by him on all equipment,
giving both "as found" and 'as left" conditions. Three (3) copies of all test data shall be
given to the Engineer for record purposes.
The witnessing of any test by the Engineer do not relieve the contractor of his guarantees
for materials, equipment and workmanship as specified in the Conditions of Contract.
The contractor shall provide proper date and time schedules for testing.
Earth pit filling material will be used to achieve the earthing resistance less than 1 (one)
ohm.
This Section includes general requirements for field testing and inspection of electrical
systems. More detailed requirements are specified in each Section listed in the “Related
Sections” paragraph.
General requirements include the following:
a. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
b. Suitability of test equipment.
c. Calibration of test instruments.
d. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
e. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
17.11.2 Type of Tests
17.11.2.1 T.2 Insulation Tests

Insulation resistance tests shall be made on all electrical equipment, using a self-
contained instrument such as the direct indicating ohm-meter of the generator type
direct current potentials shall be used in these tests shall be as follows :-
Circuit under 230 volts - 500 volts test.
Circuit 230 volts to 400 volts-1000 volts test.
The minimum acceptable insulation resistance value will be 5 Mega ohms.
The test equipment for insulation testing will be furnished by the contractor.
Before making connections at the ends of each cable run, the insulation resistance test
of each cable shall be made. Each conductor of a multicore cable shall be tested
individually to each other conductor of the group and also to earth. If insulation
resistance test readings are found to be less than the specified minimum in any
conductor, the entire cable shall be replaced and the new cable tested.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 192
______________________________________________________________________________
All transformers, switchgear shall be given an insulation resistance measurement test

to ground after installation but before any wiring is energized. Insulation tests shall be
made between open contacts of circuit breakers, switches and between each phase and
earth.
If the insulation resistance of the circuit under test is less than that specified above, the
cause of the low reading shall be determined and removed. Corrective measure shall
include dry out procedure by means of heaters if equipment is found to contain
moisture. Where corrective measures have been necessary and the insulation resistance
reading taken after the correction has been made it should satisfy the requirements
specified herein. Repeated insulation resistance maintenance test shall be made twice
and at least 12 hours apart. The maximum range for each reading on the 3 successive
tests shall not exceed 20% of the average value. After all tests have been made
successfully, the equipment shall be reconnected.
17.11.2.2 T.3 Earth Resistance Tests

Earth resistance tests shall be made by the contractor on the earthing system, separating
and re-connecting each earth connection as may be required by the Engineer. If it is
indicated that soil treatment or other corrective measures are required to lower the
ground resistance values, the Engineer will determine the extent of such corrective
measures.
The electrical resistance of the ECP together with the resistance of the earthing lead
measured from the connection with earth electrode to any other position in the
completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.
Earth resistance test shall be performed as per Electrical Inspector's requirements.
Where more than one earthing sets are installed, the earth resistance test between two
sets shall be measured by means of resistance bridge instrument. The earth resistance
between two sets shall not exceed one ohm.
17.11.2.3 T.4 Transformer & Switchgear.

In addition to the insulation resistance tests on the transformer, a polarity or phase
rotation test shall also be made. Auxiliary devices, breather, bucholz relay etc. shall be
tested for satisfactory operation.
Each air circuit breaker shall be operated electrically and mechanically, ascertaining
that handle mechanisms are operating. All interlock control circuit shall be checked out
for proper connections in accordance with the wiring diagrams given by the
manufacturer.
The contractor shall identify the phase of all switchgear and power cables by stenciling
the switchgear and tagging the cables so that the phases can be identified for
connections to give proper phase sequence.
Series overcurrent trip elements shall be checked against rating of equipment served.
Also to checked for correct size, function of fuses disconnect switches, number of inter
locks indicating lights, alarms and remote control devices. Name plates shall be
checked for proper designation of equipment served.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 193
______________________________________________________________________________
17.11.2.4 T.5 Operating Tests

Current load measurement shall be made on equipment and on all power and lighting
feeders.
The current reading shall be taken in each phase wire and in each neutral wire while
the circuit or equipment is operating under actual load conditions. Clip-on ammeters
may be used to take current readings. All light fittings shall be tested electrically and
mechanically to check whether they comply with the standard of specifications.
Fluorescent light fittings shall be tested so that when functioning properly no flickering
is observed or choke noise is heard.
The lightning protection system shall be tested for earth resistance and for electrical
and mechanical joints. The combined resistance to earth to the whole lightning
protection system shall not exceed 5 ohms.
The alarm system, telephone system, sound distribution system shall be checked and
tested as per manufacturer's instructions and in the presence of the Engineer or his
representative.
After any equipment has been tested, checked for operation etc., and is accepted by the
Owner's representative the contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
such equipment for assurance that subsequent testing of other equipment of system do
not disturb the completed work.
17.11.2.5 General Tests and Inspections

Testing Preparation
Prepare systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform
preliminary tests to ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for
Independent Testing Agency testing. Include the following minimum preparations as
appropriate:
Perform insulation-resistance tests.
Perform continuity tests.
Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).
Provide a stable source of electrical power for test instrumentation at each test location.
Field Test and Inspection Reporting: In addition to requirements specified in Related
Sections, ensure that each test and inspection report includes the following:
Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved
in tests.
Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 194
SECTION 18– STEEL WORKS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 18 - STEEL WORKS

18.1 Scope of Work
The work covered under this section of Specifications, consists of providing all material,
labour, plant, equipment, appliances and performing all operations connected with the
fabricating and erection of all metal work, millwork, construction, assembly, surface finish
treatment of all type of doors, windows, railing, grating, grills, embedded metal work,
fences, gates, shutters etc., and incidentals, associated works appurtenances, procuring and
applying preservatives, installation of “Finish Hard Ware” in connection with finish metal
work as per details shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The scope of this
section is covered with detailed specifications as laid down herein.
18.2 Submittals
18.2.1 Shop Drawings

Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings which shall show full construction details,
quantities and locations, with metal gauges, reinforcing, cut-outs, hold-fast and attachment
to adjacent construction and materials. Shop Drawings shall be submitted well in time to
allow for checking, revisions, agreement, manufacturer, delivery and installation to suit the
building programme.
18.2.2 Samples
Contractor shall submit representative samples of a typical metal door, hardware,
accessories and any other product required for the approval of the Engineer.
For metal shutters the Contractor shall similarly submit cross-sections of typical welded
jointed or assembled frame, in specified thickness showing reinforcing, welding and prime
paint coat.
18.2.3 Methodology
Methodology for fabrication, installation, erection and fixing.
18.3 Applicable Standards

Latest additions of following ASTM, Pakistan, and British standards are relevant to these
specification wherever applicable.
ASTMA 36-81 Structural steel specifications
ASTMA307-80 Carbon steel externally and Internally Threaded Standard
Fasteners Specifications.
BS729-71 Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles.
AWSD 12 Recommended Practice for welding steel.
AASHTOStandard Specifications for Corrugated Sheet Steel
FF-W-92Washers, Metal, Flat (Plain)
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 195
______________________________________________________________________________
FF-W-84Washers, Lock (Spring)

QQ-F-46Floor Plate, Steel Rolled
RR-G-661Grating, Metal, Floor
RR-T-650Treads, Metallic and Non-Metallic, Non-Skid
RR-C-271Chain and Attachments, Welded, Weld less and Roller Chain.
18.4.1 Finishing
After erection, all proposed surfaces shall be checked and unpainted areas adjacent to field
connections and damaged areas shall be given a finishing coat according to the same
standards as required for the shop coat and the same primer as used in the shop coat.
18.4.2 Tolerances
A variation of 1 mm is permissible in the overall length of members with both ends finished
for contact bearing. The bearing surface is to be prepared to a common plane by milling.
Members without end finish for contact bearing which are to be framed to other steel parts
of the structure shall have a variation from detailed length not greater than 3 mm.
Rolling tolerance of all shapes and profile according to AISC shall be in accordance with
the provisions of the ASTM A.6. These shall be checked by the Contractor before being
worked upon and shall be rejected if found not within limits.
18.5 Materials
18.5.1 General Requirements

All contours and arises in metal door shall be true and sharp as can be produced in the
thickness of metal required.
Construction joint of steel work welded to full depth and width or equivalent spice plates
shall be welded on unexposed faces of frames. Exposed surface of welded joints shall be
dressed and ground smooth to produce invisible connections.
Reinforcement and stiffeners shall be welded to the inside of the frame surfaces.
Weather baffles shall be integrally rolled shall provide contact on all the four sides of the
operating ventilators.
Weep holes and drips shall be provided for drainage in accordance with drawings or
instructions of Engineer.
18.5.2 Sheet Steel

Sheet steel for structures where no welding is required shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM A-366 (for Cold Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial quality) or ASTM A-
569 (Standard Specifications for Cold Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet, commercial quality). For
Structures where welding is required sheet steel shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A-569.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 196
______________________________________________________________________________
18.5.3 Welding Rods

Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, welding rod shall conform to the following
requirements;
18.5.4 Structural Welding Rod

Welding rod for manual welding of structural carbon and low alloy steels shall conform to
the applicable requirements of American Welding Society. For structural, Carbon steel E-
60 or E-70 series, low-hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
18.5.5 Corrosion Resisting Welding Rod

Welding rod for corrosion-resisting welds shall conform to the applicable requirements of
American Welding Society for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium series, low-
hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
For type 304 Corrosion-Resistant Steel, E-306 series shall be used for welds to type 304
steel whereas E-309 series shall be used for welds to structural carbon steel.
For Type 347 Corrosion-Resistant Steel or Corrosion-Resistant Clad Steel, E-347 series
shall be used for shop welds to Type 347 steel or clad steel;
E-309 Cb series shall be used for field welds to Type 347 steel or clad steel whereas E-309
Cb series shall be used for welds to structural carbon steel.
18.5.6 Aluminium Welding Rod

Welding rod for aluminium welding shall conform to the applicable requirements of
American Welding Society for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Metal Arc-Welding
Electrodes and Alloy Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes, as applicable, to meet the
requirements of sub-section 5.3 Welding Rods.
18.5.7 Bolts, Nuts and Washers

Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, bolts and nuts shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM-A 307, Standard Specification for Low-Carbon
Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. Bolts shall be grade A for
general application, with square or hexagon heads. Turned bolts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 307, Standard Specifications for Low-Carbon Steel Externally
and Internally Threaded Fasteners, for regular semi-finished type, except that tolerance of
the unthreaded portion of the body shall be 0.0 mm over the nominal diameter to 0.1542
mm under the nominal diameter. Where bolts of material, type, dimensions and tolerance
other than those specified as standard in ASTM-A 307 are indicated they shall conform to
the applicable requirements of ANSI B 18.2 square and Hexagon Bolts and Nuts, for bolts
and nuts of the types dimensions and tolerances indicated. Where bolt threading differs
from that specified as standard in ASTM-A 307, threading shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI B1.1, Unified Screw Threads, as applicable to the bolts indicated.
Nuts shall be of similar material, finish, class of fit and thread series as their companion
bolts and shall be washer-faced except as otherwise indicated or specified.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 197
______________________________________________________________________________
18.5.8 Washers
Cut Washers. Cut washers, unless otherwise indicated shall be of structural grade steel and
shall conform to dimensions of the manufacturer’s regular standard for plain washers for
the size of bolts used. They shall conform to the applicable provisions of Federal
Specification FF-W-92, Washers, Metal, Flat (Plain), for Type A, Grade 1 washer of class
as shown on the drawing.
Lock Washers. Except as otherwise specified lock washers shall conform to the
requirements of Federal Specification FF-W-84 for Washers, Lock (Spring). Unless
otherwise indicated or specified, washers shall be Class A Carbon Steel, Style 3, heavy.
18.5.9 Steel Floor Plating (Raised Pattern)

Steel floor plates shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification QQ-F-461b(I).
Floor Plate, Steel, Rolled, Class I floor plate of an approved raised pattern.
18.5.10 Steel Gratings

Steel grating shall conform to the applicable requirements of Federal Specification RR-
G-661b, Grating, Metal, Floor (except for Naval Vessels) Type 1. All panels shall be
banded on all edges.
18.5.11 Safety Treads

Safety treads shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification RR-T-650,
Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic Nonskid, for type as shown on the Drawings.
18.5.12 Chain and Attachments

Chain and attachments shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-
271a(I), Chain and Attachments, Welded, Weld less, and Roller Chain. Chain shall be of
type, grade and class as shown on the Drawings. Types and classes of attachments and
accessories shall be as indicated on the drawings or as required for the intended purposes.
18.5.13 Turnbuckles
Turnbuckles shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specifications FF-T-791a(3),
Turnbuckle, for turnbuckles of the type and class shown on the Drawings.
18.5.14 Wire Rope

Wire rope shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specifications RR-W-410a (2),
Wire Rope and Strand, for wire rope of the type, class, construction, size and style shown
on the Drawings.
18.5.15 Metal Pipe, Tubing and Fittings

Metal pipe, tubing, fittings and valves required for the installation of piping required to
be furnished and installed by the Contractor, shall conform to the applicable requirements
of Section 2F-Piped Utility Services for the type and class of piping indicated.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 198
______________________________________________________________________________
18.5.16 Metal Guard Rail

Metal guard roll of the highway type shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO-
M180-60, Standard specifications for corrugated Sheet Steel Beams for Highway Guard
Roll.
18.5.17 Anchors
Roads, Nuts and Washers, Embedded rods, nuts and washers shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM-A 307, Specification for Low Carbin Steel Externally and
Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. Anchors plates shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM-A 36, Specification for Structural Steel. Unless otherwise noted,
anchor bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A-307.
Welded Concrete Anchor Studs. Steel for studs shall conform to ASTM-A 108,
Specification for Cold-Finished Carbons Steel Bars and Shafting. Grades 1015-1020;
having a minimum yield strength of 345 MPa an ultimate tensile strength of 415 MPa
and minimum elongation of 20 percent in 50 mm.
18.6 Execution
18.7.1 Fabrication
Prior to Fabrication, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer about any problem or
doubet/error discovered in the drawings for clarification / rectification well in time to
prevent any fabrication error. Fabrication shall not be commenced until approval has been
obtained from the Engineer.
The Fabrication works includes the following:
a. Straightening Material
Rolled material, before being worked upon, must be straightening within tolerances
by ASTM specifications A6. Straightening necessarily shall be done by mechanical
means or by the application of a limited amount of localized heat. The temperature
of heated areas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 590 Deg. C
for A 514 steel or 650 Deg. C for other steels.
b. Cutting
As far as possible cutting must be done by shearing. Oxygen cutting shall be done
where sheet cutting is not possible and shall preferably be done by a machine. All
edges shall be free from gauges, notches or burs. If necessary the same shall be
removed by grinding.
c. Holes Punching and Drilling
Holes shall be punched where thickness of the material is not greater than the
diameter of bolt or rivet or + 3 mm whichever is bigger.
Where the thickness of the material is greater than 3 mm the holes shall either be
drilled or sub-punched and then reamed to size. The die for all sub-punched holes
and the drill of all subdrilled holes shall be at least 2 mm smaller than the nominal
diameter of the rivet or bolt. Holes for A514 steel plates over 12 mm thick shall be
drilled.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 199
______________________________________________________________________________
Holes shall be drilled or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal, not
more than 2 mm larger than the connector diameter. Holes shall not be made or
enlarged by burning. Material having a thickness in excess of the connector
diameter and material thicker than 22 mm shall be drilled. Holes shall be clean-cut
without torn or ragged edges or outside burrs resulting from drilling operations.
d. Holes, Slots and Openings

Holes, slots, and openings required by other work shall be provided together with
necessary reinforcing as shown and by using suitable templates for proper location
of these openings. Steel requiring adjustment shall be provided with slotted holes
as shown. No change in location of openings shall be permitted without prior
approval.
e. Welding Requirement
Structural welding shall not begin until joint elements are bolted or tacked in
intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown with allowance for any weld
shrinkage that is expected. Heavy sections and those having a high degree of
restraint shall be welded with low hydrogen type electrodes. No members shall be
spliced without approval.
The processes listed in AWS D 1.1 are permitted, subject to the restrictions of
article 3-2 “Welding process Restrictions”.
f. Workmanship
Unless otherwise authorized or specified, welding shall be by the electric are
welding process, using a method which excludes the atmosphere from the molten
metal. Welding, unless specified otherwise shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the American Welding Society’s D1.0, Code for Welding in
Building Construction as applicable to the work required to be done. Important
joints and connections which will be heavily stressed in service, such as
connections and all field splices shall be mode with special precautions to ensure
that such joints are sound and without flaws. The Contractor shall assign to such
work, the welders best qualified to perform such welding operation. Welding
operators, including tack welders and machine welders shall be qualified, and as
necessary requalified, for the particular type or work to be done in accordance with
American Welding Society’s B3.0 Standard Qualification Procedures.
g. Welding Equipment
Manual and automatic arc-welding machines and equipment may be of either the
alternating current or direct current type and shall conform to the requirement for
arc-welding equipment as set forth in the American Welding Society’s D2.0,
Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway, Bridges. When the use of gas
welding equipment is specifically authorized by the Engineer, such equipment shall
also conform to this specification.
h. Filler Metal
Unless otherwise specified or authorized, all deposited weld metal shall have
elastic limits and ultimate tensile strengths not less than those specified for the
respective base metals welded; shall have an elongation in 50 m, using annealed
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 200
______________________________________________________________________________
samples, of at least ninety-five percent of the value specified for the base metal or
at least seventy-five percent using unannealed samples; shall have chemical
composition similar to that of the base metal; and when subjected to approved tests
shall have corrosion resistance at least equivalent to that of the base metal. These
properties shall be determined by testing in accordance with the applicable
provisions of the American Welding Society Specifications, or as otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
Except as otherwise specified in this Clause, welding electrodes and rods shall be
as specified in sub-section 5A-2.02 Welding Rod, and shall be of a type and grade
approved by the Engineer; of such chemical composition and physical properties
as will produce the characteristics specified above; and so adapted to the base,
metal and thickness of parts to be welded as will ensure effective penetration and
an intimate uniform fusion of the filler and base metals, in all welding positions
and under all conditions to be encountered, without undercutting or overlapping.
The electrodes shall conform to the applicable requirements of the American
Society for Testing and Materials. The use of mild steel electrodes for welding
corrosion-resistant steel will not be permitted.
Welding electrodes to be used for making welds on the clad side of corrosion-
resisting, steel clad plate shall conform to the applicable requirements of American
Welding Society Specifications for Corrosion resisting Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Steel Covered Welding Electrodes, Classification No. E309 or E310, to
cover the exposed carbon steel. After cover of the carbon steel has been made,
electrodes of Classification E308 may be used in lieu of Classification E309 or
E310.
i. Riveting
Punching, drilling, reaming and riveting shall be in accordance with the best
commercial practice for the type of work concerned and as approved by the
Engineer.
j. Bolted Connections
Bolt Holes
Holes for unfinished bolts shall be not more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal
diameter of the bolts. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, holes
for turned bolts shall be not more than 0.5 mm larger than the nominal diameter of
the bolt, holes for unfinished bolts shall be sub-punched and reamed or sub-drilled
and reamed or drilled from the solid. Holes for turned bolts shall be truly cylindrical
throughout and drilling or reaming shall be done after the parts to be connected are
assembled. Poor matching of holes shall be the cause for rejection.
High Strength Bolted Connections
High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with the applicable
requirements of the specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM-A 325 High-
Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain
Hardened Washers, or A490 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints. Burrs shall be removed from around bolt holes.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 201
______________________________________________________________________________
k. Painting and Galvanizing- Surface Preparation

All structural steel material i.e. rolled steel section, plates, flat bards, chequered
plates shall be cleaned free from loose scale, rust, burrs, slag etc., by sand blasting.
The sand used for this purpose shall be free from earth, dust, clay and moisture.
The size of sand particles, air pressure and size of the hose nozzle shall be
correlated to give proper and acceptable surface.
Material which is to be used for fabrication of components to be galvanized later
on shall not be cleaned.
l. Painting
Immediately after surface preparation all material should be given a prime coat of
rust preventive paint.
After fabrication and test assembly all shop assembles shall be given one shop coat
of Prime paint and then one coat of enamel paint.
One final coat of enamel paint shall be applied after erection of all components.
The type of primer and enamel paint to be applied shall be specified on the
drawings.
The thickness of each coat of paint shall be in accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s specifications / recommendations.
All other requirements for the specified paint system shall be in accordance with
the paint manufacturer’s specifications / recommendations.
The Contractor shall use the best quality of the type of paint specified and shall get
the same approved by the Engineer.
Steel Work / Surfaces not to be Painted include Steel work to be encased /
embedded in concrete or surface in contact with concrete or grout shall be given a
cement wash after sand blasting.
Machine finished surfaces shall not be painted but shall be coated with rust
preventive compound approved by the Engineer immediately after finishing. Such
surfaces shall also be protected with wooden pads or other suitable means for
transportation. Unassembled pins, keys and bolt thread shall be greased and
wrapped with moisture resistant paper.
Contact surfaces of connections using high strength bolts in friction type
connection shall not be painted. Such surfaces o f all components, after fabrication,
shall be cleaned free of paint, grease, burrs, slag by means of sand blasting. No,
coating whatsoever shall then be applied to such surfaces. The surface roughness
for high strength friction grip bolts is a very important factor and therefore
components shall not be erected unless duly approved by the Engineer.
m. Zinc Coating (Galvanizing)
Components should be galvanized after complete fabrication i.e., welding, drilling
etc. The process should consist of removal of rust and mill scale by picking in
hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid followed by water wash and preflushing in
tanks containing zinc ammonium chloride and then flushing with ammonium
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 202
______________________________________________________________________________
chloride. The flushed components should then be passed through a drying oven
prior to immersion in a bath of virtually pure molten zinc.
Wherever specified by the Engineer zinc coating shall be applied in a manner and
of a thickness and quality specified for zinc (hot galvanized) coating on products
fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.
18.7.2 Installation
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper protection and installation of all items
furnished. Should the prime coat be damaged, or rust scale appears, he shall at this own
expense and at the Engineer’s direction, have all exposed surfaces cleaned to bare bright
and re-primed with an approved priming coat before finish painting.
All items shall be installed plumb and square and shall be solidly anchored in a good
workman-like manner in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the protection of installed items from damages by trades. All items
shall be left in operating neat and clean condition free from dirt, finger marks etc. The
Contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning before final acceptance.
18.7 Delivery and Storage
18.7.1 Handling
Structural steel shall not be handled until the paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be
exercised to avoid abrasions and other damages.
18.7.2 Protection
Material shall be stacked out of mud and dirt and proper drainage be provided. Protection
measures from damages or soiling by adjacent construction operations shall be provided.
18.7.3 Storage
Storage of fabricated steel at the job Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Material at the Job site shall be stored in all manner which does not exceed design loads of
existing or newly constructed structure. Material shall be protected against Corrosion or
deterioration.
18.8 Measurement and Payment

18.8.1 General
Except otherwise specified herein or elsewhere in the Contract, no measurement and
payment will be made for the under mentioned specified works related to the relevant items
of the BOQ. The cost thereof shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract unit
rate of the respective items of the BQO.
Nuts, Bolts, Screw, rivets, beads, fillets, welds and welding rods.
Painting, galvanizing and anti-corrosion prime coating.
Notches, holes and slots and no allowance shall be made for rolling margin or weld metal.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 203
______________________________________________________________________________
Cutting, bending, fabricating.

All embedded metal parts, metal fittings and fixtures required for the operational process.
Cleaning with sand blasting.
Hinges, hold-fasts, latches, aldrops, stopper handles.
18.8.2 Measurement
Measurement of acceptably completed works of steel doors, windows, rolling shutters etc.
will be made on the basis of net actual area in square feet of steel fabricated and installed
in position as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
18.8.3 Payment
Payment will be made for acceptable measured quantity on the basis of Contract unit rate
per Square feet and shall constitute full compensation for all the works related to the item.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 204
SECTION 19– ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSEMENT
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 19 - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

19.1 General
EIA is a process whereby an assessment is made of the environmental impacts which may
result from a proposed project and its alternatives. It is a planning tool providing an aid to
decision makers, policy makers, developers, industrialists and the public.
According to Principle 17 of Rio Conference (1992),” Environmental Impact Assessment
as a national instrument shall be undertaken for proposed activities that are likely to have a
significant adverse impact on the environment and are subject to a decision of a competent
authority”.
Following are the Objectives of Conducting an Environmental Impact Assessment
a. To identify and evaluate all potentially significant environmental impacts of
proposed undertakings, at a stage when alternative solutions, including remedial
measures and the alternative of not proceeding, are available to decision makers
b. To ensure that the proponent of an undertaking and government agencies required

to approve the undertaking has given due consideration to the means of avoiding
or mitigating adverse environmental impacts prior to granting approval to
proceed with an undertaking
19.2 The EIA Process

The Environmental Impact Assessment process vary from country to country and even
between state to state in several countries. The major objective is to determine whether or
not the proposed activity have the potential to adversely affect the existing environment of
the area. Whilst, it is impossible to have a development with zero damage to the
environment, yet, it is far more beneficial to attend to the likely impacts and plan on
elimination or minimization of potentially adverse impacts through alternatives,
technological measures, administrative measures, trainings, and legislative bounds.
In Pakistan, requirement of an Environmental Statement was initiated in 1994. Later,
Section 12 of Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (1997) required that an EIA or IEE
was to be submitted for approval of a project having potential for damaging the
environment. IEE/EIA Review Regulations (2000) further elaborated on whether EIA or
IEE (Initial Environmental Examination) or none was required for a list of project
categories. The requirement of IEE and EIA was based either upon the cost of the project
or potential environmental impacts of a project.
Before the 18th Amendment, Environment was a federal subject and EIA was conducted
under Section 12 of the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (1997). Although, the spirit
is same and a standard process is followed to conduct EIA, it is now a provincial subject
and carried out under provincial acts.
19.3 Conducting an EIA

Follwing are the steps involved in conducting an EIA
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 205
______________________________________________________________________________
Step-1: Screening – What is needed for the project, IEE or EIA?

Step-2: Scoping
a. Identify the SCOPE of investigation within well-defined technical and physical
boundaries of the project.
b. Define Team, role of each team member.
c. Determine the potentially significant environmental impacts and their level of
significance
d. Define which areas to be investigated and the extent of investigation.
e. Explore what alternative are available? Which one is the best alternative and
why?
Step-3: Conduct Detailed Environmental Assessment as defined in the SCOPING
a. Get Lab tests done for air, water, noise, and soil.
b. Determine the quantity and quality of the expected wastewater and define how
the wastewater will be treated and its likely impacts on the quality of the
receiving water-body.
c. Where will the project get the drinking or process water and its impacts on
ground water table or surface water?
d. What will be the impacts of the project on the existing fauna and flora?
e. How will the traffic within the project area as well as in the surroundings be
affected and how will that impact be minimized during construction and
operation of the project.
f. How will be the air, water and noise pollution be kept at its minimum during
all the phases of the project.
g. What will be the socio-economic impacts of the project and working labor on
the surrounding communities?
h. How will be natural slopes and storm water drainage pattern be affected?
i. How many trees be removed and how many new planted?
j. Where will be the material stored and labor camp installed?
k. What Safety measures will be adopted and how safety training will be
imparted?
Step-4: Draft report preparation and submission along with appropriate fee, Schedule-IV
form, 11 Hard and 2 Soft copies of the document to the relevant EPA Office.
Step-5: Arrangements for Public Hearing (in case of EIA only)
Step-6: If draft submitted by the proponents meets the fundamental requirements of EIA,
EPA would ask the proponent to advertise for public hearing.
Step-7: Conduct of public hearing and incorporation of public concerns as well as concerns
raised by EPA before re-submission of EIA.
Step-8: Review by EPA (45 Days for IEE and 90 Days for EIA).
Step-9: Decision by EPA along with terms and conditions of project operation during
construction and operation of the project or to re-produce the EIA after resolving
the outstanding issues.
Low Cost (Affordable) Housing Project falls under Schedule I of the IEE/EIA Review
Regulation (2000) of the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (1997). Subsection I
requires that an IEE (Initial Environmental Examination) be carried out for Projects under
“Urban Development and Tourism”.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 206
______________________________________________________________________________
Major environmental impacts of such project will include but not limited to:
a. Changes in land use patterns (from agricultural to residential)
b. Changes in natural storm water drainage pattern
c. Changes and flora and fauna population and wildlife habitat
d. Utilization of natural resources partly recoverable
e. Solid waste and wastewater generation
f. Changes in traffic patterns resulting in rise of air and noise pollution
All of the above impacts are manageable with committed environmental management.
In principal the above guidelines will be followed for assessing the Environmental Impact
Assessment for all the projects undertaken by NAPHDA, however EIA being a provincial
subject regulatory requirements of concerned Environmental Protection Agencies will be
followed.
Ensuring sanctity of protected areas/Biodiversity by not targeting such areas for housing
must also be enlisted the measures of Adaptation of Climate resilient infrastructure must
be encouraged
A sub-section under section 19 may be added as that of “Environmental Management Plan
for Schemes/projects under NAPHDA” primarily for contractors, that incorporate potential
impacts and mitigation measures from different activities involved e.g., construction,
operation, general environment issues and Health & Safety considerations. A
sample/template in this regard is sharedin the Table below:
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 207
______________________________________________________________________________
Table - Environmental Management Plan

Housing
Scheme Potential Impacts Mitigation Measures
Activities
Construction/ Rehabilitation/ Phase

Excavation Loss of material into Excavated material should be appropriately disposed off
surroundings in case of Concrete mixing on the ground should not be allowed
improper disposal Deep ditching should be consulted with Assistant/Deputy
Contamination of Director Environment if required
ground water if Structural insulated panels with concrete mixture should be
hazardous materials used to make foundation waterproof and avoid seepage
percolate in the ground Foundation stabilizing materials should be used
Safety of labor must be ensured
Demolition, Air and noise pollution Activities with intensive noise and air pollution to be
Construction disrupt nearby also lead undertaken during least disruptive times and holidays
and to eye / ear infection & Provide workers with protective gears e.g masks, helmets,
renovation respiratory related gloves, and gumboots
activities complications to Provide construction workers with First Aids Kits, proper
workers protective equipment
Debris from demolition Collection of all debris from demolition activities for
of the buildings would disposal to a designated waste disposal site with knowledge
lead to aesthetic damage of local authorities
and environmental Giving out unwanted materials from demolished structures
degradation. such as iron sheets and timbers to local communities for
reuse
Repairing Humidification of Floor surface should not be slippery to avoid injuries
Activities building due to No asbestos material should be used during construction
(Floor, Roof, uncontrolled measures work.
Doors) Injuries due to slippery Rooms should be designed as properly ventilated and
floor surfaces naturally lighted to reduce energy cost
Health hazard Rain chutes should be constructed on roofs to properly
(Asbestosis) drain rainwater
Energy efficient design Resilient plastic—both vinyl sheet and tile are suitable for
of building floor Scaffoldings should be used during construction
Safety of labor activities (when Working at Height)
Labor should be equipped with proper PPEs
Electric Injuries/Incidents due to The labor should be provided with safety shoes, gloves,
Installations unsafe electric Safety goggle as per nature of job of worker
installations. Quality of electric installations should not be compromised
Short circuits due to Wiring should be underground
quality compromised Fire retardant plastic wires should be used
electric Fire extinguishers should be installed at appropriate places
equipment/installations.
Fire accidents due to
electric installations
Sanitary Ground water Construction of soakage pit required for treatment of
Fittings contamination due to sewage waste
lack of sewage treatment
facility
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 208
______________________________________________________________________________
Material and Depletion of resources Regionally produced and sustainable materials should be
resources Environmental footprint given preference for usage in construction and repair
Damage to infrastructure activities
Project activities shall not use any hazardous materials such
as asbestos, lead and PCBs
Good engineering and construction practices must be
applied
Good housekeeping practices should be observed at site
Fire Safety Incidents due to fire Smoke alarms and fire extinguishers should be installed at
Equipment appropriate places
Installation Safety signage, including emergency exits, should be
pasted at appropriate places
Operation Phase
Indicators Potential Impacts Mitigation Measures
Plantation/ Aesthetically pleasing and contributing to Carbon reduction

Greening
Waste Bins Aesthetically Waste bins should be installed at appropriate places for
installation unappealing solid waste effective management of solid waste
sprawl
General Environmental Issues
indicators potential impacts mitigation measures
Air Quality Dust emission may be Air quality analysis should be carried out before and during
generated during construction
construction All equipment and vehicles being used during the project
Air emissions may be activities should be ensured to be in good working
generated due to fuel condition
burning from Wherever possible, carry out major dust causing activities
machinery/equipment in spring / autumn
and vehicles
Complaints from
community nearby
Water Accidental spillage of Apply best engineering practices in storage and handling of
Resources contaminants lubricants, fuels and solvents
Soil pollution/ Soil contamination from Apply best engineering practices in storage and handling of
Land improper storage, lubricants, fuels and solvents
Contamination handling of materials Immediately transport the accumulated construction waste
Soil pollution from to a site identified by the implementing authorities
improper disposal of Cleaning of sites upon completion of schemes
waste
Noise & Noise/Vibration due to Communities should be informed prior to starting work
Vibration construction activities Workforce should be provided with earmuff/ear plugs
Contractor should use well maintained machinery to reduce
the impact.
College/school timings should be considered, and work
activities should be limited during working hours of nearby
educational and health facilities
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 209
______________________________________________________________________________
Solid waste Scattered solid waste Immediately transport the accumulated construction waste
may affect visuals to a site identified by the implementing authority or other
/aesthetics and provide concerned authority
breeding place to Scattered solid waste should be properly managed in order
mosquitoes to avoid contamination and disturbance
Health & Safety

Health & Risk may occur from: Providing basic medical service and supplies to workers on-
Safety Issues Inadequate use of site such as First Aid Box and Fire Extinguisher and the
Personal Protective workers should be trained in using them
Equipment (PPEs) Consecutive sessions to be organized to create awareness
Accidentals risks among labor and contractors regarding Heath, Safety and
Dust particles Environment
Air and Noise pollution Work safety measures and good workmanship practices are
fire hazards to be followed by the contractor to ensure no health risks
chemical spillages for laborers
Falls Protection devices (ear muffs) will be provided to the
Communicable diseases workers operating in the vicinity of high noise generating
Other construction machines
activities Provision of adequate sanitation, washing, cooking and
dormitory facilities including lighting
Provision of protective clothing for laborers handling
hazardous materials, e.g., helmet, adequate footwear for
bituminous pavement works, protective goggles, gloves etc.
Ensure strict use of wearing these protective clothing
during work activities
Elaboration of a contingency planning in case of major
accidents
Close consultation with local communities to identify
optimal solutions for diversions to maintain community
integrity & social links
Provision of proper safety signage at sensitive/ accident-
prone spots; and
Cordon-off the constructed area
Social/Gender Nearby community may Workers would be trained to address privacy issues and
issues be disturbed ethically behaved
Labor would be strictly asked to cater for privacy issues
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 210
SECTION 20 – QUALITY ASSURANCE CRITERIA AND GUIDELINES FOR
PREFABRICATED UNITS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 20 - QUALITY ASSURANCE CRITERIA AND
GUIDELINES FOR PREFABRICATED UNITS
20.1 General
The integrated performance of prefabricated units can be evaluated using several on-site as
well as laboratory tests. Several international guidelines and standards are available to
identify various aspects of performance to be examined in order to satisfy the minimum
requirements. These requirements can be summarized under the following performance
criterion.
a) Mechanical resistance and stability
b) Safety against natural hazards
i) Safety against strong winds and storms
ii) Seismic safety, resilience and other aspects of earthquake hazard
iii) Safety against floods and tsunamis
c) Safety in case of fire
i) Reaction to fire
ii) Resistance to fire
iii) External fire performance of the roof covering
d) Hygiene, health and environment
i) Vapour permeability and moisture resistance
ii) Water tightness
e) Release of dangerous substances
f) Safety in use
i) Slipperiness of floor finishes
ii) Falling due to changes in level or sudden drops
iii) Resistance to eccentric loads, including impact resistance
g) Protection against noise
i) Airborne sound insulation
ii) Impact sound insulation
iii) Sound absorption
h) Energy economy and heat retention
i) Thermal resistance
ii) Air permeability
iii) Thermal inertia
A list of laboratory and on-site tests generally used to assess the component- and structural-
level performance of prefabricated units is given in subsequent section.
20.2 Component and Structural-Level Tests for Prefabricated Units
It is essential to ensure structural strength and stability of any prefabricated design

submitted to NAPHDA. In order to ensure structural strength and stability, structural design
calculations along with architectural, structural, electrical, and plumbing drawings to
vetting. Enlisted renowned structural engineer shall review the structural design to ensure
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 211
PREFABRICATED UNITS
______________________________________________________________________________
compliance with building code provision. The overall structural performance under various
load conditions can be assessed using the following tests.
A. Structural Integrity and Strength

a) The direct compression testing of prefabricated panels.
b) The flexure testing of prefabricated panels (under centre-point or two-point)
loading (subjected to in‐ plane and out‐ of‐ plane bending).
c) On-site non-destructive testing for qualitative assessment of individual
components of prefabricated units.
i) Ultrasonic pulse velocity (UPV) testing.
ii) Electrical resistivity tests for corrosion under different exposure
conditions.
iii) Cracks measurements at different loading and exposure conditions.
iv) Rebound hammer tests to qualitatively assess the surface toughness
and strength.
B. Energy Efficiency
a) Thermal performance testing of prefabricated units and their envelope for
assessing the indoor thermal environment vs. the thermal comfort
requirements.
b) Energy economy and heat retention tests.
c) Thermal resistance and air permeability tests.
C. Seismic Resilience
a) Monotonic lateral static load testing of the prefabricated units.
b) Reversed-cyclic lateral static load testing of the prefabricated units.
c) Reversed-cyclic lateral static load testing of the connections between
components of prefabricated units.
d) Shake table dynamic testing of prefabricated and low-cost units.
e) Ambient and forced vibration testing of prefabricated and low-cost units
using eccentric mass vibrator (EMV) and accelerometers to determine
their modal properties (mode shapes and natural frequencies).
D. Specifications for Component- and Structural-Level Tests of

Prefabricated Units
The following international standards cover various aspects of individual
component- and structural-level tests of prefabricated units.
a) ASTM C901 – 18: Standard Specification for Prefabricated Masonry
Panels.
b) ETAG 023 – 2006: Guideline for European Technical Approval of
Prefabricated Building Units.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 212
PREFABRICATED UNITS
______________________________________________________________________________
c) CSA A277-2016: Procedure For Certification Of Prefabricated Buildings,
Modules, And Panels
d) CAN/UL 2600: Standard for Relocatable Structures.
e) TS ENV1998-1: Eurocode 8: Projecting Buildings Resistance to
Earthquake –Volume 1: General rules, rules for seismic effects and
buildings.
f) TS 3611 EN 20898-2: Mechanical specifications of connection elements –
Part 2: Test Load Values Determined Nuts—Normal Step.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 213
SECTION 21 – GUIDELINES FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEMS
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 21 - GUIDELINES FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM
21.1 General
The following are the steps for the insatallation of Solar PV System
I. Before installation of any Solar PV system, survey and assessment should be
conducted for available space at roof top, injection point, PV Cable routing from PV
modules to Inverters, delivery of components to roof top, roof top load bearing
capacity, availability of south facing, shading during the day, consumption profile
and monthly average energy (KWh) requirement etc.
II. After complete survey, the solar PV system should be designed as per the load,
energy requirement (KWh) and back up time for battery based solar systems and
Energy (KWh) requirement for battery less Solar PV systems as per space
availability. System must be designed by Qualified PEC Registered Engineer.
III. After system design the solar PV procurement should be done. Solar PV system
should be procured from legally registered Solar Company having valid Income Tax
and GST registration and valid registration from PEC in solar category. Solar
Company must have minimum three years’ experience of installation of solar PV
system on Turnkey basis. For Net Metered Solar System, AEDB registration for net
metering is mandatory.
IV. Regarding Solar PV components Specifications, Quality and standards, following
guidelines should be followed:
a. Solar PV Modules should be Tier-1 as per Bloomberg New Energy Finance
(BNEF) Tier-1 List. PV module must have serial Number under the Glass and
Logo engraved on back junction box. Solar PV Module Conversion Efficiency
should be the highest available in the market and current best conversion
Efficiency is 20%. Solar PV modules must comply with the IES standard
61215 (Latest Edition) and IEC 61370 (Latest Edition) and must have been
tested as per these two standards from any accredited laboratory certified as
per IEC 17025 standard. The product warranty should not be less than 10 years
and performance warranty should not be less than 25 years.
b. Solar PV Inverters should be of high quality not having efficiency less than
98% and having Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than or equal to 3%.
Output of Solar PV inverters must be fully clean sinewave. The Inverters must
comply with IEC standards 61683, 62116 & 61727 (Latest Editions). The
warranty should not be less than five years.
c. The cable from PV modules to Inverters must be single core, double insulated,
halogen free, Fire and UV resistant and tested at continuous temperature of 120
Degree C and must withstand 1500V. Cable insulation must be of
XLPE/XLPO.
d. Solar PV Mounting structure must be Hot Dip Galvanized not less than 12
SWG with stainless SS304 nut bolts having capability to withstand 120 KM
per hour of wind speed. Material must be rust free and durable.
e. Battery based systems should have Lead Acid or Lithium Battery designed as
per requirement of Back up when solar and Grid is not present. Locally
manufactured batteries should be preferred.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 214
______________________________________________________________________________
f. Switchgears panels components must be of high quality and locally

manufactured switch gears should be preferred. Switch Gear cabinets and
Power distribution Boards must include Circuit Breakers of High quality,
Surge Protection Devices (SPDs), Bus Bars, manual ON/OFF switch and
separation of DC and AC circuit breakers should be maintained.
g. Solar PV Systems must have capability through web-based applications to
monitor remotely at mobile or Laptop or PC the Solar PV performance
parameters such as Load, Energy, Energy export and import, daily trends.
h. Accessories like Ducts, Pipes, Thimbles, Connectors, Channels, brackets,
shrouds etc should be of high quality.
i. The warranty (Free Labor, material and troubleshooting) of the whole system
should not be less than three years in addition to warranty of individual
components.
j. Proper RFP or RFQ should be generated for solicitation of proposals from
Vendors and suppliers and Proposals must mention brand and manufacturer of
each Component with warranties.
k. For net metering, Solar PV system must comply with relevant DISCO SOPs
for net metering and NEPRA SRO 892/2015 for Net Metering.
l. One common earth pit earthing system for DC and AC both is required for non-
net metering system and two earth pits separate for DC and AC are required in
case of Net Metered Systems as per NEPRA Net Metering SRO and DISCO
SOPs.
m. System installation should be done by trained and qualified persons.
21.2 Typical System Designs For Guidance Purposes – Not Mandatory
Less than 3 KVA solar system of any kind is not feasible in terms of cost and quality.
There are two types of solar systems used where Grid supply is available. One is Solar
Grid Hybrid System and other is On-Grid system.
Solar Grid Hybrid PV system is built with battery and on-grid solar PV system is without
battery used for export of extra energy through net meter and these systems are mostly
useful for three phase Utility connections. Solar Grid Hybrid systems are expressed in
KVA of INVERTER with average Energy Generation per day.
On-grid solar PV systems are defined with the total size of PV Modules in Wp at STC
(Standard Testing Conditions).
Typical System Designs are provided for Guidance purposes only and are not
Manadotory. The designs include
 Solar PV System for Single Story House – Suitable for 05Marla and
10 Marla Single Phase Connected House
 KWP Rooftop Solar PV On-Grid without Battery with Net Metering
for 10 Marla Single or Double Story Three Phase Connection House
For Both the above designs typical BOQ are also provided.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 215
______________________________________________________________________________
21.2.1 Solar PV System for Single Story House – Suitable for 05 Marla and 10 Marla
Single Phase Connected House
Rooftop Solar PV Grid Hybrid System for Running 2500 W Load

This solar system will be Grid Hybrid system providing average energy of 12 KWh/Day
(Annual Energy generation divided by 365 days) and monthly average of 360 KWh per
month. The system will provide battery backup of two hours if the battery is fully charged.
The total space required is 422 SQF for PV modules installation and this system is suitable
for Five Marla and 10 Marla single story house.
Typical BOQ for 3 KVA Grid Hybrid System
ITEM ITEM Total Remarks
units Size/QTY
Tier-1 Solar PV PERC Half Cut Watts at 3200 Eight Modules if 400W PV
Module having conversion STC Module is used. In case of higher
efficiency of 20% tested as per watt module, number will change
IEC 61215 and 61730 with 10 needing matching with inverter.
years product warranty and 25
years performance warranty
Single Solar PV Hybrid Inverter KVA 3 KVA Will not export electricity to Grid
having efficiency of minimum
95% (five years warranty
minimum).
Solar PV Mounting Frame 12 Number 04 04 frames each of two modules if
Gauge Hot Dip MS Galvanized 400W module is selected. In case
with stainless Nut Bolts of higher watt module, this needs to
be adjusted accordingly.
Solar PV cable from PV modules meter 90
to Inverter tested as per IEC
standard 62930:2017
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 216
______________________________________________________________________________
Power Distribution Box QTY 01

containing Bus-bars, DC and AC
circuit breakers. SPDS, Volt and
Current meters display with
rotary change over switch
disconnecting solar from GRID.
Tubular 12 Volts Battery having Ampere- 800 There will be 04 batteries if 200AH
three years warranty. Pakistan Hour battery is selected.
Origin
Angle iron Battery Rack painted SET 01 As per Battery Numbers.
Electrical and mechanical SET 01
accessories set ( MC- 4
connectors, PVC pipe, Slotted
ducts and channels, Tape, Heat,
Shrinks for Battery terminals,
Thimbles etc
16 mm DC Cable from Inverter to Meter 30
Battery
25 mm AC Cable from Inverter to Meter 30
Power Distribution Board
Transportation and Handling Job 01
Installation and commissioning Job 01
21.2.2 5 KWP Rooftop Solar PV On-Grid without Battery with Net Metering for 10
Marla Single or Double Story Three Phase Connection House
This solar system will be On-Grid system without battery. This On-grid system will provide
average 20 KWh/Day (Annual Energy generation divided by 365 days) and monthly
average of 600 KWh per month. The system will stop production when the Grid will be
off. Such systems are synchronized with Grid and are called Energy Sharing Systems and
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 217
______________________________________________________________________________
are feasible only with Net Meter installed and therefore suitable for three phase Utility
connections only.
The space required for this system is 660 SQFT for PV modules installation and this system
is suitable for 10 Marla Single or Double Story house.
Typical BOQ FOR 5 KVA Grid Hybrid System,
ITEM ITEM Total Remarks
units Size/QTY
Tier-1 Solar PV PERC Half Cut Watts at 5340 Wp PV Modules will be 12 if 445W of
Module having conversion STC PV module is used. In case of higher
efficiency of 20% tested as per watt module, the number of
IEC 61215 and 61730 with 10 modules will reduce and matching
years product warranty and 25 with Inverter will be required.
years performance warranty
Single Solar PV On-Grid KVA 5 KVA Will export energy in case of net
Inverter with Export Manager metering
and Wifi Stick having
efficiency of minimum 98%
with five years warranty.
Solar PV Mounting Frame 12 Number of frames as per selection of Module size.
Gauge Hot Dip MS Galvanized
with stainless Nut Bolts
4 mm Solar PV cable from PV meter 180
modules to Inverter tested as per
IEC standard 62030:2017
Power Distribution Box QTY 01
containing Bus-bars, DC and
AC circuit breakers.
Volt and Current meters display
with rotary change over switch
disconnecting solar from GRID.
Tubular 12 Volts Battery Ampere- 800 AH
having three years warranty. Hour
Pakistan Origin
Angel iron Battery Rack SET 01 As per Battery Numbers
painted
Electrical and mechanical SET 01
accessories set ( MC- 4
connectors, PVC pipe, Slotted
ducts and channels, Tape,
Thimbles etc.
10 mm AC Cable from Inverter Meter 60
to Power Distribution Board
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 218
______________________________________________________________________________
Earthing at DC and AC sides job 01

with earthing cables and
earthing material and labour.
Main Outdoor DC Disconnect Nr 01
100A/1000V
Net metering fee and processing Job 01
charges
Transportation and Handling Job 01
Installation and commissioning Job 01
21.2.3 Multiple Story Flats and Apartments

As there is common roof for multiple story flats and apartments and big solar hybrid system
as per roof size can be installed to share energy with Grid and provide also back up when
grid is not available and this system should run the common loads of building like Outdoor
lighting, Lifts and Pumps. Such systems should be Hybrid On-grid which means that when
Grid will be off the system will act as Off-grid and when Grid is On, it will act as On-Grid
and start export of extra energy if not used and residents should pay monthly fixed charges
for such solar systems to Facility Management and should be part of maintenance charges.
50KW solar Hybrid system with batteries can run the lifts, outdoor lighting and one
emergency Pump of the Building but system size depends upon the actual load calculation
of lifts, outdoor lighting and pumps. Space required for 50KW solar On-grid and hybrid
system will be 7920 SQF.
Provision of such system should be made by having a separate circuit of Outdoor lighting,
Lifts and Pumps and one DB should be made available at roof top to connect solar system
along with one room at roof-top as control room of 20x20 ft for inverters and batteries.
System will be under the control of Facility Management.
21.2.4 Prepaid Metering for Houses and Flats of 3 Marla or Less

As poor households always have problem of over use of electricity and they always remain
out of budget and face problems and if each household unit is provided with one pre-paid
meter, they can manage the Utility bill in better manner and can use electricity within their
resources and budgets.
Every month they get token from the facility management and consume that energy on
monthly basis as per limit. This will provide poor household good control of electricity
consumption and provide ease in life.
______________________________________________________________________________
Page 219
APPENDIX A – STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
_____________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX-A
STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
A-1 General
This Specification is intended to be used for the preparation of specifications for a particular project.
Coordinate the specifications with the information shown on the contract drawings to avoid
duplication or conflicts.
a. The specifications cover the performance requirements, materials, design, production, and
erection of structural precast and precast, pre-stressed concrete for the entire project. The
work performed under this Section includes all labor, material, equipment, related services,
and supervision required for the manufacture and erection of the structural precast and
precast, pre-stressed concrete work shown on the Contract Drawings. The following
headings are included.
 Performance requirements
 Action Submittals
 Informational Submittals
 Quality Assurance
 Delivery, Storage and Handling
 Sequencing
 Fabricators
 Form Materials
 Reinforcing Materials
 Prestressing Materials
 Concrete Materials
 Steel Connection Materials
 Stainless Steel Connection Materials
 Bearing Pads and Other Accessories
 Grout Materials
 Insulated Panel Accessories
 Concrete Mixtures
 Form Fabrication
 Fabrication
 Insulated Panel Casting
 Fabrication Tolerances
 Finishes
 Source Quality Control
 Site Preparation for Execution
 Examination
 Erection
 Erection Tolerances
 Field Quality Control
 Repairs
 Cleaning
__________________________________________________________________________________
220
_____________________________________________________________________________________
b. This specification covers the different components of the precast construction including the
following:
1. Hollow-core slab units.
2. Beams, columns, double tees.
3. Walls, spandrels.
4. Insulated, precast concrete units.
5. If needed, <Insert other applicable members> if specified by LDP.
A-1.1 Industry Codes and Standards

ACI 318 (ACI 318M).
ASTM C 1077
ASTM E 329
PCI MNL 120, “PCI Design Handbook – Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete,”
PCI MNL 116, “Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Concrete
Products.”
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
ASTM A 775/A 775M]
ASTM A 934/A 934M]
ASTM A 184/A 184M,
ASTM A 185/A 185M,
ASTM A 1064/A 1064M
ASTM A 497/A 497M, or ASTM A 1064/A 1064M
ASTM A 884/A 884M,
ASTM A 416/A 416M,
ASTM A 886/A 886M,
ACI 423.7
ASTM A 910/A 910M
ASTM A 722/A 722M
CONCRETE MATERIALS
ASTM C 150, Type I or III.
ASTM C 618
ASTM C 618, Class N.
ASTM C 1240
ASTM C 989
ASTM C 33
ASTM C 330
ASTM C 979
ASTM C 260
ASTM C 494/C 494M
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M
ASTM C 1582/C 1582M
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

ASTM A 36/A 36M
ASTM A 108
AWS D1.1/D1.1M
ASTM A 283/A 283M
ASTM A 47/A 47M.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 221
_____________________________________________________________________________________
ASTM A 27/A 27M
ASTM A 572/A 572M
ASTM A 500/A 500M
ASTM A 675/A 675M
ASTM A 496
ASTM A 706/A 706M.
ASTM A 307
ASTM F 568M
ASTM A 563/A 563M
ASTM F 844
ASTM A193/A193M
ASTM A 325/ A 325M
ASTM A 490/ A 490M
A 563/A 563M
ASTM F 436/F 436M
ASTM A 123/A 123M
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM F 2329
ASTM B 633
STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

ASTM A 666
ASTM F 593
ASTM A 276
BEARING PADS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES

AASHTO M 251
ASTM D 2240
ASTM D 412
A-1.2 Definitions
Constructor or Contractor: Party responsible for supplying materials, equipment, tools,

supervision, and labor for installation of concrete materials in accordance with contract documents.
The term constructor shall apply also to constructor's subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).
Contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings,
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that purchaser or engineer of record has
transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the
legal contract agreement or purchase order between purchaser and constructor.
Engineer of record (The Engineer): Purchaser's authorized representative with overall

authority and responsibility for engineering design, quality, and performance of civil works,
structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in contract documents. Engineer
of record shall be licensed as defined by laws of the locality in which the work is to be
constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work
described in contract documents.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 222
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Environmental engineering concrete structures: Concrete structures intended for
conveying, storing, or treating water, wastewater, or other nonhazardous liquids, and for
secondary containment of hazardous materials.
Licensed Design Professional: An engineer or architect who is licensed to practice structural

design as defined by the statutory requirements of the professional licensing laws of a state or
jurisdiction
Manufacturer: Party who produces and warrants performance of products, materials, and/or items
provided in accordance with contract documents. Products, materials, and/or items are
manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly
include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. The term
manufacturer shall apply also to manufacturer's subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
Mass concrete: Any volume of structural concrete in which a combination of dimensions of the
member being cast, the boundary conditions, the characteristics of the concrete mixture, and the
ambient conditions can lead to undesirable thermal stresses, cracking, deleterious chemical
reactions, or reduction in the long-term strength as a result of elevated concrete temperature due
to heat from hydration.
Owner: Party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over
site, facility, structure or project wherein concrete materials will be used.
Purchaser: Party who awards contract to constructor. Purchaser may be owner or owner's
authorized agent.
Self-consolidating concrete: Fresh concrete that can flow around reinforcement and
consolidate within formwork under its own weight without vibration.
Supplier: Party responsible for supplying concrete materials in accordance with

contract documents.
A-2 Performance Requirements
a. Structural Performance:
Provide structural precast concrete members and connections capable of withstanding design
loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated on Structural Drawings.
Or
b. Structural Performance:
Provide structural precast concrete members and connections capable of withstanding the
following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated below or as specified by the
LDP.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 223
_____________________________________________________________________________________
No. Loads
1 Dead Loads
2 Live Loads
3 Roof Loads
4 Basic Ground Snow Load:
5 Rain Loads:
6 Concrete Topping Thickness:
7 Wind Loads: as required by applicable building code or ASCE/SEI 7,
including basic wind speed, importance factor, exposure category, and
pressure coefficient.
8 Seismic Loads: as required by applicable building code including
seismic performance category, importance factor, use group, seismic
design category, seismic zone, site classification, site coefficient and drift
criteria.
9 Blast Loads
c. Licensed Design Professional (LDP) shall design structural precast concrete framing
system and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for fabrication and
construction tolerances, to accommodate live-load deflection, shrinkage and creep of
primary building structure, and other building movements. Maintain structural precast
concrete deflections within limits of ACI 318 (ACI 318M).
d. Licensed Design Professional (LDP) shall provide locations on Drawings if different
movements are anticipated for different building elements. If deflection limits stricter
than ACI 318 (ACI 318M) are required, the limits must be specified.
1. Thermal Movements: Provide for thermal movements noted.
a. The precast system design shall consider the maximum seasonal climatic
temperature change.
b. In plane thermal movements of individual members directly exposed to
the sun shall consider a temperature range as specified by the LDP.
c. Member connection design shall consider through thickness thermal
gradients as appropriate.
e. When required, fire-rated products shall be clearly identified on the design drawings.
f. For Fire Resistance Rating, Provide the information in the Table below as specified by
LDP.
Member Fire rating

Roof:
Floors
Columns
Exterior Walls
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 224
_____________________________________________________________________________________
g. For Parking Structures, provide information on the Vehicular Impact Loads:
h. Design spandrel beams acting as vehicular barriers for passenger cars to resist a single
load of (6,000 lb [26.7 kN]) or as specified by the LDP service load applied horizontally
in any direction to the spandrel beam, with anchorages or attachments capable of
transferring this load to the structure. Design spandrel beams, assuming the load to act at
a height of 18 in (457 mm) and 27 in (686 mm) above the floor or ramp surface on an
area not to exceed 1 ft2 (0.093 m2).
A-3 Action Submittals
a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Retain quality control records and
certificates of compliance for 5 years after completion of structure.
b. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength.
c. Shop (Erection) Drawings:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of structural precast concrete units including
connections at member ends and to each adjoining member.
2. Indicate locations, plan views, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections
of each unit, openings, support conditions and types of reinforcement, including
special reinforcement.
3. Indicate aesthetic intent including joints, rustications or reveals, and extent and
location of each surface finish.
i. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Show size,
length, and type of each weld.
ii. Detail loose and cast-in hardware, lifting and erection inserts,
connections, and joints.
iii. Indicate locations, tolerances and details of anchorage devices to be
embedded in or attached to structure or other construction.
iv. Include and locate openings larger than 10 in (250 mm). Where
additional structural support is required for openings include header
design.
v. Coordinate and indicate openings and inserts required by other trades.
vi. Indicate location of each structural precast concrete member by same
identification mark placed on unit.
vii. Indicate relationship of structural precast concrete members to adjacent
materials.
viii. Indicate locations and details of joint treatment.
ix. Indicate areas receiving toppings and magnitude of topping thickness.
x. Indicate estimated cambers for floor slabs receiving cast-in-place
topping.
xi. Indicate multiple Wythe connection devices.
xii. Indicate shim sizes and grouting sequence.
xiii. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet
performance requirements and field conditions, notify the Licensed
Design Professional (LDP) and submit design calculations and Shop
Drawings. Do not affect the appearance, durability or strength of
members when modifying details or materials. Maintain the general
design concept when altering size of members and alignment.
d. Provide handling procedures, erection sequences, and for special conditions provide temporary
bracing and shoring plan.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 225
_____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Comprehensive engineering design shall be signed and sealed by a qualified Licensed Design
Professional (LDP) responsible for its preparation licensed in the jurisdiction in which the
project is located.
A-4 Informational Submittals
The following are included in the Submittals.

a. Qualification Data: The installer, fabricator, testing agency and persons specified in
"Quality Assurance" Article shall demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include
list of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Licensed Design Professionals and owners, and other information specified.
b. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedure specifications (WPS)
and personnel certification.
c. Material Test Reports for aggregates: From an accredited testing agency, indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
d. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
items complies with requirements.
1. Cementations materials.
2. Reinforcing materials and pre-stressing tendons.
3. Admixtures.
4. Bearing pads.
5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.
6. Insulation.
7. Other components specified in Contract Documents with applicable standards.
e. Field quality-control test and special inspections reports.
A-5 Quality Assurance
a. Erector Qualifications: A precast concrete erector shall have a minimum of 2 years of

experience in structural precast concrete work [including Category S1 (Simple Structural
Systems) for horizontal decking members and single-lift wall panels, Category S2
(Complex Structural Systems) for load-bearing members]. Erectors with more than 03
precast work projects completed projects will be preferred.
b. Erector Certification: Certificate of successful completion of the project (if available)
should be submitted.
c. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is
experienced in producing structural precast concrete units similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
i. Assumes responsibility for engineering structural precast concrete units to
comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation
of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
ii. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer licensed in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of structural precast concrete that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
iii. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required members without
delaying the Work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 226
_____________________________________________________________________________________
iv. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of the precast
concrete units. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricator’s
certification is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted
work. Production will not be allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections
are made and certification has been re-established.
v. Is registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent accredited testing agency, [acceptable to
Authorities having jurisdiction] qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329
to conduct the testing indicated.
e. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design recommendations
of PCI MNL 120, “PCI Design Handbook – Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete,”
applicable to types of structural precast concrete members indicated.
f. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements and
quality control recommendations for types of members required, comply with PCI MNL
116, “Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Concrete
Products.”
1. Comply with camber and dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL 135, “Tolerance
Manual for Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete Construction.”
A-6 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
a. Deliver all structural precast concrete members in such quantities and at such times to
assure compliance with the agreed upon project schedule and setting sequence to ensure
continuity of installation.
b. Handle and transport members in a manner to avoid excessive stresses that could cause
cracking or other damage.
c. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing, and protect units to prevent contact with
soil, staining, and to control cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
d. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Shop Drawings, store members with dunnage
across full width of each bearing point.
e. Place stored members so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be
inspected.
f. Place dunnage of even thickness between each member.
g. Lift and support members only at designated points indicated on the Shop Drawings.
A-7 Sequencing
a. Coordination and responsibility for supply of items to be placed on or in the structure to

allow placement of precast concrete members depends on type of structure and varies
with local practice.
b. Clearly specify responsibility for supply and installation of hardware. If not supplied by
precast concrete fabricator, supplier should be listed and requirements included in related
trade sections. Ensure that type and quantity of hardware items to be cast into precast
concrete members for use by other trades are specified or detailed in Contract Drawings
and furnished to fabricator, with instructions, in a timely manner in order not to delay the
Work.
c. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to
other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 227
_____________________________________________________________________________________
A-8 Products -Fabricators
a. Fabricators: The fabricators shall provide one of the following

 Fabricators names
 Product designations from acceptable manufacturers.
A-9 Form Materials
a. Forms: The material shall be Rigid, dimensionally stable, no absorptive material, warp
and buckle free that will provide precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances
indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required surface finishes.
1. Form-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that will not
bond with, stain or affect hardening of precast concrete surfaces and will not
impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
A-10 Reinforcing Materials
a. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content
of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
b. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
c. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
d. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)] [ASTM A
706/A 706M], deformed bars, ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip
galvanized and chromate wash treated after fabrication and bending.
e. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)]
[ASTM A 706/A 706M], deformed bars, [ASTM A 775/A 775M] or [ASTM A 934/A
934M] epoxy coated.
f. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade
60 (Grade 420)] [ASTM A 706/A 706M], deformed bars, assembled with clips.
g. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, or ASTM A 1064/A
1064M, fabricated from galvanized and chromate wash treated steel wire into flat sheets.
h. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, or ASTM A
1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
i. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A
coated, [plain] [deformed], flat sheet, Type (1 bendable coating) (2 non-bendable
coating).
j. Supports: Use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL
116.
A-10.10.1 Prestressing Tendons

a. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 (Grade 1720) or Grade 270
(Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand or ASTM A 886/A 886M, Grade
270 (Grade 1860), indented, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand (including supplement).
b. Unbonded Post-Tensioning Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860),
7-wire, low-relaxation strand with corrosion inhibitor conforming to ACI 423.7, with
polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 228
_____________________________________________________________________________________
c. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 910/A 910M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated,
weldless, 2-and 3-wire, low relaxation strand.
d. Post-Tensioning Bars: ASTM A 722/A 722M, uncoated high strength steel bar.
A-10.10.2 Concrete Materials

a. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III. For surfaces exposed to view in finished
structure, use same type, brand, and mill source throughout the precast concrete
production.
1. Supplementary Cementitious Materials
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F with maximum loss on ignition of 3%.
2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.
3. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240 with optional chemical and physical requirements.
4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
b. Normal weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, with coarse, non-reactive aggregates
complying with Class [4S] [4M]. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type
of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
c. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330 with absorption less than 11 percent.
d. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or
liquid coloring admixtures, temperature stable and nonfading.
e. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting,
or strength of concrete.
f. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required admixtures.
g. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride
ions or other salts by weight of admixture.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture ASTM C494/C 494M, Type E.
5. High Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
7. Plasticizing Admixture for Flowable Concrete: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.
8. Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture: ASTM C 1582/C 1582M
A-10.10.3 Steel Connection Materials

a. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M
b. Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020, cold finished,
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with the minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 116, Table 3.2.3.
c. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.
d. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M. Grade 32510 or 35028.
e. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).
f. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M
g. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or C.
h. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).
i. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 229
_____________________________________________________________________________________
j. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or C (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6) carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts (ASTM A 563/A
563M, Grade A); and flat, unhardened steel washers (ASTM F 844).
k. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B5 or B7, ASTM A 325/
A 325M, or ASTM A 490/ A 490M, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts, (ASTM A 563/A 563M) and hardened carbon-steel washers (ASTM
F 436/F 436M).
l. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non galvanized steel items, except those
surfaces to be embedded in concrete.
m. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply
zinc coating by [hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M, after fabrication,
ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM F 2329 as applicable] [electrode position according
to ASTM B 633, SC 3, Type 1 or 2 and for bolts F 1941 and F 1941M].
1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to
less than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon
content and 2.5 times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.
2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc paint with dry film containing not less than 94
percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint
20.
n. Galvanizing Paint: Zinc paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc
dust by weight. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for surface preparation.
A-10.10.4 Stainless-Steel Connection Materials

a. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, Type 316, or Type 201, of grade
suitable for application.
b. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and
studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.
1. Lubricate threaded parts of stainless steel bolts with an anti-seize thread lubricant
during assembly.
c. Stainless-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, with minimum mechanical properties for
studs as indicated under MNL 116, Table 3.2.3.
A-10.10.5 Bearing Pads And Other Accessories
Provide one of the following bearing pads for structural precast concrete members [as
recommended by precast fabricator for application]:
1. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene
(neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore A
udometer according to ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa) per
ASTM D 412.
2. Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented
synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Surface hardness of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer
according to ASTM D2240. Capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi
(20.7 Mpa) with no cracking, splitting or delaminating in the internal portions of the pad.
3. Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered
cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer. Surface hardness of 80 to 100 Shore A
durometer according to ASTM D 2240. Conforming to Division II, Section 18.10.2 of
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or Military Specification, MIL-C-882E.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 230
_____________________________________________________________________________________
4. Frictionless Pads: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to
stainless or mild-steel plates, or random-oriented, fiber-reinforced elastomeric pads, of
type required for in-service stress.
5. High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip capable of supporting
loads with no visible overall expansion.
6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1, tempered hardboard strips, smooth on both sides.
7. Reglets: A Reglet is found on the exterior of a building along a masonry wall, chimney
or parapet that meets the roof. It is a groove cut within a mortar joint that receives
counter-flashing meant to cover surface flashing used to deflect water infiltration. Reglet
should be of PVC extrusions or Stainless steel, Type 304, or copper felt or fiber filled
face opening of slots covered.
8. Erection Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, high density plastic or steel shims, and
other accessories required to install structural precast concrete members.
9. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards for steel type and/or alloy being
welded.
A-10.10.6 Grout Materials

a. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 144, or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2 ½ to 3 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble
chloride ion content of grout less than 0.06 percent chloride ion by weight of cement
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
b. Nonshrink Grout: If required should be Premixed, prepackaged ferrous and non-ferrous
aggregate shrink-resistant grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement,
shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with
ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of
consistency suitable for application with a 30-minute working time. Water-soluable
chloride ion content of grout less than 0.06 percent chloride ion by weight of cement
when tested in accordance with ATM C1218/C1218M.
c. Epoxy-resin grout: Two-component mineral-filled epoxy-resin: ASTM C 881/C 881M of
type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
A-10.10.7 Insulated Panel Accessories

a. Expanded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [XI, 0.70 lb/ft3(12kg/m3)],
[I, 0.90 lb/ft3 (15kg/m3)][VIII, 1.15 lb/ft3(18kg/m3)][II, 1.35 lb/ft3(22kg/m3)][IX, 1.80
lb/ft3(29 kg/m3)]; [square][ship-lap] edges; with thickness of <Insert dimension> as
b. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [X, 1.30 lb/ft3(21kg/m3)][IV,
1.55 lb/ft3(25 kg/m3)][VI, 1.80 lb/ft3(29 kg/m3)][VII, 2.20 lb/ft3(35 kg/m3)][V, 3.00
lb/ft3(48 kg/m3)]; [square][ship-lap] edges; with thickness of <Insert dimension> as
c. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation
complying with ASTM C 591; Grade 1, or ASTM C 1289 Type [I, 1.8
lb/ft3(29kg/m3)][II, 2.5 lb/ft3 (40kg/m3)][(III, 3.0 lb/ft3(48kg/m3)]; square edged; unfaced;
with thickness as specified by the LDP and approved by the Engineer.
d. Wythe Connectors: [Glass-fiber in vinyl-ester polymer], [Polypropylene pin], [Stainless-
steel pin], [Bent galvanized reinforcing bars] [Galvanized welded wire trusses],
[Galvanized bent wire connectors] [Epoxy coated carbon fiber grid], [Fiberglass truss]
manufactured to connect wythes of precast concrete panels.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 231
_____________________________________________________________________________________
e. Provide holes in insulation for connector placement at least 4 in. (100 mm) and no more
than 12 in. (0.30m) from edges of member or openings.
A-10.10.8 Concrete Mixtures

a. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1. Limit use of fly ash to 35 percent replacement of Portland cement by weight;
granulated blast-furnace slag to 50 percent of Portland cement by weight; and
metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of Portland cement by weight.
b. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by
qualified precast plant personnel at structural precast concrete fabricator’s option.
c. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted
by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested in accordance with ASTM C
1218/C 1218M.
d. Normal weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch
or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to
provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 6000 psi (34.5 Mpa) minimum. Higher-
strength mixtures may be available; verify with fabricators.
2. Release Strength: as required by design.
3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. A maximum water-
cementitous materials ratio of 0.40 to 0.45 is usual for structural precast concrete.
Lower ratios may be possible with use of high-range water reducing admixtures.
e. Lightweight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or
field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to
provide lightweight concrete with the following properties:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 6000 psi (34.5 Mpa). Higher-
strength mixtures may be available; verify with fabricators.
2. Release Strength: as required by design.
3. Density (Unit Weight): Calculated equilibrium density of 115 lb/ft.3 (1842
kg/m3), plus or minus 5 lb/ft.3 (80 kg/m3) adjusted to plus or minus 3 lb./ft.3 (48
kg/ m3), when tested in accordance with ASTM C 567. Coordinate with
lightweight-aggregate supplier and structural precast concrete fabricator.
Lightweight concretes with combinations of lightweight and normal weight
aggregate in mixture will usually be heavier than unit weight mentioned above.
f. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.
g. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
h. Concrete Mixture Adjustments: Concrete mixture design adjustments may be proposed if
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant.
A-11 Form Fabrication
a. Form: Accurately construct forms, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand

pressures due to concrete placement and vibration operations and temperature changes,
and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of forms with
release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and
prestressing tendons by release agent. Maintain forms to provide completed structural
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 232
_____________________________________________________________________________________
precast concrete members of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated in Contract
Documents, within fabrication tolerances specified.
1. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered or as built-in on standard
forms.
A-12 Fabrication
a. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate
anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design
requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place
during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of
main reinforcement or concrete placement. Do not relocate bearing plates in members unless
approved by Licensed design professional
1. Weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS
D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, “Recommended Practices for Stud Welding.”
b. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast concrete members to supporting and
adjacent construction.
c. Cast-in reglets, slots, and other accessories in structural precast concrete members as
indicated on Contract Drawings.
d. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut
openings or prestressing strand without Engineer’s approval.
e. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy coated reinforcing exceeds
limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with
coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Locate and support reinforcement by
plastic tipped or corrosion resistant metal or plastic chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers,
hangers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and
welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116.
3. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing tendons to maintain at least ¾ in. (19 mm)
minimum concrete cover. Provide cover requirements in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI
318M) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete
surfaces.
4. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and wire tie laps, where required by design.
Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
f. Reinforce structural precast concrete members to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses, and specified in-place loads, whichever governs.
g. Prestressing tendons for structural precast concrete members by either pretensioning or post-
tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.
1. Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast prestressed concrete members until
concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as
established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as concrete member.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 233
_____________________________________________________________________________________
2. Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat-
cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.
3. If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid
dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
4. Recess strand ends and anchorages exposed to view a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm), fill
with non-metallic, non-shrink mortar and sack rub surface. Coat or spray the inside
pocket surfaces with a bonding agent before installing mortar.
5. Protect strand ends and anchorage not exposed to view with bitumastic, zinc-rich or
epoxy paint.
h. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be
added.
i. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from
forming in precast concrete members.
j. Place backup concrete to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
k. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by vibration without dislocating or damaging
reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing or entrapped air
voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.
l. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration in accordance with PCI TR-6 “Interim
Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete.” If face and backup concrete is used,
ensure adequate bond between concrete mixtures.
m. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot and cold-weather concrete placement.
n. Identify pickup points of precast concrete members and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each precast concrete member on a surface that will not
show in finished structure.
o. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without
heat or by accelerated heat curing using live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
members until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an
effect on the performance or appearance of final product.
A-13 Insulated Panel Casting
a. Cast, screed and consolidate bottom concrete Wythe supported by form.

b. Place insulation boards, abutting edges and ends of adjacent boards. Stagger end joints
between rows to minimize cold joints. Stagger joints of insulation layers one-half board
apart. Insert Wythe connectors through insulation, and consolidate concrete around
connectors according to connector manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Cast and screed top Wythe and apply required finish.
d. Maintain temperature below 150 deg. F (65 deg. C) in bottom cast concrete Wythe.
A-14 Fabrication Tolerances
Fabricate structural precast concrete members of shapes, lines and dimensions indicated, so each
finished member complies with PCI MNL 135 product tolerances as well as position tolerances
for cast-in items.
A-15 Finishes
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 234
_____________________________________________________________________________________
A. Commercial (Structural) Finishes
1. Commercial Grade: Remove fins and protrusions larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm) and fill
holes with a diameter larger than ½ inch (13 mm). Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces
shall be true, well-defined surfaces. Air holes, water marks, and color variations are
acceptable. Allowable form joint offsets are limited to 3/16 in. (5mm).
2. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth
finish to concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch (13mm) caused by air
bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are
acceptable. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width that occur in high
concentration (more than one per 2 in.² [1300 mm²]). Major or unsightly
imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Allowable joint
offset limited to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter
with sand-cement paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in width that occur in high concentration (more than one per 2
in.² [1300 mm²]). Grind smooth form offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Repair surface blemishes due to dents in forms. Discoloration is permitted at form
joints.
4. Grade A Finish: Repair all surface blemishes and fill all air holes with the exception
of air holes 1/16 inch (2 mm) in width or smaller and form marks where the surface
deviation is less than 1/16 inch (2 mm). Float-apply a neat cement-paste coating to
exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap to remove loose particles.
Discoloration is permitted at form joints. Grind smooth all form joints.
B. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating
screeds to a uniform finish, float finish, if required. Hand screed at projections. Normal
color variations, minor indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. No major
imperfections, honeycombing, or defects are permitted.
C. Smooth steel-trowel finish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level
with straightedge, float and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish.
D. Apply roughened surface finish in accordance with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) to precast concrete
members that will receive concrete topping after installation.
A-16 Source Quality Control
a. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 116
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete also test and inspect according to PCI TR-
6 “Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete” and ASTM C 1611/C
1611M, ASTM C 1712, ASTM 1610/1610M, and ASTM C 1621/C 1621M.
b. In addition to PCI Certification, Owner will employ an accredited independent testing
agency to evaluate structural precast concrete fabricator’s quality-control and testing
methods.
1. Allow Owner’s testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production
equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner’s testing
agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for
additional testing and evaluation.
c. Strength of precast concrete members will be considered deficient if units fail to comply
with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) concrete strength requirements.
d. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete members may be deficient or
may not comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, fabricator shall employ an
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 235
_____________________________________________________________________________________
independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete
to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M and ACI 318/ACI 318M.
1. Test results shall be reported in writing on the same day that tests are performed, with
copies to Licensed Design Professional, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator.
Test reports shall include the following:
a. Project identification name and number.
b. Date when tests were performed.
c. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
d. Name of concrete testing agency.
e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete member(s) represented
by core tests; design compressive strength; type of failure; actual compressive
strength at breaks, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied
load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
e. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete members comply with
requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that
has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.
f. Acceptability. Structural precast concrete members that do not comply with acceptability
requirements in PCI MNL 116, including concrete strength, and manufacturing tolerances,
are unacceptable. Chipped, spalled or cracked members may be repaired. Replace
unacceptable units with precast concrete members that comply with requirements.
A-17 Site Preparation For Execution
a. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage devices for precast concrete members to be
embedded in or attached to the building structural frame or foundation before starting that
Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates and instructions for the proper
installation of each anchorage device.
A-18 Examination
a. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions
affecting precast concrete performance.
b. Proceed with precast concrete installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
c. Contractor shall notify precast concrete erector that supporting cast-in-place concrete
foundation and building structural framing has attained minimum allowable design
compressive strength or supporting steel or other structure is structurally ready to receive
loads from precast concrete members prior to proceeding with installation.
A-19 Erection
a. Install loose clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting
structural precast concrete members to supporting members and backup materials.
b. Erect structural precast concrete level, plumb and square within the specified allowable
erection tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, shoring and bracing as required to
maintain position, stability, and alignment of members until permanent connections are
completed.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 236
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete
members are being erected. Surface weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims
from separating.
2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
3. Remove projecting lifting devices and use plastic patchcaps or sand-cement grout to
fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast
concrete surfaces when recess is exposed.
4. Unless otherwise indicated provide uniform joint widths of ¾ in. (19 mm).
5. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align
voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs.
6. Provide and install headers of structural-steel shapes for openings larger than one
slab width according to hollow-core slab fabricator’s written recommendations.
c. Connect structural precast concrete members in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on approved Shop (Erection) Drawings. Remove temporary shims,
wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and/or grouting are completed.
1. Disruption of roof flashing continuity by connections is not permitted; concealment
within roof insulation is acceptable.
d. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWS D1.4/D1.4M and AWS
D1.6/D1.6M requirements for welding, welding electrodes, appearance of welds, quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Protect structural precast concrete members and bearing pads from damage during
field welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as required.
2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using not less than the minimum
fillet as specified by AWS D1.1/D1.1M, D1.4/D1.4M or D1.6/D1.6M.
3. Clean-weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing or
power tool cleaning and then reprime damaged painted surfaces in accordance with
4. For galvanized metal, clean weld affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer
followed by brushing or power tool cleaning, and apply a minimum 0.004 inch (4
mil) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces in conformance with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
5. Visually inspect all welds critical to precast concrete connections. Visually check all
welds for completion and remove, reweld or repair all defective welds, if services of
AWS-certified welding inspector are not furnished by Owner.
e. At bolted connections, use upset threads, thread locking compound or other approved means
to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness at installation.
For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within
connection slot.
2. For slip critical connections, one of the following methods shall be used to assure
proper bolt pretension:
a. Turn-of-Nut – in accordance with AISC.
b. Calibrated Wrench – in accordance with AISC.
c. Twist-off Tension Control Bolt – meeting ASTM F 1852.
d. Direct-Tension Control Bolt – meeting ASTM F 1852.
3. For slip critical connections, the method to be used and the inspection procedure to
be used shall be approved by the Licensed Design Professional and coordinated with
the inspection agency.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 237
_____________________________________________________________________________________
f. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Indicate joints to be grouted and any
critical grouting sequences on Shop (Erection) Drawings. Grout open spaces at keyways,
connections and joints where required or indicated. Provide reinforcing steel where
indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until it gains sufficient strength to support itself.
Fill joints completely without seepage to other surfaces. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff
dry pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish
smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material
from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for at
least 24 hours after initial set.
1. Trowel top of grout joints on roofs smooth to prevent any unevenness that might
interfere with placing of, or cause damage, to insulation and roofing. Finish
transitions due to different surface levels not steeper than 1 to 12.
2. At Hollow-Core Slab Ends (where shown on Drawings): Provide suitable end cap or
dam in voids as required.
g. Field cutting of precast, prestressed concrete members is not permitted without approval of
the Engineer.
h. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or power-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to
precast, prestressed concrete members unless approved by Precast Engineer and Engineer of
Record.
A-19.1 Erection Tolerances

Erect structural precast concrete members level, plumb, square, and in alignment without
exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135. Level out variations between
adjacent members by jacking, loading, or any other feasible method as recommended by the
fabricator and acceptable to the Llicensed Design Professional (LDP).
A-20 Field Quality Control
a. Special Inspections: Owner or Contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to

perform the following special inspections and prepare reports:
1. Erection of loadbearing precast concrete members.
2. <Insert special inspections> if specified by LDP.
b. Testing: Owner will engage accredited independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare reports.
1. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and dye penetrant or magnetic
particle testing in accordance with ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 1444. Testing
agency shall be qualified in accordance with ASTM E543.
2. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Licensed design professional
c. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.
d. Additional testing and inspecting, at Erector’s expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
A-21 Repairs
a. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy, serviceability and durability of

members and appearance are not impaired.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 238
_____________________________________________________________________________________
b. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
c. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop
primer.
d. Remove and replace damaged structural precast concrete members when repairs do not
comply with specified requirements.
A-22 Cleaning
a. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and any other deleterious material from
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
b. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete members after erection and completion of joint
treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete
fabricator’s recommendations. Protect adjacent work from staining or damage
due to cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 239
APPENDIX B – HOLLOW AND LIGHT GUAGE STEEL SECTIONS (HSS & LGS)
_____________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX B
HOLLOW & LIGHT GAUGE STEEL SECTIONS
(HSS & LGS)
B-1 General
This specifications covers the Cold formed Hollow Steel Sections (HSS) and Cold formed Light Guage
Steel sections (LGS) for construction. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant AISI,
North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B-2 Industry Codes And Standards
 American Iron And Steel Institute (AISI) Specifications

- AISI S240-15, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing
- AISI S310-16, North American Standard for the Design of Profiled Steel Diaphragm Panels
- AISI S400-15, North American Standard for Seismic Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Systems
- AISI S901-13, Rotational-Lateral Stiffness Test Method for Beam-to-Panel Assemblies
- AISI S902-13, Stub-Column Test Method for Effective Area of Cold-Formed Steel Columns
- AISI S903-13, Standard Method for Determination of Uniform and Local Ductility
- AISI S904-13, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Tensile and Shear Strength of Screws
- AISI S905-13, Test Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Connections
- AISI S906-13, Standard Procedures for Panel and Anchor Structural Tests
- AISI S907-13, Test Standard for Cantilever Test Method for Cold-Formed Steel Diaphragms
- AISI S909-13, Standard Test Method for Determining the Web Crippling Strength of Cold-Formed
Steel Beams
- AISI S910-13, Test Method for Distortional Buckling of Cold-Formed Steel Hat-Shaped Compression
Members
- AISI S911-13, Method for Flexural Testing Cold-Formed Steel Hat-Shaped Beams
- AISI S912-13, Test Procedure for Determining a Strength Value for a Roof Panel-to-Purlin-to-
Anchorage Device Connection
- AISI S913-13, Test Standard for Hold-Downs Attached to Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing
- AISI S914-15, Test Standard for Joist Connectors Attached to Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing
- AISI S915-15, Test Standard for Through-the-Web Punch-out Cold-Formed Steel Wall Stud Bridging
Connectors
- AISI S916-15, Test Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing—Nonstructural Interior Partition Walls
With Gypsum Board
 American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM) Specifications
- ASTM A194/A194M-15a, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
- ASTM A242/A242M-13, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
__________________________________________________________________________________
240
____________________________________________________________________________________
- ASTM A283/A283M-13, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates
- ASTM A307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength
- ASTM A354-11, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
- ASTM A370-15, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
- ASTM A449-14, Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use
- ASTM A500/A500M-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
- ASTM A529/A529M-14, Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality
- ASTM A563-15, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
- ASTM A563M-07(2013), Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric)
- ASTM A572/A572M-15, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel
- ASTM A588/A588M-15, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, Up to
50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, With Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
- ASTM A606/A606M-15, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low- Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, With Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
- ASTM A653/A653M-15, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A792/A792M-10(2015), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A847/A847M-14, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High-
Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing With Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
- ASTM A875/A875M-13, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy- Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A1003/A1003M-15, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-
Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members
- ASTM A1008/A1008M-15, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, Solution Hardened,
and Bake Hardenable
- ASTM A1011/A1011M-15, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength
- ASTM A1039/A1039M-13, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Commercial,
Structural, and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process
- ASTM A1058-14, Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products—Metric
- ASTM A1063/A1063M-11a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Twin-Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM E1592-05(2012), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and
Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 241
____________________________________________________________________________________
- ASTM F436-11, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
- ASTM F436M-11, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
- ASTM F844-07a(2013), Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for
General Use
- ASTM F959-15, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for
Use With Structural Fasteners
- ASTM F959M-13, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
for Use With Structural Fasteners (Metric)
- ASTM F3125-15, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel,
Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric
Dimensions
User Note:
ASTM F3125 is an umbrella standard including Grades A325, A325M, A490, and A490M, which were
previously separate standards
 Connections
- AWS. 2010. “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2010, 22nd. Edition, American
Welding Society, Miami, FL.
- G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General requirements for rolled or welded structural quality steel/Structural
quality steel, CSA Group, 178 Rexdale Boulevard, Toronto, Ontario, Canada, M9W 1R3:
 OTHER SPECIFICATIONS
CONCRETE FOUNDATION:
- ACI 318-14, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, American Concrete Institute (ACI),
38800 Country Club Dr., Farmington Hills, MI 48331:
ROOFS/METAL DECKS
- Approval Standard for Class 1 Metal Roofs, 201, Factory Mutual, Corporate Offices, 270 Central
Avenue, Johnston, RI 02919-4949: FM 4471,
- Standard for Composite Steel Floor Deck—Slabs, Steel Deck Institute, P.O. Box 25, Fox River Grove,
IL 60021-0025 ANSI/SDI C-2011,
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
- AISC Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings.
 Pakistan Standards and Quality Control Authority (PSQCA)

- P.S. 2321983Ordinary Portland cement (4th Revision). 2008 (R) Specific composition and
manufacture, fineness, chemical composition, strength, consistence of standard cement paste, setting,
time, soundness, sampling and test method. 2015 (4th R)
- P.S. 6121989Sulphate resisting Portland Cement Type A (1st Revision)
For specific situation, only if provisions in the relevant AISI, AISC, ACI, ASTM, and PSQCA documents
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 242
____________________________________________________________________________________
are not available, BS standard may be used. Use of other sources shall be approved by the Engineer.
B-2.1 Referenced Specifications, Codes, And Standards For United States And Mexico
1. ANSI/AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC)
2. AISI S908-13, Base Test Method for Purlins Supporting a Standing Seam Roof System,
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
3. ASCE/SEI 7-10 including Supplement No. 1, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and
Other Structures. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
4. American Welding Society (AWS)
- AWS D1.1/D1.1M-2010, Structural Welding Code–Steel
- AWS D1.3-2008, Structural Welding Code–Sheet Steel
- AWS C1.1/C1.1M-2012, Recommended Practices for Resistance Welding
5. ASTM A924/A924M-14, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel
Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot Dip Process, ASTM International (ASTM)
B-2.2 Referenced Specifications, Codes, And Standards For Canada

1. CSA Group, Canada, M9W 1R3:
- CAN/CSA A23.3-14, Design of Concrete Structures
- S16-14, Design of steel structures
- W47.1-09 (R2014), Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel
- W55.3-08 (R2013), Certification of companies for resistance welding of steel and
aluminum W59-13, Welded steel construction (metal arc welding)
2. National Building Code of Canada (NBCC), 201, National Research Council of Canada
(NRC), 1200 Montreal Road, Bldg. M-58, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1A 0R6.
B-3 Definitions
Constructor or Contractor: Party responsible for supplying materials, equipment, tools,

supervision, and labor for installation of concrete materials for foundation and steel framing and
decking in accordance with contract documents. The term constructor shall apply also to
constructor's subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).
Contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings,
specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that purchaser or engineer of record has
transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of
the legal contract agreement or purchase order between purchaser and constructor.
Engineer of record (The Engineer): Purchaser's authorized representative with overall

authority and responsibility for engineering design, quality, and performance of civil works,
foundations, materials, appurtenances, steel framing and decking and their connections described
in contract documents. Engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by laws of the locality in
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 243
____________________________________________________________________________________
which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline
required for the work described in contract documents.
Environmental engineering concrete structures: Steel is environment friendly whereas

the effect of concrete works either for foundations on environment must be taken in
account. Concrete structures intended for conveying, storing, or treating water, wastewater,
or other nonhazardous liquids, and for secondary containment of hazardous materials.
Manufacturer: Party who produces and warrants performance of products, materials, and/or items
provided in accordance with contract documents. Products, materials, and/or items are
manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly
include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. The term
manufacturer shall apply also to manufacturer's subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
Mass Concrete: Any volume of structural concrete in which a combination of dimensions of

the member being cast, the boundary conditions, the characteristics of the concrete mixture, and
the ambient conditions can lead to undesirable thermal stresses, cracking, deleterious chemical
reactions, or reduction in the long-term strength as a result of elevated concrete temperature due
to heat from hydration.
Owner: Party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over
site, facility, structure or project wherein construction materials will be used.
Purchaser: Party who awards contract to constructor. Purchaser may be owner or owner's
authorized agent.
Supplier: Party responsible for supplying construction materials in accordance with

contract documents.
B-4 Requirements
1. Concrete supply and construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of ACI 301-16
/ ACI 301M-16, except as modified or supplemented in this Practice or by contract
documents.
2. Steel supply and construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of ASTM
A500/A500M-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
3. Requirements of federal, state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where concrete and
steel is to be placed shall apply.
4. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice, design drawings, and other contract
documents shall be brought to the attention of purchaser for resolution.
5. For applications designated as environmental engineering concrete structures in contract
documents, concrete supply and construction shall also be in accordance with ACI 350.5 / ACI
350.5M and ASTM A500/A500M-13.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 244
____________________________________________________________________________________
B-5 Materials
B-5.1 General
B-5.1.1 Materials shall be in accordance with this Practice and contract documents unless otherwise
approved in writing by The Engineer.
B-5.1.2 Materials and application thereof shall be in accordance with applicable federal, state and local
regulations.
This Specification requires the use of steels intended for structural applications as defined in
general by the specifications of ASTM International listed in this section. The term SS designates
structural steels and the terms HSLAS and HSLAS-F designate high-strength low alloy steels.
B-5.2 Reinforced Concrete
For RC Components of construction, use American Concrete Institute (ACI) -ACI 318-14, Building
Code Requirements for Structural Concrete or refer to RC Specifications in Section 3.
B-5.3 Applicable Steels

This section shall apply to steels that are based on specifications providing mandatory mechanical
properties and requiring test reports to confirm those properties.
Steels used in structural members, decks, and connections shall follow uses and restrictions
outlined in this section and sub-sections, as applicable. Exception: For steels used in composite
slabs, the requirements of ANSI/SDI C shall be followed exclusively.
Applicable steels have been grouped by their minimum elongation requirements over a two-inch
(50-mm) gage length.
B-5.3.1 Steels with a Specified Minimum Elongation of Ten Percent or Greater (Elongation ≥
10%)
Steel grades listed below, as well as any other steel for structural applications, are permitted
to be used without restriction under the provisions of this Specification provided:
(a) Ratio of tensile strength to yield stress is not less than 1.08; and
(b) The minimum elongation is greater than or equal to either 10 percent in a two-inch (50mm)
gage length or 7 percent in an eight-inch (200-mm) gage length standard specimen tested
in accordance with ASTM A370 or ASTM A1058
The following steel grades and standards fall within this range of permitted elongations:
- ASTM A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
- ASTM A242/A242M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel
- ASTM A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates
- ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
- ASTM A529/A529M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel
of Structural Quality
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 245
____________________________________________________________________________________
- ASTM A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium
Vanadium Structural Steel
- ASTM A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel With up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, With Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
- ASTM A606, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, With Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
- ASTM A653/A653M (SS Grades 33 (230), 37 (255), 40 (275), 50 (340) Class 1, Class 3
and Class 4, 55 (380) and 60 (410); HSLAS and HSLAS-F, Grades 40 (275), 50 (340), 55 (380)
Class 1 and 2, 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550)), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Gal annealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
- Exception: SS Grade 60 (410) with thicknesses less than or equal to 0.028 in. (0.71 mm) is
excluded from this elongation group.
- ASTM A792/A792M (Grades 33 (230), 37 (255), 40 (275), 50 (340) Class 1 and Class 4,
and 60 (410)), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process , Exception: Grade 60 (410) with thicknesses less than or equal to 0.028
in. (0.71 mm) is excluded from this elongation group.
- ASTM A847/A847M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
High- Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing With Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
- ASTM A875/A875M (SS Grades 33 (230), 37 (255), 40 (275), and 50 (340) Class 1 and
Class 3; HSLAS and HSLAS-F, Grades 50 (340), 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550)), Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A1003/A1003M (ST Grades 50 (340) H, 40 (275) H, 37 (255) H, 33 (230) H),
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-
Formed Framing Members
- ASTM A1008/A1008M (SS Grades 25 (170), 30 (205), 33 (230) Types 1 and 2, and 40
(275) Types 1 and 2; HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades 45 (310), 50 (340), 55 (380), 60 (410),
65 (450), and 70 (480); HSLAS-F Grades 50 (340), 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550)), Standard
Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy,
High- Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake
Hardenable
- ASTM A1011/A1011M (SS Grades 30 (205), 33 (230), 36 (250) Types 1 and 2, 40 (275),
45 (310), 50 (340), and 55 (380); HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades 45 (310), 50 (340), 55 (380),
60 (410), 65 (450), and 70 (480); HSLAS-F Grades 50 (340), 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80(550)),
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability
- ASTM A1039/A1039M (SS Grades 40 (275), 50 (340), 55 (380), 60 (410), 70 (480), and
80 (550); HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades 45 (310), 50 (340), 55 (380), 60 (410), and 65 (450)),
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and Structural,
Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process
- Exception: SS Grades 55 (380), 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550) with thicknesses outside
the range of 0.064 in. (1.6 mm) to 0.078 in. (2.0 mm) are excluded from this elongation group.
- ASTM A1063/A1063M (SS Grades 40 (275), 50 (340); HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades
45 (310), 50 (340), 55 (380), 60 (410), and 65 (450)), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
Twin-Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 246
____________________________________________________________________________________
- CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General requirements for rolled or welded structural quality
steel/Structural quality steel
B-5.3.2 Steels with a Specified Minimum Elongation from Three Percent to Less than Ten
Percent (3% ≤ Elongation < 10%)
Steel grades listed below, as well as any other steel for structural applications that has a
minimum elongation of 3 percent in a two-inch (50-mm) gage length standard specimen tested
in accordance with ASTM A370 or ASTM A1058, are permitted to be used provided that the
available strengths [factored resistances] of structural members and connections are
calculated. For the purposes of these calculations, a reduced yield stress 0.9 Fsy shall be used
in place of Fsy, and a reduced tensile strength of 0.9 Fu shall be used in place of Fu.
- ASTM A653/A653M (SS Grades 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550) Class 3), Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process, Exception: SS Grade 60 (410) with thicknesses greater
than 0.028 in. (0.71 mm) is excluded from this elongation group.
- ASTM A792/A792M (Grades 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550) Class 3), Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
- Exception: Grade 60 (410) with thicknesses greater than 0.028 in. (0.71 mm) is excluded
from this elongation group.
- ASTM A1039/A1039M (SS Grades 55 (380), 60 (410), 70 (480), and 80 (550); HSLAS
Classes 1 and 2, Grades 70 (480) and 80 (550)), Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Hot
Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and Structural, Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process
- Exception: SS grades with thicknesses greater than or equal to 0.064 in. (1.6 mm) are
excluded from this elongation group.
- ASTM A1063/A1063M (SS Grades 55 (380), 60 (410), 70 (480), Grade 80 (550) Class 1);
(HSLAS Grade 70 (480) Classes 1 and 2, Grade 80 (550) Classes 1 and 2), Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Twin-Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process.
B-5.3.3 Steels with a Specified Minimum Elongation of Less than Three Percent (Elongation <
3%)
Steel grades listed below, as well as other steel grades that do not meet the requirements of
5.2.3.1. or 5.2.3.2, are permitted to be used only for multiple web configurations such as
roofing, siding, and floor decking provided the following adjustments are made to the design
parameters:
A reduced specified minimum yield stress, RbFsy, is used for determining the nominal flexural
strength [resistance] in Chapter F, for which the reduction factor, Rb, is determined in
accordance with (1) or (2): as shown in Table A-1.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 247
____________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-1 – Determination of Rb

(1) For stiffened and partially stiffened compression flanges
For w/t ≤ 0.067E/Fsy
Rb = 1.0
For 0.067E/Fsy < w/t < 0.974E/Fsy
Rb =1-0.26[wFsy/(tE) – 0.067]0.4 (Eq. A3.1.3-1)

For 0.974E/Fsy ≤ w/t ≤ 500
Rb = 0.75
(2) For unstiffened compression flanges
For w/t ≤0.0173E/Fsy
Rb = 1.0
For 0.0173E/Fsy < w/t ≤ 60
Rb = 1.079 − 0.6 wFsy /(tE) (Eq. A3.1.3-2)
Where
w= Flat width of compression flange
t= Thickness of section
E= Modulus of elasticity of steel
Fsy= Specified minimum yield stress determined ≤ 80 ksi (550 MPa, or 5620 kg/cm2)
a) The yield stress, Fsy, used for determining nominal strength [resistance] in Appendix 1 and
Chapters C to J exclusive of Section F2.4 is taken as 75 percent of the specified minimum yield stress
or 60 ksi (414 MPa or 4220 kg/cm2), whichever is less, and
b) The tensile strength, Fu, used for determining nominal strength [resistance] in Chapter J is taken
as 75 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength or 62 ksi (427 MPa or 4360 kg/cm2),
whichever is less.
- ASTM A653/A653M (SS Grade 80 (550) Classes 1 and 2), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A792/A792M (Grade 80 (550) Classes 1 and 2), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A875/A875M (SS Grade 80 (550)), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum
Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
- ASTM A1008/A1008M (SS Grade 80 (550)), Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
- ASTM A1063/A1063M (SS Grade 80 (550) Class 2), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Twin-
Roll Cast, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 248
____________________________________________________________________________________
B-6 Material Specifications
All structural framing components shall conform to ASTM A 635 or equivalent hot dipped
galvanized (G90 coating, complying with ASTM A 653/653M, C 955 or equivalent) with thickness
and grade as required by structural design calculations (min. yield strength 550/350 MPa).
X Drive @ screw shall be used for assembling of the structure.
B-6.1 Exterior Wall System
Option 1: Using 10 to 12mm Cement fiber board
Option 2: Using Steel Cladding System (Cost effective).
Option 3: Using brick masonry attached with HSS/LGS wall system.
Option 4: Light concrete using form work up to 4 feet. Remaining wall cladded with Cement Fiber
or steel profile sheet
Figure A-1 and A-2 shows the pictures of typical exterior wall system.
Figure A-1 Typical exterior wall system using Figure A-2 Typical exterior wall system using
Cement Board brick attached with LGS wall system
B-6.2 Interior Wall System

Option 1: Using 8 to 10 mm Cement fiber board.
Option 2: Using 12 mm Gypsum board (cost Effective).
Option 3: Concrete using form work up to sill level. Remaining with 12mm Gypsum /CF.
Typical Interior wall system is shown in Figure A-3.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 249
____________________________________________________________________________________
Figure A-3 Typical Interior wall system
B-6.3 Wall Structure

Cold Formed Galvanized Structure with C-Section spaced at 300-610mm of 89S41 & 150S41 with
thickness of 0.55- 1.55mm of Grade G-350/G-550 with zinc coating of Z-180/275 g/m2. Wall
thickness of structure is 89 & 150mm.
B-6.4 Floor Joist

Cold Formed Galvanized Open Web Joist with C-Section spaced at 300-610mm of 89S41 &
150S41 with thickness of 0.75-1.55mm of Grade G-350/G-550 with zinc coating of Z-180/275
g/m2. Depth varies from 250-600mm.
B-6.5 Roof Truss

Cold Formed Galvanized Truss with C-Section spaced at 600- 1800mm of 89S41 & 150S41 with
thickness of 0.75-1.55mm of Grade G-350/G-550 with zinc coating of Z-180/275 g/m2. Truss
system is available with Single Side Slope, Gable Slope & Hip Slope.
B-6.6 Composite Decking System

Option 1: 24mm Cement Fiber board Decking sheeting on HSS/LGS Joist or 12mm board with
50mm cement screed with tiles.
Option 2: Steel decking sheets with 50mm Cement screed and with tiles.
B-6.7 First Floor Roofing

- HSS/LGS Trusses
- Roof Panels
- 50 mm Glass Wool Insulation
- 0.6mm Pre-Painted Galvanized Steel Profiled Sheeting.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 250
____________________________________________________________________________________
B-6.8 Insulations
All interior and exterior walls shall be filled with mineral wool insulation. Glass wool insulation
Blanket shall be used on first floor roof.
B-6.9 Cladding System

Cement Fiber Board cladding for Infill works For Dry wall cement fiber board, Gypsum Board &
MDF will be used.
B-6.10 Infill For Walls

EPS Foam concrete for Infill walls with density 300-700 kg/m3 for wet solution which gives solid
wall and highly thermal resistant properties in comparison to conventional For Dry Walls Glass
wool with density of 12 kg/m3 and EPS insulation with density of 20 kg/m3.
B-6.11 Finishes
High end finishes with water based paint.
B-6.12 Fire Resistance

Fire Resistance up to 3-4 hrs.
B-6.13 Sound Insulation

Sound Insulation up to 39-60db.
B-6.14 Weight Of Wall

90 kg/m2 which saves structural cost in case of partition.
B-6.15 Weight Of Floor

75-200 kg/m2, M & E Works Concealed within wall.
B-6.16 Surface Flatness

Flatness due to laser survey of cement fiber board.
B-6.17 Site Management

Easily worked, faster with few workers and tools
B-7 Workmanship
B-7.1 Reinforcing Steel

a. Dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease, salts etc. shall be removed from the
reinforcement by grit blasting or other approved technique.
b. Reinforcement shall be bent when cold by hand or by using an approved hand or power
operated bending machine. When bending the reinforcement should be subjected to a
constant even load and not an impact load.
c. Welding of reinforcement will be allowed only when required by the drawings and with
specific written permission by the Engineer.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 251
____________________________________________________________________________________
d. Bar types, sizes and placement with bending dimensions shall be on the drawings.
B-7.2 Foundation
a. Reinforcement must be tied and fixed accordingly and bar bending schedules must be
prepared, refer to Reinforced Concrete Specifications 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 for details.
B-7.3 Anchor Bolts

a. Anchor bolts must be designed by Engineer with reference to the code according to
requirement for erection of steel columns.
b. Dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease, salts etc. shall be removed from the bolts by
approved techniques.
c. Welding of bolt connection will be allowed only when required by the drawings and with
specific written permission by the Engineer.
d. Anchor bolt types, sizes and placement with dimensions shall be on the drawings.
B-7.4 Framing Elements

a. The design of beams and columns must be done by Engineer according to the requirement
of structure with reference to the code.
b. Detailed drawings of beams and columns with all the required specifications, section
details must be developed by Engineer or his/her consultancy.
c. The beams and columns are too assembled on site on the responsibility of contactor
according to the drawings.
B-7.5 Connections-Workmanship
a The connections are to be designed by the Engineer. Detailed drawings with connection
details, its type, thickness. Dimensions etc. must be developed under supervision of
Engineer.
b Contractor is required to connect the framing elements according to the connection
drawings.
c Connections must be dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease, salts etc. free and if
present shall be removed from the connections by approved techniques.
B-7.6 Connections
Connections are to be designed in such a way that it does not fails or fracture before structural
elements i.e., beam-columns. Connections are classified into following three categories:
B-7.7 Welded Connections

The design of welded connections used for cold-formed steel structural members in which the
thickness of the thinnest connected part is 3/16 in. (4.76 mm) or less shall be based on the following
sub-sections. Additionally, the following specifications or standards shall apply:
For the United States and Mexico:
(a) AWS D1.3, and
(b) AWS C1.1 or AWS C1.3 for resistance welds.
For Canada:
(a) CSA W59, and
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 252
____________________________________________________________________________________
(b) CSA W55.3 for resistance welds.
For the design of welded connections in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is greater
than 3/16 in. (4.76 mm), the following specifications or standards shall apply:
(a) ANSI/AISC 360 for the United States and Mexico, and
(b) CSA S16 for Canada.
B-7.8 Bolted Connections

The following design criteria shall apply to steel-to-steel bolted connections used for cold formed
steel structural members in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is 3/16 in. (4.76 mm)
or less. For bolted connections in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is greater than
3/16 in. (4.76 mm), the following specifications and standards shall apply:
(a) ANSI/AISC 360 for the United States and Mexico, and
(b) CSA S16 for Canada.
Bolts, nuts, and washers conforming to one of the following ASTM specifications are approved for
use under this Specification:
- ASTM A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts
for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service, or Both
- ASTM A307 (Type A), Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength
- ASTM A354 (Grade BD), Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners (for diameter of bolt smaller than
1/2 in.)
- ASTM A449, Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel Heat
Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use
- ASTM A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
- ASTM A563M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]
- ASTM F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
- ASTM F436M, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers [Metric]
- ASTM F844, Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for
General Use ASTM F959, Standard Specification for Compressible Washer-Type Direct
Tension Indicators for Use With Structural Fasteners
- ASTM F959M, Standard Specification for Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use With Structural Fasteners [Metric]
- ASTM F3125, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy
Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile
Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions (for Grades A325, A325M, A490, and A490M only)
When bolts, nuts, and washers other than the above are used, drawings shall clearly indicate
the type and size of fasteners to be employed and the nominal strength [resistance] assumed
in design.
B-7.9 Screw Connections

The provisions of this section shall apply to steel-to-steel screw connections within specified
limitations used for cold-formed steel structural members. All provisions in Section J4 shall apply
to screws with 0.08 in. (2.03 mm) ≤ d ≤ 0.25 in. (6.35 mm). The screws shall be thread-forming or
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 253
____________________________________________________________________________________
thread-cutting, with or without a self-drilling point. Screws shall be installed and tightened in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
For further details of connections, their further details along with specifications refer to “AISI
STANDARD North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members” Chapter J.
B-8 Available Soft Wares
For the design of Hollow Steel Sections (HSS) and Light Gauge Steel (LGS), following are some
of the licensed software available:
a. ETABS
b. Scottsdale
c. AGACAD
d. RFEM and RSTAB
e. Frame CAD etc.
B-9 Available Manufacturers
a. International Industries Limited for HSS

b. International Steel Limited for LGS
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 254
APPENDIX C - PSQCA STANDARDS-CIVIL
_____________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX-C
PAKISTAN STANDARDS AND QUALITY CONTROL
AUTHORITY (PSQCA) STANDARDS
PS 1421961Wooden doors. Specific material, construction, dimension, type of doors and tests
PS 1731962Wooden windows. Specifics the quality, construction and sizes of wooden windows for
exterior – interior use in buildings.
PS 26841989 Doors terminology
PS 26851989 Door leave – Test of behavior under humidity variations. (Successive uniform
climates).Specifies a method of testing the behavior under humidity variations of door leaves placed in
successive uniform climates. ISO:6444
PS 26861989 Windows and door height windows wind resistance tests. Defines method of testing for
assessing structural performance, under positive / negative static air-pressure of windows to be fitted in
the form of completely assembled and finished units
PS 26871989 Windows and door height windows air permeability test. Defines the method used for air
permeability, testing of windows to be fitted in exterior walls and supplied in the form of completely
assembled and finished units.
PS 26881989 Partitions made of components test for resistance to wind (static pressure and slamming
doors). This standard is one of the series of standards relating to performance of building elements and
gives method of testing the resistance to positive and negative static air pressure of complete partitions
made of components, i.e. of the assembly consisting of partition components over panels and doors, their
connection and device fixing them to the structure. It also specifies the method for assessing the effect of
slamming doors.
PS 26891989 Facades made of components – Test for resistance to positive and negative static pressure
generated by wind. ISO:7894. This Standard is one of the series of standards relating to performance of
building elements-specifies method for testing resistance to positive and negative static air pressure of
complete facades made of components, i.e. glazed component, fixed or opening.
PS 26901989 Window and door height windows mechanical test. ISO:8248. This standards specifies the
methods to be used for the mechanical testing of windows and door height windows, supplied in the form
of finished products in their normal condition of use.
PS 26911989 Door sets – Static loading tests. ISO:8269. Specifies a method of testing the behavior of
doorsteps under static loading. It applies to doorsteps with one pivoting leaf, without fixed parts.
PS 26921989 Door sets – Soft heavy body impact test. ISO:8270. Specifies a soft heavy body impact test
for door sets-applies to door sets with one or two leaves as supplied ready for installation and including
the leaf, door frame, associated hardware (closing, pivoting mechanism)
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 255
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PS 26931989 Door leaves – Hard body impact test. ISO:8271. Specifies a hard body (steel ball) impact
test for door leaves applies to all flat and rigid doors
P.S. 29311990 Doors leaves – Measurement of dimension and of effects of squareness. Specifies a
method of measuring the dimensions and defects of squareness of door leaves.
P.S. 29321990 Doors leaves – Measurement of defects of general flatness. Specifies the method for
measuring the defects of general flatness of door leaves.
P.S. 29331990 Doors sets – Static torsion test. Specifies the method to be used to determine the residual
deformation of door set and its hardware.
P.S. 30391991 Door sets – Test of behavior between two different climates. Specifies the method for the
behavior testing of doors and door sets placed between two different climates
P.S. 30401991 Door sets – Repeated opening and closing test. Specifies the method to be used when
determining the effect on door set of repeated opening and closing the door under normal conditions.
P.S. 30411991 Symbol designation of direction of closing and faces of doors windows and shutters. This
standard fixes. The convention. a) To identity by symbol for direction operating. b) To specify the
arrangement of the frame of door, windows, shutters in relation to premises.
P.S. 32031992 Match board wooden door leaves for external use. This standard specifies size limitation,
materials, workman shop and construction for ledged and braced doors, framed and ledged doors and
framed, ledged and braced doors, all with tongued and grooved match boarded facings for external use.
P.S. 32041992Metal door frames (steel). This standard specifies sizes and general requirements for door
frames fabricated from mild steel sheet and protective coatings suitable for internal or external use.
PS: 34431993 Modular coordination – coordinating sizes for door sets external and internal. This
Standard specifies the coordinating sizes for door sets of all materials to be used in buildings, and which
will fill coordinating spaces in dimensionally coordinated buildings.
P.S. 34441993 Door-sets-Repeated torsion test. This standard specifies the method to be used to
determine the effect or repeated torsion on door sets and their hardware. It applies to all door sets made of
any materials with vertically hinged door leaves in their normal operating conditions.
P.S. 35591994 Internal and external wood door sets, door leaves and frames. This Pakistan standard
specified the metric sizes for dimension coordinated internal and external wood door sets, door leaves
frames
P.S. 38581996 Door closers-specification for mechanical performance of crank and rack overhead door
closers. This standard covers requirements for the mechanical performance of single action overhead door
closers (with or without back check), including their arms and arm linkage, not forming the pivotal or
hinged arrangement of the door.
PS 40311997 Test methods of bending and impact for building boards. (JIS-A:1408). This standard
describes a test method for bending test for boards of building.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 256
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 40321997 Wooden flush door shutters, cellular and hollow core type part-1: plywood face panels.
This standard lays down requirements regarding types, sizes, materials, construction, workmanship and
finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or
cross band and face veneers.
PS 4032-11997 Wooden flush door shutters, cellular and hollow core type. Part 1: Plywood face panels.
This standard lays down requirements regarding types, sizes, materials, construction, workmanship and
finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or
cross band and face veneers.
PS 43471998 Test methods for wet tensile breaking strength of paper and paper products
P.S. 42761999 Wooden flushed doors shutter, (cellular and hollow type) particle board and hard face
panels. This standard lays down the requirements regarding aterial grade, types, size, construction,
finishes and tests for wooden flush door shutters of cellular and hollow core type with particle board face
panels (both veneered and unmannered and hard board face panels.
P.S. 45191999 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) prime windows-sliding glass doors. This standard specifies the
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) prime windows – sliding glass doors.
P.S. 47762001 Wood windows specification for factory assembled windows of various types. This part of
PS specifies requirements for materials (including preservation), profile design, workmanship, glazing,
construction, security and safety, weather tightness performance and operation and strength performance
of factory assembled wood framed windows of various types. The windows are designed to be finished
with either opaque of non-opaque finish.
P.S. 47562000 Locks and latches for doors in buildings. This standard specifies tests and levels of
performance for logs and latches for doors used in buildings. For logs and latches for doors used in
housing it also specifies dimensions. Locks and latches for fire doors are not included.
P.S. 2301962 Glossary of terms applicable to timber plywood and joinery. Define characteristics and
explanatory terms, seasoning, defects, plywood air board terms and joinery terms.
P.S. 5511985 Shear test for timber, (Revised). Specifies a method for determining the ultimate shearing
stress of wood by compressive loading parallel to grain either along the radial or along the tangential
surface.
PS 5521982 Determination of moisture content of wood. (1st Revision)
P.S. 5531965 Cleavage test for wood. Specifies test materials, preparation of specimens, size of
specimens, rate of loading and moisture content.
P.S. 5541965Determination of specification gravity & weight per cubic centimeter for timber. Specifies
test materials, preparation of specimens, procedure, calculation and moisture contents.
P.S. 5551985 (R) Wood – Determination of ultimate strength in static bending. (1st Revision). Specifies a
method for determining the ultimate strength of wood in static bending.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 257
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 5561985 Impact bending test for timber Specifies test materials, preparation of specimen, size of
specimen and procedure of testing, calculation and procedure of testing, calculations and moisture
contents.
P.S. 8441991 (R) Plywood – classification (Revised) Specifies classifications.
P.S. 8451990 (R) Plywood – Measurement of dimension of panels, (1st Revised). Specifies sampling
moisture content, apparatus, procedure, expression of results and test report.
P.S. 8461990 (R) Plywood – Veneer plywood for general use – General requirements. (1st Revised).
Specifies construction of panels, moisture content, workmanship, characteristics of outer and inner plies
and gluing.
P.S. 9651990 (R) Fiber building boards – Definition classification (1st Revised) Gives a definition and
established a classification of fibers building boards.
P.S. 9661990 (R) Particle boards – Definition classification (1st Revised).Covers definitions and
classification.
P.S. 9841974 Plywood vocabulary. Specifies composition and preparation of elements, grain, plywood
panel’s defects, repair, state of surface (non-finished) and transformation).
P.S. 15451982 Wood – sampling methods and general requirements for physical and mechanical tests. It
specifies methods for the selective and mechanical sampling of wooed for the conditioning of selected
material and for the preparation of test pieces. In addition, it specifies general requirements for physical
and mechanical tests on small, clear test pieces free from visible effects.
P.S. 16731985 Fiber building boards – Hard and medium boards for general purposes quality
specification – water absorption and swelling in thickness. Specifies the maximum values of water
absorption and of swelling in thickness after immersion in water of hard and medium fibre building
board.
P.S. 17291985 Fiber building boards – Hard medium boards, determination of water absorption, swelling
in thickness after immersion.
P.S. 17301985 Wood test method, determination of ultimate stress in compression parallel to grain.
Specifies a method for determination the ultimate stress wood in compression parallel to grain.
P.S. 17311985 Wood – Determination of ultimate tensile stress, parallel to grain. Specifies a method for
determining the ultimate tensile stress of wood parallel to grain.
P.S. 17321985 Wood – Determination of ultimate tensile stress, perpendicular to grain. Specifies a
method for determining the ultimate tensile stress if wood perpendicular to grain radical and tangential
directions.
P.S. 17331985Wood – Determination of modular of Elasticity in static bending. Specifies a method of

determining the modules of elasticity of wood in static bending by measuring the deflections in the net
bending area.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 258
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 17341985 Wood – Testing in compression perpendicular to grain. Specifies a method of testing
wood in compression perpendicular to the grain to determine proportional limit (conventional ultimate
strength) the load being applied to the whole surface (radial or tangential) of the test piece.
P.S. 19061987 Wood preservation by means of water – borne copper – chrome – arsenic comparison.
Specifies requirements for the treatment of timber with water borne wood preservative consisting
essentially of copper sulphate, sodium dichromate and hydrated assenic pent oxide etc. requirement for
the composition of preservative and method of application are specified.
P.S. 26681989 Fiber building boards hard and medium boards for general purposes quality specification
appearance shape and dimension tolerance. This standard establishes quality specifications for
appearance, shape and dimensional tolerances of fibre building boards for general purpose.
P.S. 26691989 Coniferous sawn timber size permissible deviation and shrinkage. Specifies permissible
deviations due to in accuracies in sawing, form nominal thicknesses, widths and lengths, for coniferous
swan timber.
P.S. 26701989 Coniferous, sawn timber sizes method of measurement. Defines method of measurements
of thickness, width, length and volume of coniferous sawn timber. Covers unplanned, square edge and un-
edge coniferous sawn timber.
P.S. 26711989 Wood – Determination of static hardness. Specifies a method for the determination of the
static hardness of wood.
P.S. 26721989 Wood – Determination of resistance to impact indentation.Specifies a method of the

determination of resistance of wood to impact indentation.
P.S. 26731989 Copper – Chrome water-born wood preservation and their application. Specifies
requirements for wood preservation consisting essentially of mixtures of copper sulphates and sodium
dichromate of potassium dichromate and for the method of application of such preservative.
P.S. 29341990 Wood based panels – Determination of dimension of test pieces. Specifies a method for
measuring the thickness length and width of test pieces of wood based panels such as fibre building
boards defined in PS: 965 – 1990, particle boards, plywood etc.
P.S. 29351990 Wood based panels – Determination of moisture content. Specifies a method for
determining the moisture content of wood based panels such as fibre building boards, particle boards,
plywood etc.
P.S. 30421991 Coniferous swan timber – Sizes terms and definition. This standard establishes a first
series of terms and definitions for correct and adequate understanding of terms relating to square edged
and edged sawn Timber it geometrical elements and sizes
P.S. 30431991 Coniferous swan timber – Defects classification. Specifies the national and international
classification of defects of coniferous sawn timber for which the terms and definitions are specified in PS:
3042.
P.S. 30441991 Medium density fiber board for interior use. This standards covers definitions,
dimensional tolerances, property requirements, test methods and methods of identification.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 259
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 32051992Plywood-veneer plywood with rotary cut veneer for general use rules for classification by
appearance. This standard established general rules for the classification by appearance of veneer
plywood defined in PS: 984, plywood vocabulary.
P.S. 32061992 Wood based panels – Determination of dimensions. This standard specifies methods for
measuring the thickness, width and length
P.S. 32071992 Wood based panels – determination of density. This standard specifies a method of
determining the density of wood based panels such as fibre building boards, defined in PS: 965, particle,
boards, defined in PS: 966, as well as plywood, defined in PS : 984.
P.S. 32081992 Coniferous sawn timber-defect measurement. This standard specified international
methods of measurement of defects of coniferous sawn timber, classified in PS: 3043, coniferous sawn
timber-defects-classification.
P.S. 35601999 Grading rules for sawn timber. The rules are intended for use in grading of sawn and
hewn timbers produced in Pakistan and will be terms as “The grading rules” for sawn timbers.
P.S. 35611994 Wood for manufacture of wood flooring-symbols for marking according to species. This
standard specified a masking system for wood, according to the species, utilized in the manufacturer of
wood flooring.
P.S. 35621994 Sound absorbing expanded pure agglomerated cork in tiles. This standard specifies certain
characteristics of sound absorbing expended pure agglomerated cork in tiles.
P.S. 35631994 Sound reducing composition cork in tiles. This standard specifies certain characteristics of
sound-reducing composition cork in tiles.
PS: 35811994 Sawn timber of broad leaved species-defects, classification
PS: 35821994 Sawn timber of broad leaves species – Defects, terms and definition
PS: 35831994 Sawn timber of broad leaved species defects measurement
PS: 35841994 Coniferous sawn timber – nominal dimension
PS: 35851994 Coniferous and broad leaved tree saw logs, visible defects-terms and definitions
PS: 35861994 Coniferous and broad leaved tree saw logs visible effects measurement
PS: 35871994 Broad leaved sawn timber – Sizes method of measurements
PS: 35881994 Sawn timber test methods determination of ultimate strength in shearing parallel to grain
PS: 35891994 Sawn timber test methods determination of resistance to local transverse compression
PS: 35901994 Timber structures-testing of unilateral punched metal plate fasteners and joints
PS: 35911994 Timber structures-testing of joints made with mechanical fasteners – requirements for
wood density
PS: 35921994 Fibre building boards – Determination of bending strength
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 260
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PS: 35931994 Floor tiles of agglomerated cork method of test
PS: 35941994 Agglomerated cork material of expansions joint for construction and building-test methods
P.S. 37061995 Coniferous and broad leaved sawn timber frames transportation packages. This standard
specifies requirement for packages and multi packages of square-edged and nudged, planned and
unplanned coniferous and broadleaved sawn timber.
P.S. 37071995 Plywood-veneer plywood with rotary out veneer for general use classification by
appearances of panels with outer veneers of poplar. This standard establishes the permissible defects for
the classification by appearance of surfaces of general purpose, veneer plywood with rotary cut outer
veneers of poplar.
P.S. 38591996 Expended pure agglomerated cork for thermal insulation characteristics, sampling and
package. Expanded pure agglomerated cork for thermal insulation – characteristics, sampling and
packaging.
P.S. 38601996 Mosaic parquet panels-general characteristics. This standard covers the general
manufacturing characteristics (dimension, permissible deviations, etc.), the inspection and delivery
conditions and the marking of mosaic parquet panel for any species of wood.
38801996 Cork and cork products-determination of thermal conductivity-hot plate method.
PS 43561998 Test methods for rubber property effect of liquids.
PS 43651998 Rubber vulcanized or thermoplastic determination of tension set at normal and high
temperature.
P.S. 45201999 Timber in joinery general classification of timber quality. This standard specifies the
method to be used to determine the characteristics and classify the appearance quality of timber to
joinery.
P.S. 47552000 Standard grading rules for logs. This standard specify grading rules for all timber species
produced in Pakistan.
52132012 Specification for Computing Reference Resistance of Wood-Based Materials and Structural
Connections for Load and Resistance Factor Design. This specification covers procedures for computing
the reference resistance of wood-based materials and structural connections for use in load and resistance
factor design
5214201225⁄8-In. and 4-In. Diameter Metal Shear Plates for Use in Wood Constructions. This
specification covers standardizing the dimensions and materials for the manufacture of 25⁄8 and 4-in.
diameter metal or cast iron shear plates used in the fabrication of connections in wood constructions.
P.S. 2311962 Mild steel bars for structural uses. Specifies steel making process, quality of finished steel
margin over and under dimension and weights, Pieces, tensile properties and tests.
P.S. 2401963 Plain cold drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete. Specifies process of manufacture,
quality of finished wire, chemical composition, tolerances, tensile strength, selection of test pieces, tests
and size of coil
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 261
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 2421963 Tensile testing of steel wire. Specifies symbols and designation, test pieces, determination
of cross-sectional area of test piece determination of elongation, rate of testing determination of proof
limit and proving tests.
P.S. 3851988 (R) Steel-charpy impact test (V-notch). (Revised). Specifies principle of test, symbol and
designations, test pieces, testing machine and test requirements.
P.S. 4231964 Cold drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement. Specifies process of manufacture,
quality of finished wire, tensile test pieces, cold bend test pieces, selection of test pieces, tests, margin
over and under specified dimensions, identification of wire calculation of weight and test at work.
P.S. 4241964 Load calibration of testing machine for tensile testing of steel. Specifies calibration by
means of: i) weight (mass), it) elastic devices (dynamometers), iii) proving levers and assessment of
calibration.
P.S. 4251964 Calibration of Vickers hardness testing machines. Covers calibration of testing machines
for determining Vickers hardness.
P.S. 4271988 Charpy impact test (u-notch for steel. (Revised). Covers principle of test, symbols and
designations, test pieces, testing machines and test requirements.
P.S. 6071991 Steel and steel products- general technical delivery requirements, (2nd Revision). Covers
ordering, manufacturing processes, documents, carrying out acceptance tests, mechanical test, chemical
composition, defects and dimensional tolerances and authorization for dispatch.
P.S. 6101967 Tables of brinell hardness (HB) for use in test made on flat surfaces. Specifies table of
brinell hardness values for steel.
P.S. 6111991 Specifies table of brinell hardness values for steel. Metallic materials: Hardness test-Tables
of Vickers hardness values (HV) for use in test made on flat surface, Part 2: HV 0.2 to HV S (Revised)
P.S. 6361967Galvanized Steel Wire. Specifies terminology, materials, manufacture, ductility weight,
reeling and marking.
P.S. 6801968 Steel nails for building purposes. Specifies materials, workmanship, finish, dimensions and
tolerances, inspection, certificate of compliance, weighs and designation of ordering.
P.S. 6811968 Hot rolled, steel strips (baling). Specifies materials, chemical composition, mechanical
properties, tolerances, supplier’s guarantee, inspection & testing facilities and test.
P.S. 7201991 Metallic material – Hardness test – verification of brinesll hardness testing machine
(Revised). Verification of brinesll hardness testing machines.
PS 7431969 Dimension of hot rolled steel sections equal leg- angles metric series –dimension and
sectional properties.
P.S. 7451994(R) Steel and cast iron – determination of sulpher content combustion titrimetric. (1st
Revision). Specification principle of method, regents, apparatus procedure, expression of results and test
repost.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 262
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 8471971 Selections & preparation of samples and test pieces prim wrought steel. Covers selection
and preparation of samples and test pieces for mechanical tests and selection and preparation of samples
for chemical analysis.
P.S. 9081994 (R) Method for chemical analysis of steel determination of Manganese volumetric. (1st
Revision). Covers principal of method, apparatus reagents, sampling procedure standardization and
circulation.
P.S. 9101987 (R) Hot-Rolled steel bars- Tolerances (1st Revision). Specifies dimensions
P.S. 9811994 (R)Steel wire Ropes for general purposes- characteristics. (1st Revision). Specifies types of
construction and diameter ranges-round strand, material and rope characteristics.
P.S. 9821974 Drawn wire for general purposes non alloy steel wire ropes. Specifies quality of coating,
diameters, breaking strength, simple torsion test, reverse bend test temple test on knotted wire, galvanized
wire inspection on zinc coating and accepted conditions.
P.S. 16122007 (R) Steel for the reinforcement of concrete-Weld able reinforcing 2014 (2nd R)Steel-Bar,
coil and decoiled product-Specification
PS 18501987 Zinc coating testing zinc coating on steel wire and quality requirements. It specifies the
methods of testing zinc coated steel wires and products fabricated, determine the nominal mass of the zinc
coatings.
P.S. 18561987 Hot rolled steel bars dimensions of round bars. This standard specifies dimensions of
metric series hot rolled steel round bars.
P.S. 18571987 Hot rolled steel bars dimensions of square bars. Specifies dimensions of metric series hot
rolled steel square bars.
P.S. 18581987 Hot rolled steel bars tolerances. This standard specifies metric dimensional tolerances
applicable to hot rolled steel bars supplied in straight length in the following product forms i.e. round,
square hexagonal, octagonal and flat bars
P.S. 18791987 Deformed & plain Billets – Steel Bars for the Concrete re-enforcement (metric). 2009 (1st
R) Specification covers deformed and plain billet hot-rolled steel concrete reinforcement bars. Sizes and
dimensions of deformed bars and their designated number are given in table. Bars of two minimum yield
levels namely 300 Mpa and 400 Mpa, designated as grade-300 and Grade-400 are specified. 2014 (2nd
R).
P.S. 19181987 Steel and cast iron-determination of total silicon gravimetric method. Specifies a
gravimetric method for the determination of total silicon in steel and case iron.
P.S. 19191987 Metallic materials – Hardness test – Brinell test specifies the method for the brinells
hardness test for metallic materials.
P.S. 19201987 Metallic Material Wrapping Test. Specifies the method for determining the ability of
metallic wire of diameter or thickness 0.1 to 10 mm inclusive, to undergo plastic deformation during
single torsion in one direction.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 263
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 19211987 Metallic Material Wire simple torsion test. Specifies the method of determining the ability
of metallic wire of dia. or thickness 0.3 to 10 mm inclusive to undergo plastic deformation during single
torsion in one direction.
P.S. 19221987Steel and cast iron- Determination of total carbon content combustion gravimetric method.
Specifies a gravimetric method for determining the total carbon content of steel and cast iron after
combustion of the test portion in current of oxygen.
P.S. 20311988Metallic materials – Bend test. Specifies the method for determination the ability of
metallic wire of diameter or thickness of 0.3 to 10 mm to undergo plastic deformation during reserve
bending.
P.S. 20321988 Metallic Material Reverse Bend Test. Specifies the method for determining the ability of
metallic wire of diameter or thickness of 0.3 to 10 mm to undergo plastic deformation during reverse
bending.
P.S. 26741989 Metallic materials – Tensile Testing at ambient temperature. Describes the method of
tensile testing of metals at room temperature to determine the following properties, yield strength, proof
strength, tensile strength elongation, reduction area etc.
P.S. 28691990 Metallic materials – Tube (in full section) – Bend test. It specifies a method for
determining the ability of full-section metallic tube of circular cross-section with an outside diameter not
greater than 65 mm to undergo plastic deformation in bending.
P.S. 28701990 Metallic materials – Tube – Flattening test. It specifies a method for determining the
ability of metallic tubes of circular cross-section having an outside diameter not greater than 400.
P.S. 30451991Rail steel deformed & plain bars for concrete reinforcement. This specification covers
deformed and plain rail steel concrete reinforcement bars. Bars are of two minimum yield levels 50,000
PSI (350 Mpa) and 60,000 PSI (400 Mpa) designated as Grade-50 (350) and Grade-60 (400) respectively
are specified.
P.S. 30461991 Axle-steel deformed and plain bars for concrete reinforcement. This specification covers
deformed and plain axle steel concrete reinforcement bars are of two minimum yield levels, namely
40,000 PSI (300 Mpa) and 600 000 PSI (420 Mpa) designated as Grade-40 (300) and Grade-60 (400)
respectively are defined.
P.S. 32091992 Steel for the presstressing and concrete-General requirements. Specifies requirements for
high tensile strength steel to be used in pre stressed concrete. It applies only to material in the
requirements for materials and anchorage devices used in conjunction with the pre stressing steel in
structural components.
P.S. 34451993 Steel bars for reinforcement of concrete-bend re bend test. This specification specifies
procedures for bend and rebends testing of reinforcing steel bars. The purpose of the rebend test is to
determine the ageing properties of bars exposed to plastic deformation
P.S. 34461993 Steel for the pre stressing of concrete- cold drawn wire. This standard specifies
requirements for round, cold drawn, high tensile steel wire, either plain, intended, ribbed or crimped. The
product is supplied mill coil wire or straight ended and stress relieved wire in coils or cut lengths.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 264
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 34471993 Steel for the pre stressing – strand. It specifies requirements for high tensile steel strand
which has been given a stress relieving heat treatment according to the general requirements specified in
PS: 3209-1992. The strand may contain either 2, 3, 7 or 19 individual wire.
P.S. 34481993 Certification scheme for steel bars and wire for the reinforcement of concrete structures. It
specifies rules for a certification scheme for continuous production of steel bars and wires for ordinary
reinforcement of concrete structures in order to verify the conformity with requirements specified in
product standards such as PS: 1612 and PS: 1879.
P.S. 35641994 Fabricated deformed steel bar mats for concrete reinforcement. This standard covers
materials in mat (or sheet) from fabricated from hot rolled deformed steel bars to be used for the
reinforcement of concrete.
P.S. 35651994 Zinc coated steel wire for fencing. This standard specifies requirements for drawn steel
wire zinc coated by the hot dip process, and intended for use in general purpose wire bending, barbed
wire bending field fencing and chain link fencing.
P.S. 35661994 Carbon steel Girder Rails of plain grooved and guard types. This standard covers carbon
steel girder rails of three classes based on type or type and weight, and chemistry.
P.S. 35671994 Zinc coatings for steel wire. This standard covers the requirements for the mass quality
and testing of zinc coatings and steel wire of circular cross section.
P.S. 37081995 Steel wire hard drawn for prestressing concrete redrawing. This specification covers
uncoated, high-strength hard-drawn steel wire for use in the manufacture of Prestressed concrete tanks
and similar structures. In application, the wire is continuously wrapped on the structure maintaining
tension by a device employing a wire drawing dia. for back tension.
P.S. 37091995 Zinc coated (Galvanized) steel bars for concrete reinforcement. This standard covers
concrete reinforcing bars with protective zinc coating applied by dipping the properly prepared
reinforcing bars into a molten bath of zinc.
P.S. 38611996 Steel for the pre-stressing of concrete quenched and tempered wire. This standard
specifies requirements for round wire made of quenched and tempered high tensile steel, with a surface
which is either plain, ribbed, grooved for indented.
P.S. 40331997 Hot rolled steel with or without subsequent processing. This standard specifies
requirements for round high tensile steel bars. The bars may be supplied either hot rolled or in a hot rolled
and processed condition.
P.S. 40341997Epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars. This standard covers deformed and plain steel
reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by the electrostatic spray method.
P.S. 42771998 Cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete and the manufacturing of welded
fabric. This standard specifies technical requirements for cold reduced steel wire designed for the
reinforcement of concrete or for use in welded fabric.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 265
_____________________________________________________________________________________
P.S. 42781998 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete welded fabric. This standard covered technical
requirements for factory made sheets or rolls of welded fabric, manufactured from steel wires or bars with
diameters from 4 mm to 16 mm and designed for the reinforcement present
PS 43571998 Test method for rubber deterioration in air oven
PS 47982002 Carbon structural steel
PS 49942009 Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 2014 (1st R)
PS 50232009 Low-alloy steel deformed and plain bars for concrete reinforcement. Test Methods,
Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
PS 50242009 Practice for using significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with
Specifications
PS 51352009 Deformed and plain carbon-steel bars for reinforcement. Test Methods and Definitions for
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
PS 51362009 Practices for packaging, marking and loading methods for steel products for shipment
P.S. 2321983 Ordinary Portland cement (4th Revision). 2008 (R), Specific composition and manufacture,
fineness, chemical composition, strength, consistence of standard cement paste, setting, time, soundness,
sampling and test method. 2015 (4th R)
P.S. 6121989 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement Type A (1st Revision)
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 266
APPENDIX – D - METRICATION CONVERSION GUIDE
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX-D
METRICATION CONVERSION GUIDE
Note:
Based on IEEE/ASTM SI 10-2002 document
The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in each system
are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way.
1a. LENGTH 1 in. = 25.40 mm
Rules: 1. Convert in. to mm using the factor 25.40 and round to two significant digits.
2. Orange shading: equivalence number for ACI 318M document.
3. Change to m, when conversion reaches 1000 mm.
Example 1: 1/2 in. = 0.5 x 25.40 = 12.70  use 13 mm
Conversion to Equivalent SI ACI 318M

in.-lb Units [in.]
SI Units [mm] Units [mm] Units [mm]
1/4 6.35 6.4 6
3/8 9.53 9.5 10
1/2 12.70 13 13
5/8 15.88 16 16
3/4 19.05 19 20
7/8 22.23 22 22
1 25.40 25 25
1 1/4 31.75 32 30
1 1/2 38.10 38 40
1 3/4 44.45 44 45
2 50.80 51 50
2 1/2 63.50 64 65
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 267
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3 76.20 76 75
3 1/2 88.90 89 90
4 101.60 100 100
5 127.00 130 125
5 1/2 139.70 140 140
6 152.40 150 150
7 177.80 180 175
7 1/2 190.50 190 190
8 203.20 200 200
9 228.60 230 230
9 3/4 247.65 250 245
10 254.00 250 250
11 279.40 280 280
12 304.80 300 300
12.5 317.50 320 315
14 355.60 360 350
16 406.40 410 400
18 457.20 460 450
20 508.00 510 500
24 609.60 610 600
25 635.00 640 635
30 762.00 760 750
36 914.40 910 900
1a. LENGTH CONTINUED

in.-lb Units [in.]
SI Units [m] Units [m] Units [m]
48 1.22 1.2 1.2
50 1.27 1.3 1.3
54 1.37 1.4 1.4
60 1.52 1.5 1.5
72 1.83 1.8 1.8
120 3.05 3.0 3.0
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 268
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
144 3.66 3.7 3.7
1,200 30.48 30 30
1,800 45.72 46 46
1b. CRACK WIDTH 1 in. = 25.40 mm
Rule: Convert in. to mm using the factor 25.40 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 0.013 in. = 0.013 x 25.40 = 0.3302  use 0.33
mm

in.-lb Units [in.]
0.012 0.3048 0.30 0.30
0.016 0.4064 0.41 0.41
1c. AGGREGATE SIZE
ASTM E 11
Size and ACI 318M
Approx. Size Nomenclature Nomenclature Units [mm]
in.-lb Units [in.] in.-lb Units are the Same
SI Units
4 4 in. 100 mm 100 mm
3.5 3-1/2 in. 90 mm 90 mm
3 3 in. 75 mm 75 mm
2.5 2-1/2 in. 63 mm 63 mm
2 2 in. 50 mm 50 mm
1.5 1-1/2 in. 37.5 mm 37.5 mm
1 1 in. 25.0 mm 25.0 mm
0.875 7/8 in. 22.4 mm 22.4 mm
0.750 3/4 in. 19.0 mm 19.0 mm
0.625 5/8 in. 16.0 mm 16.0 mm
0.500 1/2 in. 12.5 mm 12.5 mm
0.375 3/8 in. 9.5 mm 9.5 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 269
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0.250 1/4 in. 6.3 mm 6.3 mm
0.187 No. 4 4.75 mm 4.75 mm
0.132 No. 6 3.35 mm 3.35 mm
0.0937 No. 8 2.36 mm 2.36 mm
0.0787 No. 10 2.00 mm 2.00 mm
0.0469 No. 16 1.18 mm 1.18 mm
0.0331 No. 20 850  850 
0.0234 No. 30 600  600 
0.0165 No. 40 425  425 
0.0117 No. 50 300  300 
0.0070 No. 80 180  180 
0.0059 No. 100 150  150 
0.0029 No. 200 75  75 
1d. AREA 1 ft2 = 0.09290 m2
Rule: Convert ft2 to m2 using the factor 0.09290 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore 5,000 ft2 = 5,000 x 0.09290 = 464.5  use 460
m2
in.-lb Units Conversion to Equivalent SI ACI 318M

[ft2] SI Units [m2] Units [m2] Units [m2]
5,000 464.50 460 460
1e. AREA PER UNIT LENGTH 1 in.2 / ft = 2117 mm2 / m
Rule: Convert in2/ft to mm2/m using the factor 2117 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 0.10 in.2/ft = 0.10 x 2117 = 211.7  use 210 mm2/m
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 270
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Conversion to
in.-lb Units Equivalent SI ACI 318M
SI Units
[in.2/ft] Units [mm2/m] Units [mm2/m]
[mm2/m]
0.10 211.70 210 210
1f. VOLUME 1 yd3 = 0.7646 m3
Rule: Convert yd3 to m3 using the factor 0.7646 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 50 yd3 = 50 x 0.7646 = 38.23  use 38 m3
in.-lb Units Conversion to Equivalent in ACI 318M

[yd3] SI Units [m3] SI Units [m3] Units [m3]
50 38.23 38 38
150 114.69 110 110
1g. LOADS 1 lb = 0.004448 kN
Rule: Convert lb to kN using the factor 0.004448 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 16,000 lb = 16,000 x 0.004448 = 71.17  use 71
kN

in.-lb Units [lb]
SI Units [kN] Units [kN] Units [kN]
3,000 13.34 13 13
9,000 40.03 40 40
10,000 44.48 44 44
16,000 71.17 71 71
1h. LOADS PER UNIT LENGTH 1 lb / ft = 0.01459 kN / m
Rule: Convert lb/ft to kN/m using the factor 0.01459 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 1,500 lb/ft = 1,500 x 0.01459 = 21.89  use 22 kN/m
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 271
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
[lb/ft] SI Units [kN/m] Units [kN/m] Units [kN/m]
200 2.918 2.9 3.0
300 4.377 4.4 4.4
1,500 21.885 22 22
3,000 43.770 44 44
1i. AREA LOADS 1 psf = 0.04788 kN/m2
Rule: Convert psf to kN/m2 using the factor 0.04788 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 100 psf = 100 x 0.04788 = 4.788  use 4.8
kN/m2
Conversion to
SI Units
[psf] Units [kN/m2] Units [kN/m2]
[kN/m2]
100 4.7880 4.8 4.8
2. TEMPERATURE Degree F = (F-32)/1.8 = Degree C
Rule: To convert °F to °C use the conversion above and round to the nearest
degree. Except for temperatures above 212 deg F, for which the conversion
is rounded to 2 significant figures).
Example: 35 °F = (35 – 32)/1.8 = 1.67  use 2 °C
According to ACI style manual, the degree symbol should be used with
temperature, °F and °C.

[°F] SI Units [°C] Units [°C] Units [°C]
35 1.6667 2 2
40 4.4444 4 4
50 10.0000 10 10
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 272
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
60 15.5556 16 16
90 32.2222 32 32
95 35.0000 35 35
100 37.7778 38 38
200 93.3333 93 93
300 148.8889 150 150
400 204.4444 200 200
600 315.5556 320 320
1,500 815.5556 820 820
3. CONCRETE UNIT WEIGHT 1 lb/ft3 = 16.02 kg/m3
Rule: Convert the unit weight in lb/ft3 to kg/m3 using the factor 16.02 and round to three (3)
significant digits. (Show to the nearest 5 kg/m3 for values in the 'ones' digit.)
Example: 144 x 16.02 = 2307  use 2310 kg/m3
Conversion to
SI Units
[pcf] Units [kg/m3] Units [kg/m3]
[kg/m3]
70 1121.40 1120 1120
90 1441.80 1440 1440
105 1682.10 1680 1680
110 1762.20 1760 1760
115 1842.30 1840 1840
120 1922.40 1920 1920
140 2242.80 2240 2240
144 2306.88 2310 2310
145 2322.90 2320 2320
150 2403.00 2400 2400
155 2483.10 2480 2480
NOTE:
In SI Units the kg is a unit of mass therefore the term "unit weight" in a SI document should be "unit density."
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 273
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4a. CONCRETE STRESS 1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895 and round to two (2) significant digits (except
for concrete stress levels 5000 psi and above round to the nearest 5 MPa - see shaded
equivalents below).
Example 1: 4440 psi = 4.44 x 6.894757 = 30.61  use 31
MPa
Example 2: 12,000 psi = 12 x 6.894757 = 82.737  use 85 MPa

[psi] SI Units [MPa] Units [MPa] Units [MPa]
50 0.3448 0.34 0.35
70 0.4827 0.48 0.5
80 0.5516 0.55 0.55
100 0.6895 0.69 0.7
125 0.8619 0.86 0.9
150 1.0343 1.0 1.0
200 1.3790 1.4 1.4
225 1.5514 1.6 1.6
250 1.7238 1.7 1.7
260 1.7927 1.8 1.8
300 2.0685 2.1 2.1
400 2.7580 2.8 2.8
500 3.4475 3.4 3.5
700 4.8265 4.8 5.0
800 5.5160 5.5 5.5
1,000 6.8950 6.9 7.0
1,200 8.2740 8.3 8.3
2,000 13.7900 14 14
2,500 17.2375 17 17
3,000 20.6850 21 21
3,500 24.1325 24 24
4,000 27.5800 28 28
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 274
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4,440 30.6138 31 31
4,500 31.0275 31 31
5,000 34.4750 35 35
6,000 41.3700 40 40
8,000 55.1600 55 55
10,000 68.9500 70 70
11,000 75.8450 75 75
12,000 82.7400 85 85
15,000 103.4250 105 105
4b. MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 29,000,000 psi = 29,000,000 x 6.895 / 1000 = 199,995  use 200,000 MPa

29,000,000 199955 200000 200 000
5. EMPIRICAL EQUATIONS FOR CONCRETE WITH MULTIPLIERS OF
1/12.043 or 0.08304
Rule:
To convert the multipliers of use the factor 1/12.043 (or 0.08304) and round to two (2)
significant digits. Show constants or multipliers in front of equation.
Conversion of commonly used multipliers of :

in.-lb Units SI Units Units Units
0.1 0.0083 0.0083 0.0083
0.6 0.0498 0.050 0.050
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 275
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0.75 0.0623 0.062 0.062
1 0.0830 0.083 0.083
1.25 0.1038 0.10 0.10
1.33 0.1104 0.11 0.11
1.7 0.1412 0.14 0.14
1.9 0.1578 0.16 0.16
2 0.1661 0.17 0.17
2.66 0.2209 0.22 0.22
3 0.2491 0.25 0.25
3.3 0.2740 0.27 0.27
3.5 0.2906 0.29 0.29
4 0.3322 0.33 0.33
5 0.4152 0.42 0.42
6 0.4982 0.50 0.50
6.7 0.5564 0.56 0.56
7 0.5813 0.58 0.58
7.5 0.6228 0.62 0.62
8 0.6643 0.66 0.66
10 0.8304 0.83 0.83
12 0.9965 1.0 1.0
15 1.2456 1.2 1.2
16 1.3286 1.3 1.3
20 1.6608 1.7 1.7
25 2.0760 2.1 2.1
33 2.7403 2.7 2.7
40 3.3216 3.3 3.3
50 4.1520 4.2 4.2
65 5.3976 5.4 5.4
100 8.3040 8.3 8.3
160 13.2864 13 13
57000 4733.2800 4700 4700
6a. STEEL GRADES IN REFERENCED ASTMs FOR REINFORCING BARS, WELDED WIRE
REINFORCEMENT, STEEL STRANDS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES & SHAPES
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 276
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Conversion of reinforcing steel grades per ASTMs listed in the 318: (Minimum yield strengths)
Not included: A 53 - 02, A 307 - 04, A 500 - 03, A 501 - 01
A 185 - 02 and A 497 - 02 refer to A 82
A 185 - 02 and A 497 - 02 refer to A 82
A 775 - 01 and A 934 - 03 refer to A 615, A 706, and A 996
A 884 - 02 refers to A 82, A 185, A 496, and A 497
SI Units in.-lb Units ACI 318M

SI Units [MPa] Units [MPa]
in.-lb Units [ksi] [MPa] [ksi]
Nearest 5
ASTM A 36/ A 36M - 03 Summary
Plate, Bar MPa
36 250 and Shapes 36 250 250
ASTM A 82 - 02 WWR 40 280(300)1 280
56 385 42 290 290
65 450 46 315 315
70 485 50 350(345)2 350
ASTM A 242/ A 242M - 03 Plate, Bar 55 380 380
42 290 and Shapes 56 385 385
46 315 60 420(415)3 420
50 345 4 70 485 485
ASTM A 416/ A 416M - 02 Strand 75 520 520
250 1725 150 1035 1035
270 1860 235 1620 1620
ASTM A 421/ A 421M - 02 Strand 240 1655 1655
235 1620 250 1725 1725
240 1655 270 1860 1860
250 1725
ASTM A 496 - 02 WWR 1. ASTM is in the process of
changing to
70 485 280.
ASTM A 572/ A 572M - 03 Plate, Bar 2. Steel plate uses 345 and concrete
reinforcement uses 350: Use
42 290 and Shapes 350.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 277
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
50 345 4 3. Steel plate uses 415 and concrete
55 380 420.
60 415 4 4. Red values shall not be used.
65 450
ASTM A 588/ A 588M - 03 Plate, Bar
42 290 and Shapes
46 315
50 345 4
ASTM A 615/ A 615M - 03 Rebar
40 280
60 420
75 520
60 420
150 1035
40 300 4
50 350
60 420
75 520
50 345 4 and Shapes
65 450
40 280
50 350
60 420
6b. STEEL STRESSES NOT REFERENCED IN ASTMs
1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895; round to 2
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 278
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
significant digits (except for 5000 psi and above round up to the
nearest 5 MPa)
Example: 80,000 psi = 80000 x 0.006895 = 551.6 use 550 MPa
Conversion to
Equivalent SI ACI 318M
in.-lb Units [psi] SI Units
Units [MPa] Units [MPa]
[MPa]
3,000 20.69 21 21
10,000 68.95 70 70
18,000 124.11 125 125
20,000 137.90 140 140
30,000 206.85 205 210
52,000 358.54 360 360
80,000 551.60 550 550
100,000 689.50 690 700
125,000 861.88 860 860
275,000 1896.13 1895 1900
7a. REINFORCING BAR SIZE
Conversion of reinforcing steel bar sizes per ASTM:
in.-lbs Units (SI) Units

ACI 318M
ASTM A 615/ A 615M–03
No. 3 No. 10 No. 10
No. 4 No. 13 No. 13
No. 5 No. 16 No. 16
No. 6 No. 19 No. 19
No. 7 No. 22 No. 22
No. 8 No. 25 No. 25
No. 9 No. 29 No. 29
No. 10 No. 32 No. 32
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 279
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
No. 11 No. 36 No. 36
No. 14 No. 43 No. 43
No. 18 No. 57 No. 57
7b. STEEL STRAND SIZE*
Conversion of steel strand sizes per ASTM:
ASTM
in.-lbs Units
SI Units [mm] Designated
[in.] ACI 318M
Strand No.
ASTM A 416/ A 416M–02
0.250 6.4 6 6
0.313 7.9 8 8
0.375 9.5 9 9
0.438 11.1 11 11
0.500 12.7 13 13
0.600 15.2 15 15
7c. REINFORCING BAR SIZE* (HIGH-STRENGTH)
in.-lbs SI Units in.-lbs SI Units

Units [in.] [mm] Units [in.] [mm]
ASTM A 722/ A 722M – ACI 318M ACI 318M
98 ASTM A 722/ A 722M – 98
Type I (Plain) Bar Type II (Deformed) Bar
--- --- --- 5/8 15 15
3/4 19 19 3/4 20 20
7/8 22 22 --- --- ---
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 280
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 25 25 1 26 26
1-1/8 29 29 --- --- ---
1-1/4 32 32 1-1/4 32 32
1-3/8 35 35 1-3/8 36 36
1-3/4 46 46
2-1/2 65 65
*Where ACI 318 gives limits on general 'Tendon' sizes, an exact conversion of shall be made.
(Example; 5/8" tendon will be converted to 16 mm)
8. STEEL WIRE REINFORCEMENT

ASTM does not have a direct SI equivalent (ASTM sizes and dimensions not shaded); Table below shows in.-lb unit sizes with
calculated SI dimensions and suggested SI sizes (shaded). Use the nearest SI size as appropriate.
in.-lb Units SI Units
ASTM A 82–02 (W, MW) and ASTM A 496-02 (D, MD)
Calculated Calculated ACI 318 M -
Size Diameter [in.] Area [in.2] Size
Diameter [mm] Area [mm2] Suggested Size
W 0.5 0.080 0.005 2.03 3.23 MW 5

MW 5 2.50 5.00
D1 0.113 0.01 2.87 6.45
W 1.2 0.124 0.012 3.15 7.74 MW 5
W 1.4 0.134 0.014 3.40 9.08 MW 10
MW 10 3.60 10.00
W 2 or D 2 0.160 : 0.159 0.02 4.06 12.90 MW 15
MW 15 4.40 15.00
W 2.5 0.178 0.025 4.52 16.13 MW 15
W 2.9 0.192 0.029 4.88 18.70 MW 20
D3 0.195 0.03 4.95 19.35
MW 20 5.00 20.00
W 3.5 0.211 0.035 5.36 22.58 MW 25
MW 25 or MD 25 5.60 25
W 4 or D 4 0.226 : 0.225 0.04 5.74 25.81 MW25 or MD25
W 4.5 0.239 0.045 6.07 29.03 MW 30
MW 30 or MD 30 6.20 30
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 281
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
W 5 or D 5 0.252 : 0.250 0.05 6.40 32.26 MW 30 or MD 30
MW 35 or MD 35 6.70 35
W 5.5 0.265 0.055 6.73 35.48 MW 35
W 6 or D 6 0.276 0.06 7.01 38.71 MW 40 or MD 40
MW 40 or MD 40 7.10 40
D7 0.299 0.07 MW 45 or MD 45 7.60 45 MD 45
MW 50 or MD 50 8.00 50
W 8 or D 8 0.319 0.08 8.10 51.61 MW 50 or MD 50
MW 55 or MD 55 8.40 55
D9 0.338 0.09 8.59 58.96 MD 60
MW 60 or MD 60 8.70 60
W 10 or D 10 0.357 : 0.356 0.10 9.07 64.52 MW 65 or MD 65
MW 65 or MD 65 9.10 65
MW 70 or MD 70 9.40 70
D 11 0.374 0.11 9.50 70.97 MD 70
W 12 or D 12 0.391 : 0.390 0.12 9.93 77.42 MW 80 or MD 80
MW 80 or MD 80 10.10 80
D 13 0.406 0.13 10.31 83.87 MD 80
MW 90 or MD 90 10.70 90
W 14 or D 14 0.422 0.14 10.72 90.32 MW 90 or MD 90
D 15 0.437 0.15 11.10 96.77 MD 100
MW 100 or MD
100 11.30 100
MW 100 or MD
W 16 or D 16 0.451 0.16 11.46 103.25 100
D 17 0.465 0.17 11.81 109.68 MD 100
MW 120 or MD
W 18 or D 18 0.479 : 0.478 0.18 12.17 116.13 120
MW 120 or MD
120 12.40 120
D 19 0.491 0.19 12.47 122.58 MD 120
MW 130 or MD
W 20 or D 20 0.505 : 0.504 0.20 12.83 129.03 130
MW 130 or MD
130 12.90 130
D 21 0.517 0.21 13.13 135.48 MD 130
W 22 or D 22 0.529 0.22 13.44 141.90
D 23 0.541 0.23 13.74 148.39
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 282
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
W 24 or D 24 0.533 : 0.553 0.24 14.05 154.80
D 25 0.564 0.25 14.33 161.29
W 26 or D 26 0.575 0.26 14.61 167.70
D 27 0.586 0.27 14.88 174.19
W 28 or D 28 0.597 0.28 15.16 180.60
D 29 0.608 0.29 15.44 187.10
W 30 or D 30 0.618 0.3 15.70 193.50
MW 200 or MD MW 200 or MD
W 31 or D 31 0.628 0.31 200 15.95 200 200
W 45 or D 45 0.757 0.45 290 19.22 290 290
Metrication Conversion Guide
Note:
Based on IEEE/ASTM SI 10-2002 document
The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in each system
are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way.
1a. LENGTH 1 in. = 25.40 mm
Rules: 1. Convert in. to mm using the factor 25.40 and round to two significant digits.
2. Orange shading: equivalence number for ACI 318M document.
3. Change to m, when conversion reaches 1000 mm.
Example 1: 1/2 in. = 0.5 x 25.40 = 12.70  use 13 mm

in.-lb Units [in.]
1/4 6.35 6.4 6
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 283
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3/8 9.53 9.5 10
1/2 12.70 13 13
5/8 15.88 16 16
3/4 19.05 19 20
7/8 22.23 22 22
1 25.40 25 25
1 1/4 31.75 32 30
1 1/2 38.10 38 40
1 3/4 44.45 44 45
2 50.80 51 50
2 1/2 63.50 64 65
3 76.20 76 75
3 1/2 88.90 89 90
4 101.60 100 100
5 127.00 130 125
5 1/2 139.70 140 140
6 152.40 150 150
7 177.80 180 175
7 1/2 190.50 190 190
8 203.20 200 200
9 228.60 230 230
9 3/4 247.65 250 245
10 254.00 250 250
11 279.40 280 280
12 304.80 300 300
12.5 317.50 320 315
14 355.60 360 350
16 406.40 410 400
18 457.20 460 450
20 508.00 510 500
24 609.60 610 600
25 635.00 640 635
30 762.00 760 750
36 914.40 910 900
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 284
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1a. LENGTH CONTINUED

in.-lb Units [in.]
SI Units [m] Units [m] Units [m]
48 1.22 1.2 1.2
50 1.27 1.3 1.3
54 1.37 1.4 1.4
60 1.52 1.5 1.5
72 1.83 1.8 1.8
120 3.05 3.0 3.0
144 3.66 3.7 3.7
1,200 30.48 30 30
1,800 45.72 46 46
1b. CRACK WIDTH 1 in. = 25.40 mm
Rule: Convert in. to mm using the factor 25.40 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 0.013 in. = 0.013 x 25.40 = 0.3302  use 0.33
mm

in.-lb Units [in.]
0.012 0.3048 0.30 0.30
0.016 0.4064 0.41 0.41
1c. AGGREGATE SIZE
ASTM E 11
Size and ACI 318M
Approx. Size Nomenclature Nomenclature Units [mm]
in.-lb Units [in.] in.-lb Units are the Same
SI Units
4 4 in. 100 mm 100 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 285
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.5 3-1/2 in. 90 mm 90 mm
3 3 in. 75 mm 75 mm
2.5 2-1/2 in. 63 mm 63 mm
2 2 in. 50 mm 50 mm
1.5 1-1/2 in. 37.5 mm 37.5 mm
1 1 in. 25.0 mm 25.0 mm
0.875 7/8 in. 22.4 mm 22.4 mm
0.750 3/4 in. 19.0 mm 19.0 mm
0.625 5/8 in. 16.0 mm 16.0 mm
0.500 1/2 in. 12.5 mm 12.5 mm
0.375 3/8 in. 9.5 mm 9.5 mm
0.250 1/4 in. 6.3 mm 6.3 mm
0.187 No. 4 4.75 mm 4.75 mm
0.132 No. 6 3.35 mm 3.35 mm
0.0937 No. 8 2.36 mm 2.36 mm
0.0787 No. 10 2.00 mm 2.00 mm
0.0469 No. 16 1.18 mm 1.18 mm
0.0331 No. 20 850 m 850 m
0.0234 No. 30 600 m 600 m
0.0165 No. 40 425 m 425 m
0.0117 No. 50 300 m 300 m
0.0070 No. 80 180 m 180 m
0.0059 No. 100 150 m 150 m
0.0029 No. 200 75 m 75 m
1d. AREA 1 ft2 = 0.09290 m2
Rule: Convert ft2 to m2 using the factor 0.09290 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore 5,000 ft2 = 5,000 x 0.09290 = 464.5  use 460
m2
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 286
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

in.-lb Units [ft2]
SI Units [m2] Units [m2] Units [m2]
5,000 464.50 460 460
1e. AREA PER UNIT LENGTH 1 in.2 / ft = 2117 mm2 / m
Rule: Convert in2/ft to mm2/m using the factor 2117 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 0.10 in.2/ft = 0.10 x 2117 = 211.7  use 210 mm2/m
Conversion to
SI Units
[in.2/ft] Units [mm2/m] Units [mm2/m]
[mm2/m]
0.10 211.70 210 210
1f. VOLUME 1 yd3 = 0.7646 m3
Rule: Convert yd3 to m3 using the factor 0.7646 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 50 yd3 = 50 x 0.7646 = 38.23  use 38 m3
in.-lb Units Conversion to Equivalent in ACI 318M

[yd3] SI Units [m3] SI Units [m3] Units [m3]
50 38.23 38 38
150 114.69 110 110
1g. LOADS 1 lb = 0.004448 kN
Rule: Convert lb to kN using the factor 0.004448 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 16,000 lb = 16,000 x 0.004448 = 71.17  use 71
kN

in.-lb Units [lb]
SI Units [kN] Units [kN] Units [kN]
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 287
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3,000 13.34 13 13
9,000 40.03 40 40
10,000 44.48 44 44
16,000 71.17 71 71
1h. LOADS PER UNIT LENGTH 1 lb / ft = 0.01459 kN / m
Rule: Convert lb/ft to kN/m using the factor 0.01459 and round to 2 significant digits.
Example : 1,500 lb/ft = 1,500 x 0.01459 = 21.89  use 22 kN/m

[lb/ft] SI Units [kN/m] Units [kN/m] Units [kN/m]
200 2.918 2.9 3.0
300 4.377 4.4 4.4
1,500 21.885 22 22
3,000 43.770 44 44
1i. AREA LOADS 1 psf = 0.04788 kN/m2
Rule: Convert psf to kN/m2 using the factor 0.04788 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 100 psf = 100 x 0.04788 = 4.788  use 4.8
kN/m2
Conversion to
SI Units
[psf] Units [kN/m2] Units [kN/m2]
[kN/m2]
100 4.7880 4.8 4.8
2. TEMPERATURE Degree F = (F-32)/1.8 = Degree C
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 288
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Rule: To convert °F to °C use the conversion above and round to the nearest
degree. Except for temperatures above 212 deg F, for which the conversion
is rounded to 2 significant figures).
Example: 35 °F = (35 – 32)/1.8 = 1.67  use 2 °C
According to ACI style manual, the degree symbol should be used with
temperature, °F and °C.

[°F] SI Units [°C] Units [°C] Units [°C]
35 1.6667 2 2
40 4.4444 4 4
50 10.0000 10 10
60 15.5556 16 16
90 32.2222 32 32
95 35.0000 35 35
100 37.7778 38 38
200 93.3333 93 93
300 148.8889 150 150
400 204.4444 200 200
600 315.5556 320 320
1,500 815.5556 820 820
3. CONCRETE UNIT WEIGHT 1 lb/ft3 = 16.02 kg/m3
Rule: Convert the unit weight in lb/ft3 to kg/m3 using the factor 16.02 and round to three (3)
significant digits. (Show to the nearest 5 kg/m3 for values in the 'ones' digit.)
Example: 144 x 16.02 = 2307  use 2310 kg/m3

[pcf] SI Units [kg/m3] Units [kg/m3] Units [kg/m3]
70 1121.40 1120 1120
90 1441.80 1440 1440
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 289
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
105 1682.10 1680 1680
110 1762.20 1760 1760
115 1842.30 1840 1840
120 1922.40 1920 1920
140 2242.80 2240 2240
144 2306.88 2310 2310
145 2322.90 2320 2320
150 2403.00 2400 2400
155 2483.10 2480 2480
NOTE:
In SI Units the kg is a unit of mass therefore the term "unit weight" in a SI document should be "unit density."
4a. CONCRETE STRESS 1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895 and round to two (2) significant digits (except
for concrete stress levels 5000 psi and above round to the nearest 5 MPa - see shaded
equivalents below).
Example 1: 4440 psi = 4.44 x 6.894757 = 30.61  use 31
MPa
Example 2: 12,000 psi = 12 x 6.894757 = 82.737  use 85 MPa

50 0.3448 0.34 0.35
70 0.4827 0.48 0.5
80 0.5516 0.55 0.55
100 0.6895 0.69 0.7
125 0.8619 0.86 0.9
150 1.0343 1.0 1.0
200 1.3790 1.4 1.4
225 1.5514 1.6 1.6
250 1.7238 1.7 1.7
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 290
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
260 1.7927 1.8 1.8
300 2.0685 2.1 2.1
400 2.7580 2.8 2.8
500 3.4475 3.4 3.5
700 4.8265 4.8 5.0
800 5.5160 5.5 5.5
1,000 6.8950 6.9 7.0
1,200 8.2740 8.3 8.3
2,000 13.7900 14 14
2,500 17.2375 17 17
3,000 20.6850 21 21
3,500 24.1325 24 24
4,000 27.5800 28 28
4,440 30.6138 31 31
4,500 31.0275 31 31
5,000 34.4750 35 35
6,000 41.3700 40 40
8,000 55.1600 55 55
10,000 68.9500 70 70
11,000 75.8450 75 75
12,000 82.7400 85 85
15,000 103.4250 105 105
4b. MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895 and round to 2 significant digits.
Therefore : 29,000,000 psi = 29,000,000 x 6.895 / 1000 = 199,995  use 200,000 MPa

29,000,000 199955 200000 200 000
5. EMPIRICAL EQUATIONS FOR CONCRETE WITH MULTIPLIERS OF
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 291
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1/12.043 or 0.08304
Rule:
To convert the multipliers of use the factor 1/12.043 (or 0.08304) and round to two (2)
significant digits. Show constants or multipliers in front of equation.
Conversion of commonly used multipliers of :

in.-lb Units SI Units Units Units
0.1 0.0083 0.0083 0.0083
0.6 0.0498 0.050 0.050
0.75 0.0623 0.062 0.062
1 0.0830 0.083 0.083
1.25 0.1038 0.10 0.10
1.33 0.1104 0.11 0.11
1.7 0.1412 0.14 0.14
1.9 0.1578 0.16 0.16
2 0.1661 0.17 0.17
2.66 0.2209 0.22 0.22
3 0.2491 0.25 0.25
3.3 0.2740 0.27 0.27
3.5 0.2906 0.29 0.29
4 0.3322 0.33 0.33
5 0.4152 0.42 0.42
6 0.4982 0.50 0.50
6.7 0.5564 0.56 0.56
7 0.5813 0.58 0.58
7.5 0.6228 0.62 0.62
8 0.6643 0.66 0.66
10 0.8304 0.83 0.83
12 0.9965 1.0 1.0
15 1.2456 1.2 1.2
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 292
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
16 1.3286 1.3 1.3
20 1.6608 1.7 1.7
25 2.0760 2.1 2.1
33 2.7403 2.7 2.7
40 3.3216 3.3 3.3
50 4.1520 4.2 4.2
65 5.3976 5.4 5.4
100 8.3040 8.3 8.3
160 13.2864 13 13
57000 4733.2800 4700 4700
6a. STEEL GRADES IN REFERENCED ASTMs FOR REINFORCING BARS, WELDED WIRE
REINFORCEMENT, STEEL STRANDS, AND STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES & SHAPES
Conversion of reinforcing steel grades per ASTMs listed in the 318: (Minimum yield strengths)
Not included: A 53 - 02, A 307 - 04, A 500 - 03, A 501 - 01
A 185 - 02 and A 497 - 02 refer to A 82
A 185 - 02 and A 497 - 02 refer to A 82
A 775 - 01 and A 934 - 03 refer to A 615, A 706, and A 996
A 884 - 02 refers to A 82, A 185, A 496, and A 497
SI Units in.-lb Units ACI 318M

SI Units [MPa] Units [MPa]
in.-lb Units [ksi] [MPa] [ksi]
Nearest 5
ASTM A 36/ A 36M - 03 Summary
Plate, Bar MPa
36 250 and Shapes 36 250 250
ASTM A 82 - 02 WWR 40 280(300)1 280
56 385 42 290 290
65 450 46 315 315
70 485 50 350(345)2 350
ASTM A 242/ A 242M - 03 Plate, Bar 55 380 380
42 290 and Shapes 56 385 385
46 315 60 420(415)3 420
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 293
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
50 345 4 70 485 485

ASTM A 416/ A 416M - 02 Strand 75 520 520
250 1725 150 1035 1035
270 1860 235 1620 1620
ASTM A 421/ A 421M - 02 Strand 240 1655 1655
235 1620 250 1725 1725
240 1655 270 1860 1860
250 1725
ASTM A 496 - 02 WWR 1. ASTM is in the process of
changing to
70 485 280.
ASTM A 572/ A 572M - 03 Plate, Bar 2. Steel plate uses 345 and concrete
42 290 and Shapes 350.
50 345 4 3. Steel plate uses 415 and concrete
55 380 420.
60 415 4 4. Red values shall not be used.
65 450
42 290 and Shapes
46 315
50 345 4
40 280
60 420
75 520
60 420
150 1035
40 300 4
50 350
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 294
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
60 420
75 520
50 345 4 and Shapes
65 450
40 280
50 350
60 420
6b. STEEL STRESSES NOT REFERENCED IN ASTMs
1000 psi = 6.895 MPa
Rule: Convert psi to MPa using the factor 0.006895; round to 2

significant digits (except for 5000 psi and above round up to the
nearest 5 MPa)
Example: 80,000 psi = 80000 x 0.006895 = 551.6 use 550 MPa
Conversion to
Equivalent SI ACI 318M
in.-lb Units [psi] SI Units
Units [MPa] Units [MPa]
[MPa]
3,000 20.69 21 21
10,000 68.95 70 70
18,000 124.11 125 125
20,000 137.90 140 140
30,000 206.85 205 210
52,000 358.54 360 360
80,000 551.60 550 550
100,000 689.50 690 700
125,000 861.88 860 860
275,000 1896.13 1895 1900
7a. REINFORCING BAR SIZE
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 295
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Conversion of reinforcing steel bar sizes per ASTM:
in.-lbs Units (SI) Units

ACI 318M
ASTM A 615/ A 615M–03
No. 3 No. 10 No. 10
No. 4 No. 13 No. 13
No. 5 No. 16 No. 16
No. 6 No. 19 No. 19
No. 7 No. 22 No. 22
No. 8 No. 25 No. 25
No. 9 No. 29 No. 29
No. 10 No. 32 No. 32
No. 11 No. 36 No. 36
No. 14 No. 43 No. 43
No. 18 No. 57 No. 57
7b. STEEL STRAND SIZE*
ASTM
in.-lbs Units
SI Units [mm] Designated
[in.] ACI 318M
Strand No.
ASTM A 416/ A 416M–02
0.250 6.4 6 6
0.313 7.9 8 8
0.375 9.5 9 9
0.438 11.1 11 11
0.500 12.7 13 13
0.600 15.2 15 15
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 296
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7c. REINFORCING BAR SIZE* (HIGH-STRENGTH)
in.-lbs SI Units in.-lbs SI Units

Units [in.] [mm] Units [in.] [mm]
ASTM A 722/ A 722M – ACI 318M ACI 318M
98 ASTM A 722/ A 722M – 98
Type I (Plain) Bar Type II (Deformed) Bar
--- --- --- 5/8 15 15
3/4 19 19 3/4 20 20
7/8 22 22 --- --- ---
1 25 25 1 26 26
1-1/8 29 29 --- --- ---
1-1/4 32 32 1-1/4 32 32
1-3/8 35 35 1-3/8 36 36
1-3/4 46 46
2-1/2 65 65
*Where ACI 318 gives limits on general 'Tendon' sizes, an exact conversion of shall be made.
(Example; 5/8" tendon will be converted to 16 mm)
8. STEEL WIRE REINFORCEMENT

ASTM does not have a direct SI equivalent (ASTM sizes and dimensions not shaded); Table below shows in.-lb unit sizes with
calculated SI dimensions and suggested SI sizes (shaded). Use the nearest SI size as appropriate.
in.-lb Units SI Units
ASTM A 82–02 (W, MW) and ASTM A 496-02 (D, MD)
Calculated Calculated ACI 318 M -
Size Diameter [in.] Area [in.2] Size
Diameter [mm] Area [mm2] Suggested Size
W 0.5 0.080 0.005 2.03 3.23 MW 5

MW 5 2.50 5.00
D1 0.113 0.01 2.87 6.45
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 297
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
W 1.2 0.124 0.012 3.15 7.74 MW 5
W 1.4 0.134 0.014 3.40 9.08 MW 10
MW 10 3.60 10.00
W 2 or D 2 0.160 : 0.159 0.02 4.06 12.90 MW 15
MW 15 4.40 15.00
W 2.5 0.178 0.025 4.52 16.13 MW 15
W 2.9 0.192 0.029 4.88 18.70 MW 20
D3 0.195 0.03 4.95 19.35
MW 20 5.00 20.00
W 3.5 0.211 0.035 5.36 22.58 MW 25
MW 25 or MD 25 5.60 25
W 4 or D 4 0.226 : 0.225 0.04 5.74 25.81 MW25 or MD25
W 4.5 0.239 0.045 6.07 29.03 MW 30
MW 30 or MD 30 6.20 30
W 5 or D 5 0.252 : 0.250 0.05 6.40 32.26 MW 30 or MD 30
MW 35 or MD 35 6.70 35
W 5.5 0.265 0.055 6.73 35.48 MW 35
W 6 or D 6 0.276 0.06 7.01 38.71 MW 40 or MD 40
MW 40 or MD 40 7.10 40
D7 0.299 0.07 MW 45 or MD 45 7.60 45 MD 45
MW 50 or MD 50 8.00 50
W 8 or D 8 0.319 0.08 8.10 51.61 MW 50 or MD 50
MW 55 or MD 55 8.40 55
D9 0.338 0.09 8.59 58.96 MD 60
MW 60 or MD 60 8.70 60
W 10 or D 10 0.357 : 0.356 0.10 9.07 64.52 MW 65 or MD 65
MW 65 or MD 65 9.10 65
MW 70 or MD 70 9.40 70
D 11 0.374 0.11 9.50 70.97 MD 70
W 12 or D 12 0.391 : 0.390 0.12 9.93 77.42 MW 80 or MD 80
MW 80 or MD 80 10.10 80
D 13 0.406 0.13 10.31 83.87 MD 80
MW 90 or MD 90 10.70 90
W 14 or D 14 0.422 0.14 10.72 90.32 MW 90 or MD 90
D 15 0.437 0.15 11.10 96.77 MD 100
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 298
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
MW 100 or MD
100 11.30 100
MW 100 or MD
W 16 or D 16 0.451 0.16 11.46 103.25 100
D 17 0.465 0.17 11.81 109.68 MD 100
MW 120 or MD
W 18 or D 18 0.479 : 0.478 0.18 12.17 116.13 120
MW 120 or MD
120 12.40 120
D 19 0.491 0.19 12.47 122.58 MD 120
MW 130 or MD
W 20 or D 20 0.505 : 0.504 0.20 12.83 129.03 130
MW 130 or MD
130 12.90 130
D 21 0.517 0.21 13.13 135.48 MD 130
W 22 or D 22 0.529 0.22 13.44 141.90
D 23 0.541 0.23 13.74 148.39
W 24 or D 24 0.533 : 0.553 0.24 14.05 154.80
D 25 0.564 0.25 14.33 161.29
W 26 or D 26 0.575 0.26 14.61 167.70
D 27 0.586 0.27 14.88 174.19
W 28 or D 28 0.597 0.28 15.16 180.60
D 29 0.608 0.29 15.44 187.10
W 30 or D 30 0.618 0.3 15.70 193.50
W 31 or D 31 0.628 0.31 200 15.95 200 200
W 45 or D 45 0.757 0.45 290 19.22 290 290
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 299

Standardization of Building Codes, Standards and Specifications For Low-Cost (Affordable) Units-2021 - Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standardization of Building Codes, Standards and Specifications For Low-Cost (Affordable) Units-2021 - Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standardization of Building Codes, Standards and Specifications For Low-Cost (Affordable) Units-2021 - Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

_________________________________________________________________________________

Standardization of Building Codes, Standards

1. Engr. Prof. Dr. Sarosh Hashmat Lodi Convener

2. Engr. Brig. Abid Saleem Member

3. Arc. Plnr. Kalim Siddiqui Member

4. Chair Prof. Engr. Dr. Shuaib H. Ahmad Member

5. Engr. Prof. Dr. Muhammad Ali Memon Member

6. Engr. Zaigham Mahmood Rizvi Member

7. Mr. Fayyaz Ilyas Member

9. Engr. Danish Bin Rauf Member

10. Arc. Hammad Husain Member

11. Arc. Azar Raza Khan Member

12. Engr. Faiz Muhammad Bhutta Member

13. Mr. Faiz ul Sibtain Secretary to Committee

SECTION 1 - GENERAL ITEMS

a. Covered area of the housing unit / apartment up to 850 square feet,

1.5 Licensed design professional

1.6 Authority Having Jurisdiction

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) means an organization, office, or individual responsible

1.7 The Engineer

1.8 Building Official

1.9 Quality of Units (Houses or Homes)

 A.S.T.M - American Society for Testing and Materials.

 IBC – International Building Code

1.11 Approval of Materials, Products or Systems

1.12 Construction Practice

2.2 Clearing and Grubbing-Up

SECTION 3 - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

a. Full co-operation shall be given to other trades to install embedded items.

American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 306.1 - Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting

ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM International (ASTM)

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)

Pakistan Standards and Quality Control Authority (PSQCA)

List of PSQCA Standards for Civil Construction are provided in Appendix C.

SIZE TOTAL PASSING PERCENT BY WEIGHT

2" Sieve (50.00 mm) 100

SIZE TOTAL PASSING PERCENT BY WEIGHT

SIZE TOTAL PASSING PERCENT BY WEIGHT

i. One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms.

Cement and Cementitious Materials

n. Cement shall be used in sequence of receipt of shipment, unless or otherwise directed.

TABLE 3-1 - BENDING TOLERANCES

DIMENSIONS OF BENT BARS TOLERANCE

f. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:

i. Concrete cover to formed surface: +/- ¼” (6.0 mm)

Class B Concretes shall be used only where specified.

3.4.7.3 Water Content of Concrete

Maximum permissible water-cement ratios for concrete in severe exposures to be as follows,

a. If required or permitted, admixtures used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

3.4.7.6 Methods of Obtaining Mix Design

c. The actual sequence of construction proposed by CONTRACTOR shall be subject to

3.4.7.11 Construction Joints

3.4.7.12 Embedded Items

a. All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, so that the concrete is thoroughly